Home

Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup

1. Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys dsm opt Syntax 148 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Save gt gt ENCryptkey gt lt prompt Parameters save Specifies that you want to save the encryption key password to a local TSM PWD file If you set the encryptkey option to save you are only prompted the first time you perform an operation Thereafter Tivoli Storage Manager does not prompt for the password This is the default prompt Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for the password for each backup archive and restore operation Examples Options file encryptkey prompt Command line encryptkey prompt Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 149 Errorlogname Authorized User The errorlogname option specifies the fully qualified path and file name of the file where you want to store information about errors that occur during processing The value for this option overrides the DSM_LOG or DSM_DIR environment variables The dsmwebcl log and dsmsched 1og files will be created in the same directory as dsmerror log Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt ERRORLOGName filespec gt lt Parameters filespec
2. Syntax server gt gt LOCation gt lt file tape Parameters server Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set on the server This is the default file Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set on a local file tape Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set on a local tape device It is no longer necessary to specify a specific tape device type name Specifying location tape covers all tape device types This parameter is valid for Solaris AIX AIX 5L and HP UX clients Note For Solaris AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris If you want to restore a backup set from a 3570 or 3590 tape device but you do not have the 3570 or 3590 generic device driver on your client workstation you can download these device drivers from the following Web site ftp ftp software ibm com storage devdrvr For Solaris Use tapes that are fully compliant with Sun standards Examples Command line restore backupset dev rmt0 loc tape restore backupset mybackupsetname loc server restore backupset home budget backupsetfile name loc file 254 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Mode The mode option specifies whether you want to perform a selective or incremental image backup non NAS objects or a full or differential image backup of NAS file systems The mode option has no effect on a raw logical dev
3. Move to the beginning of the previous word Ctrl left arrow or CTRL L Move to the beginning of the next word Ctrl right arrow or CTRL R Delete a character to the right of the cursor Delete Delete a character to the left of the cursor Backspace Insert a character Toggle the Insert key Erase to the end of the line Ctrl delete or Ctrl D Finish or execute the command Enter Quit the program F3 or Esc End the program CTRL C 276 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Using Wildcard Characters In a command you can use wildcard characters in the file name or file extension only You cannot use them to specify destination files file systems or directories You cannot specify a directory whose name contains an asterisk or a question Mark Tivoli Storage Manager recognizes these characters only as wildcard characters Use wildcard characters when you want to specify multiple files with similar names in one command Without wildcard characters you must repeat the command for each file Valid wildcard characters that you can use include Asterisk Matches zero or more characters Question mark Matches any single character at the present position able 3d shows examples of each wildcard Table 36 Wildcard Characters Pattern Matches Does Not Match Asterisk ab ab abb abxxx a b aa bb
4. Httpsport Authorized User The httpsport option specifies a TCP IP port address for the HTTPS secure socket layer SSL interface to the Web client Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for the AIX and AIX 5L clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt HTTPSport port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address that is used by the HTTPS secure socket layer SSL interface to communicate with the Web client The range of values is 0 and 1000 through 32767 the default is 0 which disables HTTPS Examples Options file httpsport 1548 Command line Does not apply 160 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Imagetype Authorized User Use the imagetype option with the with the backup image command or the include image option to specify the type of image backup you want to perform Place the include image statement containing the imagetype value in your client system options file dsm sys Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX5L Solaris HP UX and Linux86 clients only Syntax gt gt IMAGEtype value gt lt Parameters value Specifies one of the following values snapshot Specifies tha
5. Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt COMMRESTARTDuration minutes gt lt Parameters minutes The maximum number of minutes you want the client to attempt to reconnect with a server after a communication failure occurs The range of values is zero through 9999 the default is 60 Examples Options file commrestartduration 90 Command line Does not apply 128 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Commrestartinterval Authorized User The commrestartinterval option specifies the number of seconds you want the client to wait between attempts to reconnect with a server after a communication error occurs Note Use this option only when commrestartduration is a value greater than zero You can use the commrestartduration option and the commrestartinterval in busy or unstable network environments to decrease connection failures Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt COMMRESTARTInterval seconds gt lt Parameters seconds The number of seconds you want the client to wait between attempts to reconnect with a server after a communication failure occurs The range of values is zero through 65535 the default is 15 Examples Options file commrestartinterval 30 Command line Does no
6. Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax gt gt LANFREETCPport port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP port number where the Storage Agent is listening The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1500 Examples Options file lanfreetcp 1520 Command line lanfreetcp 1520 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 170 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Largecommbuffers Authorized User The largecommbuffers option specifies whether the client uses increased buffers to transfer large amounts of data between the client and the server You can disable this option when your workstation is running low on memory Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax No gt gt LARGECOMmbuf fers al gt lt yes Parameters No Specifies that increased buffers are not used to transfer large amounts of data to the server This is the default For AIX and AIX 5L the default is Yes Yes Specifies that increased buffers are used to transfer large amounts of data to the server This is the default for AIX and AI
7. If you are an authorized user copy the dsm sys smp file to dsm sys in your installation directory and modify the required options according to your needs The following options are required to establish communication with a Tivoli Storage Manager server SErvername serverl COMMMethod TCPip TCPPort 1500 TCPServeraddress node domain company com Use one of the following methods to modify the dsm sys file e From the client GUI main window open the Utilities menu and select Setup Wizard e From the client GUI main window open the Edit menu and select Preferences e Use your favorite text editor If you update the dsm sys file during a session you must restart the session to pick up the changes etting J for information on how to set options in the dsm sys file Note You must name the client system options file dsm sys Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 107 Creating and Modifying the Client User Options File During the installation Tivoli Storage Manager provides a sample client user options file called dsm opt smp Copy the dsm opt smp file to dsm opt in your installation directory and modify the required options according to your needs This file contains the following options e Communication options e Backup and archive processing options e Restore and retrieve processing options e Scheduling options e Format options e Command processing options e Authorization options e Error processing o
8. To use this To connect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard with supported AIX AIX HP UX VM platforms z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT Shared Memory TCP IP Standard with supported AIX AIX platforms Additional Software Requirements The backup archive client GUI requires e X Window System X11R6 e Motif 1 2 or 2 0 e Common Desktop Environment CDE HP UX Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the HP UX platform Client Components e Backup archive client command line and GUI e Administrative client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API 32 bit and 64 bit e X Open API e Web backup archive client Hardware Requirements e An HP 9000 Series 700 or 800 workstation e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory 64 MB Software Requirements e HP UX 11 0 HP UX 11i 4 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Communications Methods To use this To connect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard with HP UX AIX HP UX VM z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT Shared Memory TCP IP Standard with HP UX HP UX Additional Software Requirements The backu
9. c 80 microsoft cp1251 Setting Processing Environment Variables There are three environment variables you can set which affect Tivoli Storage Manager processing 38 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide DSM_DIR Points to the executable file dsmtca the resource files and the dsm sys file You cannot specify the root directory for DSM_DIR If DSM_DIR is not set the executables are expected in the default installation directory When you request an image or a NAS backup or restore Tivoli Storage Manager uses the DSM_DIR environment variable to locate the corresponding plug in library If DSM_DIR is not set the client will look for the plug in library in the following directories usr tivoli tsm client ba bin plugins for AIX and AIX 5L or opt tivoli tsm client ba bin plugins for Solaris DSM_CONFIG Contains the fully qualified path and file name of the client user options file for users who create their own personalized options file If DSM_CONFIG is not set the client user options file is expected to satisfy both of these requirements 1 The options file should be named dsm opt 2 The options file should reside in the directory pointed to by DSM_DIR However if DSM_DIR is not set then dsm opt is expected in the default installation directory DSM_LOG Points to the directory where you want the dsmerror 1og dsmwebcl 10g and dsmsched 1log files to reside The dsmerror 1
10. registration The process of identifying a client node or administrator to the server by specifying a user ID password and contact information For client nodes a policy domain compression status and deletion privileges are also specified restore A function that permits users to copy a version of a backup file from the storage pool to a workstation or file server The backup copy in the storage pool is not affected Contrast with backup retention The amount of time in days that inactive backed up or archived files are retained in the storage pool before they are deleted The following copy group attributes define retention retain extra versions retain only version retain version retrieve A function permitting users to copy an archived file from the storage pool to the workstation or file server The archive copy in the storage pool is not affected Contrast with archive root user UNIX The authority level for a root user permits this user to do authorized tasks for Tivoli Storage Manager S SAN Storage area network scheduling mode The type of scheduling operation for the client server node Tivoli Storage Manager supports two scheduling modes client polling and server prompted scroll Move through a list of items in a window by operating the scrollbars with the mouse cursor select Choose an item from a list or group of items selective backup A function permitting users to back up specified files These files
11. servername In the client system options file dsm sys this option specifies the name of a server In the client user options file dsm opt this option specifies the Tivoli Storage Manager server to contact for services El EIEI El virtualnodename Specifies the name of another client node Use this option if you want to restore or retrieve your files from a Tivoli Storage Manager server to a client node other than the one on which you stored files without storing your password in the registry BI Backup and Archive Processing Options You can use the following options to control some aspects of backup and archive processing Table 21 Backup and Archive Processing Options Option Description Page archsymlinkasfile Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to follow a symbolic link and archive the file or directory it points to or archive the symbolic link only automount The automount option is used with the domain option to specify all automounted file systems in the domain that will be mounted when the Tivoli Storage Manager client starts and included for backup services changingretries compressalways Specifies the number of retries when attempting to back up or archive a file that is in use Specifies whether to continue compressing an object if it grows during compression or resend the object uncompressed This option is used with the compression option
12. Examples Task Archive a single file named budget in the home proj1 directory Command archive home projl budget Task Archive all files in the home proj1 directory that contain a file extension of txt Command archive home projl txt Task Archive all files in the directory tree headed by the home directory Command archive subdir yes home Chapter 11 Using Commands 279 Backup Image The backup image command creates an image backup of one or more volumes on your system Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager API must be installed to use the backup image command 2 Image backup of the Sun OFS file system is not supported The Tivoli Storage Manager client must support the raw device type on the specific platform to perform an image backup of a raw device You can only perform an image backup on local devices Clustered devices or file systems as well as devices or file systems shared between two or more systems are not supported If you want to perform an image backup for a file system mounted on a raw device the raw device must be supported See PValume Device Type Support far an Imaga Backup on page 43 for specific information about supported devices for the backup image command Use the include image option to include a file system or logical volume for image backup or to specify volume specific options for image backup Offline and Online Image Backup The traditional offline image backup pre
13. O offline volume backup During an offline volume image backup the volume is locked so that no other system applications can access it during the operation online volume backup During an online volume image backup the volume is available to other system applications during the operation open registration A registration process in which users can register their own workstations or PCs as client nodes with the server Contrast with closed registration options file A file that contains processing options e dsm opt Non UNIX Identifies Tivoli Storage Manager servers specifies communication methods defines scheduling options selects backup archive restore and retrieve options Also called the client options file UNIX Identifies the Tivoli Storage Manager server to contact specifies backup archive restore and retrieve options Also called the client users options file e dsm sys UNIX Contains stanzas describing Tivoli Storage Manager servers to contact for services These stanzas also specify communication methods backup and archive options and select scheduling options Also called the client system options file e TSM User Preferences file For the Macintosh client only Identifies Tivoli Storage Manager servers specifies communication methods defines scheduling options selects backup archive restore and retrieve options Also called the client options file e TSM System Preferences file For the Macintosh
14. Tivoli Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Version 5 Release 1 GC32 0789 00 Tivoli Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Version 5 Release 1 GC32 0789 00 Note Before using this information and the product it supports read the general information under First Edition March 2002 This edition applies to version 5 release 1 modification 0 of Tivoli Storage Manager 5697 ISM 5698 ISM Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition 5697 ISE 5698 ISE and to all subsequent releases and modifications until otherwise indicated in new editions Order publications through your Tivoli representative or the Tivoli branch office that serves your locality Tivoli welcomes your comments You can send us comments about this book electronically at pubs tivoli com Information sent grants Tivoli a nonexclusive right to use or distribute it in any way Tivoli believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1993 2002 All rights reserved US Government Users Restricted Rights Use duplication or disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp Contents Tables Vil Trademarks ix About This Book Xi Conventions Used in This Book xii Reading Syntax Diagrams lt Xii Related Publications XV Summary of Changes
15. dsmc restore home monnett hl doc latest Add the subdir yes option to the command if you need to restore the files in a directory and all of its subdirectories For example if you are recovering an entire file system the home file system in this case you can restore all of the files using dsmc restore home subdir yes If you specify subdir yes when restoring a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively restores all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories Performing Large Restore Operations If you need to restore a large number of files you can get faster performance by using the restore command instead of the GUI In addition you can improve performance by entering multiple restore commands at one time For example to restore all the files in your home file system enter dsmc restore home subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no However if you enter multiple commands for the directories in the home file space you can can restore the files faster For example you could enter these commands dsmc restore home monnett subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no dsmc restore home gillis subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no dsmc restore home stewart subdir yes replace all tapeprompt no You can also use the quiet option with the restore commands to save processing time However you will not receive informational messag
16. e Directories e Access control lists ACLs In addition backup clients recognize AFS DFS mount points Note The AFS DFS versions of Tivoli Storage Manager executable files are available for AIX only Contrasting AIX File Backup Clients The current AIX AFS and DFS file backup clients dsmafs dsmcafs dsmdfs and dsmcdfs include dsm and dsmc functions that are not available in AIX clients See the table able 39 for a summary of the differences Table 38 Differences Between AIX File Backup Clients AIX clients What they can do dsm dsmc Back up and archive AFS and DFS files and directories dsmafs dsmcafs Back up and archive AFS directories files and ACLs In addition they back up mount points dsmdfs dsmcdfs Back up and archive DFS directories files and ACLs In addition they back up mount points Select Backup Functions The commands below contain current AFS and DFS file backup functions Command Function usr tivoli tsm client ba Starts a GUI session with the current bin dsmafs AFS support usr tivoli tsm client ba Starts a command line session with bin dsmcafs the current AFS support usr tivoli tsm client ba Starts a GUI session with the current bin dsmdfs DFS support usr tivoli tsm client ba Starts a command line session with bin dsmcdfs the current DFS support If you want all users to select the same Tivoli Storage Manager backup clients with the current AFS or D
17. etc profile file contains the following path NLSPATH usr dt 1lib nls msg L N cat NLSPATH export NLSPATH If the LANG environment variable is set to C POSIX limiting the valid characters to those with ASCII codes less than 128 or other values with limitations for valid characters the backup archive client skips files containing invalid characters with ASCII codes higher than 127 If you are using a single byte character set SBCS like English as your language environment all file names are valid and backed up by the backup archive client Multi byte characters are interpreted as a set of single bytes all containing valid characters If you are using multi byte character sets MBCS as your language environment the backup archive client backs up file names that consist of valid characters in the current environment For example a file name consisting of Japanese characters may contain invalid multi byte characters if the current language environment is a Chinese character Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager 37 set Files containing invalid multi byte characters are not backed up and are not shown by the graphical user interface If such files are found during backup the dsmerror 1og will list the skipped files When using the backup archive client scheduling mode to back up a whole system it is strongly recommended to set the LANG environment variable to en_US or some other SBCS language to avoid skipped files
18. nodeps TIVsm BA s390 rpm 4 Enter the following command to install the API rpm i TIVsm API s390 rpm Note If all required libs are not installed with rpm please enter the following command rpm i nodeps TIVsm AP1I s390 rpm During installation e The Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive client and Web client files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client ba bin directory The TSM administrative client command line is installed in the opt tivoli tsm client admin bin directory 18 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide e The Tivoli Storage Manager API files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client api bin directory e The TSM documentation files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client books html and opt tivoli tsm client books pdf directories After installation completes see ICh for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Sioape Manager Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 19 Installing the Silicon Graphics IRIX Clients Attention For current installation and configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning Tivoli Storage Manager supported platforms and documentation refer to the Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_megr tivolimain html The following package
19. s Guide For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris To set a particular time format edit the source file for your locale and modify the t_fmt line to support your needs Whatever time format you select applies both to output and to input H M S Displays time in the form hh mm ss with hh ranging from 0 through 23 H M S Displays time in the form hh mm ss with hh ranging from 0 through 23 1 M 0p Displays time in the form hh mm ssA P with hh ranging from 1 through 12 and A P is the local abbreviation for ante meridian AM in English or post meridian PM in English Examples Options file timeformat 4 Command line time 3 Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 221 Txnbytelimit Authorized User The txnbytelimit option specifies the number of kilobytes the client program buffers before it sends a transaction to the server Note The server can also define and adjust this option during self tuning operations A transaction is the unit of work exchanged between the client and server Because the client program can transfer more than one file or directory between the client and server before it commits the data to server storage a transaction can contain more than one file or directory This is called a transaction group This option permits you to control the amount of data sent between the client and server before the server commits the data and changes to the server database thus changing the speed with
20. viii Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Trademarks The following terms are trademarks of the IBM Corporation in the United States or other countries or both AIX Scalable POWERparallel IBM SP2 IBMLink 390 OS 390 System 390 RACF VisualAge RISC System 6000 z OS RS 6000 UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group in the United States and other countries Microsoft Windows Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows NET and the Windows logo are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States other countries or both Jaz and Zip are trademarks or registered trademarks of lomega Corporation in the United States other countries or both Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States other countries or both Tivoli is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation in the United States or other countries or both Other company product and service names may be trademarks or service marks of others Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 ix X Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide About This Book IBM Tivoli Storage Manager is a client server licensed product that provides storage management services in a multi platform computer environment The backup archive client program permits users to back up
21. A WWN is assigned for the life of a connection device Most networking technologies e g Ethernet FDDI etc use a world wide name convention Glossary 367 368 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Index Special Characters 2 71 71 81 E2 72 A absolute mode 101 access control lists backup 58 deleting 287 extended permissions backup 58 permissions archive 87 permissions backup 58 querying 301 ACL file systems supported 294 setting for AFS directories and files 339 setting for DFS directories and files 339 active files displaying 49 303 AFS backup using dsmcafs command 58 using dsmafs command 58 AFS file backup clients 335 AFS DFS backup clients 54 afsbackupmntpnt option 122 336 AIX HACMP takeover environment 341 installing TSM 341 AIX 5L client installing 12 AIX client client components 3 communication methods 4 considerations when upgrading from ADSM AIX 3 1 2 11 13 hardware requirements 4 installing 10 operating system requirements 4 software requirements 4 application program interface API environment variables UNIX 40 archive allocated memory required for processing UNIX restrictions 58 binding management classes to files 104 command 279 copy mode 101 delete file spaces 83 delete files from 86 deleting 288 estimating processing time 85 grace period retention 98 hard links 88 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 archive contin
22. For archived files if the management class to which a file is bound no longer exists and the default management class does not contain an archive copy group the archive retention grace period defined in your policy domain is used The default retention period is 60 days However your administrator can lengthen or shorten this period Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 105 106 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options You can use defaults for processing options or you can tailor the processing options to meet specific needs This chapter e Provides an overview of processing options e Explains how to create and modify a client system options file dsm sys and a client user options file dsm opt e Includes an options reference section that provides detailed information about each option As a quick reference this chapter includes instructions for the following tasks Task Page hod foal hud hal Creating and Modifying the Client System Options File Authorized User During installation Tivoli Storage Manager provides a sample client system options file called dsm sys smp Use this file to specify one or more servers to contact for services and the communications options for each server The file can also include authorization options backup and archive processing options and scheduling options
23. GC32 0794 for more information Use this option when lanfreecommmethod SHAREdmem is specified for communication between the Tivoli Storage Manager client and Storage Agent This enables processing between the client and the SAN attached storage device See 67 for more information about the Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax gt gt LANFREEShmport port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the Shared Memory port number where the Storage Agent is listening The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1510 Examples Options file lanfrees 1520 Command line lanfrees 1520 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 169 Lanfreetcpport Authorized User The lanfreetcpport option specifies the TCP IP port number where the Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent is listening Attention The lanfreetcpport option is not valid if HSM is installed See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients GC32 0794 for more information Use this option when you specify lanfreecommmethod TCPip for communication between the Tivoli Storage Manager client and Storage Agent See 67 for more information about the
24. Options are processed in the following order precedence 1 Options defined on the server with server enforced client options The server overrides client values Options entered locally on the command line Options defined on the server for a schedule using the options parameters Options entered locally in the options file Options received from the server with client options not enforced by the server The server does not override client values 6 Default option values akon Tivoli Storage Manager also includes a group of client command options that you can enter only on the command line with specific commands For a complete list of command line options a description and where to go in this book for more information see K To use an option with a command enter a dash the option name an equal sign and the option parameters For example dsmc incremental domain home For options that do not include parameters enter a dash and the option name For example dsmc incremental quiet Note Use a leading dash to indicate that the following text is the name of an option If an object name begins with a dash you must surround it in either single quotes or double quotes Most operating system command line processors strip the quotes before submitting the command line arguments to the Tivoli Storage Manager client application In such cases using escape characters or doubling the quotes allows t
25. Remembering Previous Commands Using Wildcard Characters Entering Commands Client Commands Reference Archive Backup Image Backup NAS Cancel Process Cancel Restore Delete Access Delete Archive Delete Filespace 229 231 231 234 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 s 201 252 253 254 z 255 256 297 258 259 260 261 262 265 266 267 268 269 271 273 273 273 274 274 274 274 274 275 276 277 277 277 2 279 280 lt 283 285 286 287 288 289 Contents V Expires s p 2 ee Bie e e ee 2 oe Zl Help s 2 o amp t 4 2 ie amp te oh Ah ee xf 292 Incremental ee 293 LOOP i cB we OS ee a Se 48 ee oe a 2B Macro Sos me oS Hk ah ks A Uk 4299 Monitor Process Sogok aoa me ee e ea 6 B00 Query Access s os s s eoe 801 Query Archive s s s e s a a 302 Query Backup ww ee 808 Query Backupset a a 305 Query Filespace s e e e ao w o 306 Query Image so sos so m som s s 307 Query Inclexcl s s s so os omo e o ea s 808 Query Mgmtclass aa a a 309 Query Node eo w oe s w a ol0 Query Restore o s co soci s s s SA Query Schedule om p 312 Query Session s e s we ee BIB Restart Restore 314 Restore ee eee ee B
26. Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt MEMORYEF ficientbackup gt lt Yes Parameters No Your client node uses the faster more memory intensive method when processing incremental backups This is the default Yes Your client node uses the method that requires less memory when processing incremental backups Examples Options file memoryefficientbackup yes Command line memoryef no Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 177 Nasnodename The nasnodename option specifies the node name for the NAS file server when processing NAS file systems The node name identifies the NAS file server to the Tivoli Storage Manager server The server must register the NAS file server Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option You can specify this option on the command line or in the client system options file dsm sys You can override the default value in the dsm sys file by entering a different value on the command line If you do not specify the nasnodename option in the dsm sys file you must specify this option on the command line when processing NAS file systems Supported Clients This option is valid for the AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt NASNodename nodename
27. The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only Syntax gt gt INCREmental gt lt Examples Command line res i home devel projecta incremental 252 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Latest Use the latest option with the restore command to restore the most recent backup version of a file even if the backup is inactive Only active versions are considered for a restore unless you use either the inactive or the latest option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt LATest gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore home devel projecta latest Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 253 Location The location option specifies where Tivoli Storage Manager searches for the backup set for a query or restore operation You can use this option to locate backup sets on the server or local files Tapes that are generated on the server can be used locally by specifying the location option and either the file name or the tape device Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients
28. You can give the user access to backups or archives You must add separate authorizations for backup and archive access even if you want to give the same user access to the same files for both You can authorize all users by using an asterisk for the user name or authorize all nodes by using an asterisk for the node name 3 Click on Add to add the user While you are in the User Access List window you can add several users at once delete users or change your existing authorizations All additions deletions and changes are processed when you click OK Click Cancel to exit the user access list without making any changes 4 Click OK to add the user to the user access list the user is not added until you do this See Query Access on page 301 and for information on using commands The Tivoli Storage Manager node you are authorizing must be registered with your Tivoli Storage Manager server Restoring or Retrieving Another User s Files After users grant you access to their files on the server you can restore or retrieve those files to your local system You can display another user s file spaces on the server restore the other user s backup versions or retrieve the other user s archive copies to your local file system To display another user s file spaces on the server restore the other user s backup versions or retrieve the other user s archive copies to your local drives 1 Click Utilities fro
29. You can access Tivoli publications online at http www tivoli com support documents The documentation for some products is available in PDF and HTML formats Translated documents are also available for some products To access most of the documentation you need an ID and a password To obtain an ID for use on the support Web site go to http www tivoli com support getting You can order documentation by e mail at swdist tivoli com Please provide the publication number part number or order number of the desired document Alternatively you can provide the document title version number and date of publication We are very interested in hearing about your experience with Tivoli products and documentation We also welcome your suggestions for improvements If you have comments or suggestions about our documentation please contact us in one of the following ways e Send e mail to pubs tivoli com e Complete our customer feedback survey at http www tivoli com support survey Chapter 3 Getting Started 51 52 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories Use Tivoli Storage Manager to maintain a set of backup versions of your file system or raw logical volumes on your workstation You can recover these older file versions in the event your current files are lost or damaged This chapter covers different ways to back up files how to
30. dsmc archive home relx dirl v2archive su y Archives these files home relx dir1 filel home relx dirl file2 home relx dirl file3 home relx dirl dir2 file4 home relx dirl dir2 file5 Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not archive home relx dirl and home relx dirl dirz 268 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Volinformation The volinformation option backs up or archives root level information This option applies only when you back up or restore non root files Specify volinformation either with the selective or the archive command or any incremental command that does not target the entire volume Entering the incremental command on an entire volume implicitly backs up the root level information Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax gt gt VOLinformat i on AAADADYNmNmNmNmN ee Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc selective vol Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 269 270 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 11 Using Commands Tivoli Storage Manager provides a command line interface CLI that you can use as an alternative to the graphical user interface GUI This chapter describes how to start or end a client command session a
31. for information about these common options backupsetname Specifies the name of the backup set on the server from which to perform a restore operation You cannot use wildcard characters to specify the backup set name Tivoli Storage Manager restores the backup set from the server via LAN filename Specifies the name of a local file or device from which to perform a restore operation sourcefilespec Specifies the source path which can be a portion of the backup set The default is to restore the entire backup set destinationfilespec Specifies the destination path for the restored files If you do not specify a sourcefilespec you cannot specify a destinationfilespec If you do not specify a destination Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path If you are restoring more than one file you must end the specification with a directory delimiter otherwise Tivoli Storage Manager assumes the last name is a file name and reports an error If you are restoring a single file you can optionally end the specification with a file name if you want to give the restored file a new name Examples Task Restore a backup set called mybackupsetname from the server Command dsmc restore backupset mybackupsetname loc server Task Restore the backup set contained in the backupsetfile name file in the budget directory Command dsmc restore backupset home budget backupsetfile name loc file Task Restore a ba
32. if the exclude file backup HSM client is installed The exclude backup option only excludes files from normal backup but not from HSM exclude archive exclude compression Excludes a file or group of files from archive services Excludes files from compression processing if compression yes is specified This option applies to backups and archives exclude dir Excludes the directory you specify its files and all its subdirectories and their files from backup processing exclude encrypt Excludes specified files from encryption processing exclude fs Excludes file spaces matching a pattern This option is valid for all UNIX clients Bl aoo boo B E exclude fs nas Excludes file systems on the NAS file server from an image backup when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified applies to all NAS file servers The backup nas command ignores all other exclude statements including exclude fs and exclude dir statements This option is for AIX and Solaris clients only Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 113 Table 21 Backup and Archive Processing Options continued Option Description Page exclude image guitreeviewafterbackup Excludes mounted file systems and raw logical volumes that match the pattern from image processing This option is valid for AIX HP UX Solaris and Linux86 only Specifies whether the client is ret
33. matching n characters and directories If a pattern does not begin with a directory separator or one does not follow the file system specification a match all directories is appended to the pattern For example these patterns are equivalent core core The open character class character begins the enumeration of a character class For example xxx abc matches xxxa xxxb or xxxc The character class range includes characters from the first character to the last character specified For example xxx a z matches xxxa XXxb XXXC XXXZ The literal escape character When used within a character class it treats the next character literally When used outside of a character class it is not treated in this way For example if you wish to include the in a character class enter The escape character removes the usual meaning of as the close character class character The close character class character ends the enumeration of a character class Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager 33 Examples Using Wildcards with Include and Exclude Patterns contains examples of ways you might use wildcard characters with include and exclude patterns For more information about using the exclude backup option see Note The include and exclude commands do not work with symbolic links to directories Do not use u in these commands For example instead of entering include
34. must match the value specified for shmport in the server options file Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt SHMPort port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP address that the server is listening on to establish a shared memory connection The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1510 Examples Options file shmport 1520 Command line Does not apply 208 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Snapshotcachesize Authorized User Use the snapshotcachesize option with the backup image command the include image option or in your dsm sys file to specify an appropriate snapshot size so that all old data blocks can be stored during an online image backup A snapshot size of 100 percent will ensure a valid snapshot Supported Clients This option is valid for Linux86 client only The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt SNAPSHOTCACHESize snapshotcachesize gt lt Parameters snapshotcachesize Specifies an appropriate snapshot size so that all old data blocks can be stored during an online image backup The value is a percent of the total size of the vol
35. restoring 78 rebinding files to a different management class 104 recall commands 276 registering client with server 28 using closed registration 28 using open registration 28 replace option 194 required parameters 274 resourceutilization option 195 restart restore command 314 restart interrupted restore 81 restartable restore 73 restartable restore sessions display 311 restore another user s files 81 authorizing another user 81 backup sets overview 79 supported tape devices 318 disk 82 displaying active inactive backups 74 estimating processing time 59 files 66 73 files and directories 75 files to another workstation 82 from portable media overview 79 hard links 70 image 78 using DSM_DIR to point to plug in library 38 local backup set via GUI 79 172 logical volume 78 maximum file size 275 NAS using DSM_DIR to point to plug in library 38 NAS file systems 350 no query 73 performing large operations 76 point in time 77 point in time using command line 78 point in time using GUI 77 processing status window 75 raw logical volume 78 sorting file list 49 summary of options 115 symbolic links 68 UNIX restrictions 69 315 using commands 81 using the Web client 44 restore backupset command 318 restore command 315 performing large operations 76 restore image command 321 restore NAS command 323 restoring files AFS or DFS 339 retain extra versions attribute 100 retain only versions attribute 100 retain versions att
36. sourcefilespec Specifies the name of the NAS file system image you want to restore This parameter is required unless you use the pick option to display a list of NAS images from which to choose You cannot use wildcard characters when specifying the sourcefilespec destinationfilespec Specifies the name of an existing mounted file system on the NAS device over which you want to restore the image This parameter is optional The default is the original location of the file system on the NAS device Examples Task Restore the NAS file system image vol vol1 to the vol vol2 file system on the NAS file server called nas1 Command restore nas nasnodename nasl vol voll vol vol2 Task Restore inactive NAS images Command restore nas nasnodename nas2 pick inactive 324 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Retrieve The retrieve command obtains copies of archived files from the Tivoli Storage Manager server You can retrieve specific files or entire directories Use the description option to specify the descriptions assigned to the files you want to retrieve You can also use the pick option to display a list of your archives From this list you can select an archive to retrieve Retrieve the files into the same directory from which they were archived or in a different directory Tivoli Storage Manager uses the preservepath option with the subtree value as the default for restor
37. 100 percent will ensure a valid snapshot See 09 for more information Special Considerations when Backing Up Images When using the backup image command it is important to be aware of special considerations if you want to do either of the following e Perform point in time restores in the future e Perform an image backup using mode selective or mode incremental If You Intend to Perform a Point in Time Restore Later To ensure that you can perform point in time restores of your file systems including deleting original files 280 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide which no longer exist on the logical volume use a combination of full image backups and the incremental command as described in the steps below 1 Perform a full incremental backup of the logical volume for example dsmc incremental myfilesystem 2 Perform an image backup of the same logical volume for example dsmc backup image myfilesystem 3 Periodically perform incremental backups for example dsmc incremental myfilesystem You must follow these steps in the order shown to ensure that the server records additions and deletions accurately The following command restores the file system to its exact state as of the last incremental backup dsmc restore image myfilesystem incre del If you do not follow the steps exactly two things can occur e After the original image is restored all files backed up w
38. AFS DFS Backup Clients The AFS DFS backup clients are available on AIX workstations Tivoli Storage Manager includes executable files for the graphical user interface and the command line interface in non AFS DFS AFS and DFS versions If you perform a command line backup of AFS or DFS files using the non AFS DFS versions Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the files and saves standard UNIX access permissions and extended permissions but does not back up AFS or DFS access control lists for directories If you want to back up AFS or 54 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide DFS access control lists or to recognize AFS or DFS virtual mount points you must use the AFS or DFS versions of the executable files For more information please see Appendix Using an Include Exclude Options List to Control Processing There may be files on your file systems that you do not want to back up These files may be core files local caches of network file systems operating system or application files that could be easily recovered by reinstalling the program or any other files that you could easily rebuild An Authorized User on your workstation can use the exclude and include options in your include exclude options list to specify which files to exclude from backup processing Tivoli Storage Manager uses the include exclude options file for incremental and selective backups and backs up any file th
39. Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 233 Table 31 Client Command Options continued Command Option Description Commands Page optfile Specifies the options file you want to dsmc exe bss use when you start a session pick Displays a list of files from which you delete archive B59 can select files to delete restore or expire retrieve restore retrieve restore image restore nas pitdate Specifies the file backup date to use query backup 260 when you select files to restore Use restore with the pittime option restore nas query image restore image pittime Specifies a point in time on the query backup bail specified date Use with the pitdate restore option This option is ignored if the restore nas pitdate option is absent query image restore image preservepath Specifies how the restore directory restore baal path is built restore backupset retrieve todate Sets a date limit for files Tivoli query archive baal Storage Manager does not include files query backup that are processed after this date Use restore with the totime option retrieve totime Specifies an ending time on the query archive bed specified date Use with the todate query backup option This option is ignored if the restore todate option is absent retrieve type Displays node types that you specify query node bed v2archive Use this option with the archive archive bash command to archive only files and not directories to t
40. Enable JavaScript For Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers you must enable the Scripting of Java applets This setting is also enabled by default but to verify it 1 Open the Tools menu and select Internet Options 2 From the Internet Options dialog select the Security tab 3 Click the Web content zone in which you will be using the Tivoli Storage Manager Web client and then click the Custom Level button 4 In the Security Settings dialog ensure that Enable is selected under the Scripting of Java applets setting If your browser does not have the correct level of the Java plug in the Web client will notify you and will try to automatically install the correct plug in for you e For Microsoft Internet Explorer browsers The Web client will automatically download and install the 1 3 1_01 JRE Plug in for you If a different level of the JRE exists on your workstation the 1 3 1_01 JRE is installed into a separate directory e For Netscape browsers The Tivoli Storage Manager Web client will provide the link to the web site where you can download the latest 1 3 1 plug in Netscape browsers do not support the automated plug in and JRE installation e For browsers running on HP AIX and SGI platforms Downloading the plug in and JRE requires registration at their web sites so the Tivoli Storage Manager 44 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Web client cannot automate the JRE install
41. For options with a Yes parameter acceptable alternatives are 1 true and on Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 131 Examples Options file compression yes Command line compressi no 132 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Dateformat The dateformat option specifies the format you want to use to display dates The AIX AIX 5L Solaris and HP UX clients support locales other than English that describe every user interface that varies with location or language Solaris and HP UX clients only support English Korean Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese and Japanese locale information The default directories for system supplied locales are as follows e usr lib n1s loc for AIX and AIX 5L e usr lib locale for Solaris e usr lib nls loc locales for HP UX The backup archive and administrative clients obtain format information from the locale definition in effect at the time you start the client Consult the documentation on your local system for details about setting up your locale definition Notes 1 This dateformat option does not affect the Web client The Web client uses the date format for the locale that the browser is running in If the browser is not running in a locale that Tivoli Storage Manager supports the Web client uses the date format for American English 2 When you change the date format and use the schedlogretention option to prune the sch
42. ID with system privilege policy privilege client access authority or client owner authority See a more information about these aulos Note Use the revokeremoteaccess option to restrict an administrator with client access privilege from accessing your workstation through the Web client Administrators with client owner privilege system privilege or policy privilege Installing and Using the Web Client If you did not install the Web client during the installation process you can use the command line to install and configure it To install and configure the Web client from the command line perform the following steps 1 Ensure that you specify passwordaccess generate in the client system options file TEEN For more information on passwordaccess see 2 To generate the Tivoli Storage Manager password start the backup archive client by entering dsmc query session when prompted enter your user ID and password 3 Install the Client Acceptor Service by entering the following command dsmcutil install cad name TSM CAD node nodename password password 4 Install the Remote Client Agent Service by entering the following command dsmcutil install remoteagent name TSM AGENT node nodename password password partnername TSM CAD 5 Start the client acceptor service by entering dsmcad The TSM Remote Client Agent service does not need to be started manually It is automatically started by the TSM Client Acceptor servi
43. If you attempt to archive a file associated with a management class that does not contain an archive copy group the file is not archived e Does the backup copy group contain attributes that back up your files often enough Mode and frequency work together to control how often a file is backed up when you use incremental backup Tivoli Storage Manager does not check those attributes for selective backup e Do the copy groups specify either static or shared static for serialization If serialization is shared dynamic or dynamic you might get fuzzy backups or archive copies Verify that this is acceptable For example you might want to use shared dynamic or dynamic serialization for a file to which log records are continuously added If you used static or shared static serialization the file might never back up because it is constantly in use With shared dynamic or dynamic serialization the file is backed up but the backup version of the file might contain a truncated message Do not use shared dynamic or dynamic serialization for a file if it is very important that the backup version or archive copy contain all changes e Does the backup copy group specify an adequate number of backup versions to keep along with an adequate length of time to keep them e Does the archive copy group specify an adequate length of time to keep archived copies of files Assigning a Management Class to Files A management class defines when your files
44. Installation and User s Guide Query Session The query session command displays information about your session including the current node name when the session was established server information and server connection information Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query SEssion gt lt L options Parameters options For information about common options you can use with the query session command see k Examples Task Display your session information Command query session A sample query session display follows Tivoli Storage Manager Command Line Backup Client Interface Version 3 Release 7 Level 0 0 C Copyright IBM Corporation 1990 1999 All Rights Reserved Node Name EPSILON3 Session established with server FIJI_0918GA AIX RS 6000 Server Version 3 Release 1 Level 0 0 Server date time 09 04 1999 15 09 52 Last access 09 04 1999 15 09 40 Server Connection Information Server Name FIJI_0918GA Server Type AIX RS 6000 Server Version Ver 3 Rel 1 Lev 0 0 Last Access Date 09 04 1999 15 09 40 Delete Backup Files Yes Delete Archive Files Yes Node Name EPSILON3 User Name thompson Chapter 11 Using Commands 313 Restart Restore The restart restore command displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database You can
45. Manager may not be able to restore all objects to the point in time you specify 2 If you delete a file or directory the next time you run an incremental backup the active backup version becomes inactive and the oldest versions that exceed the number specified by the versions data deleted attribute of the management Sr J for more information about the versions data deleted attribute When performing a point in time restore consider the following e Tivoli Storage Manager restores file versions from the most recent backup before the specified point in time date Ensure the point in time that you specify is not the same as the date and time this backup was performed e If the date and time you specify for the object you are trying to restore is earlier than the oldest version that exists on the server Tivoli Storage Manager cannot restore that object e Point in time restore will restore files deleted from the client workstation after the point in time date but not files deleted before this date e Tivoli Storage Manager cannot restore a file created after the point in time date and time When a point in time restore runs files that were created on the client after the point in time date are not deleted To perform a point in time restore from the GUI client use the following steps Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories 77 1 Click the Restore files and directories to your system button in the main window The Restore window
46. Manager ignores this option if you do not specify the todate option Use the totime and todate options with the fromtime and fromdate options to request a list of files that were backed up within a period of time For example you might request a list of files that were backed up between 6 00 AM on July 1 2002 and 11 59 PM on July 30 2002 Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt TOTime time gt lt Parameters time Specifies an ending time If you do not specify a time the time defaults to 23 59 59 Specify the time in the format you selected with the timeformat option When you include the timeformat option in a command it must precede the fromtime pittime and totime options Examples Command line dsmc restore home userl todate 09 17 2002 totime 23 00 00 266 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Type Use the type option with the query node command to specify the type of node to query Supported Clients This option is valid for the AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax any gt p gt TYpe gt lt nas Server client Parameters any Specifies all nodes registered at the server This is the default nas Specifies all NAS nodes regi
47. NLSPATH usr tivoli tsm client ba bin N NLSPATH Note This example assumes that you installed the Web client into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory The NLSPATH setting is used to preserve any previous NLSPATH settings For Windows Open the Windows Start menu and select Settings gt Control Panel Then double click the System icon Select the Environment tab and select the NLSPATH system variable Add the Web client NLSPATH information to the current NLSPATH setting for example 354 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide c program files tivoli tsm baclient N Note This example assumes that you installed the Web client into the c program files tivoli tsm baclient directory To start the TSM Client Acceptor follow the procedures in Starting a Web Client The client starts the initialization of the SSL communication method You can access the Web client using the SSL communication method with any browser that is Java 1 3 1 capable by entering the following URL https your_machine_name httpsport_number where your_machine_name is the hostname of the machine running the Web client with the SSL communication method and httpsport_number is the port number you specified using the httpsport option see 60 for more information The Web client workstation can also be accessed through the system administrative GUI You will receive warning messa
48. Size in bytes AIX 68 589 453 312 64GB AIX 5L 68 589 453 312 64GB HP UX 1 099 511 627 775 1TB 1 Linux86 and 390 9 223 372 036 854 775 807 8EB 1 OS 390 UNIX 4 294 967 295 4GB SGI 18 446 744 073 709 551 615 16EB 1 Solaris 2 6 or higher 1 099 511 627 775 1TB 1 Remembering Previous Commands If you set the editor option to yes in your client options file dsm opt Tivoli Storage Manager permits you to recall and edit as many as 20 previously entered commands by using the Up arrow and Down arrow keys If you set the editor option to no the feature to recall previous commands is not active If the editor and command retrieve functions are not working on a specific workstation setting you should turn off the editor option For more information regarding the editor dito on page 143 z option see Pressing the Up arrow key displays the previous command in memory Pressing the Down arrow key displays the next command in memory able 35 lists other functions you can perform when you recall commands Table 35 Command Recall and Edit Functions Function Press Display the previous command in memory Up arrow Display the next command in memory Down arrow Move to the beginning of the command Home Move to the end of the command End Move to the left Left arrow Move to the right Right arrow Move five spaces to the left Tab left Move five spaces to the right Tab right
49. Solaris yes yes yes HP UX yes yes no SGI yes no yes OS 390 UNIX yes no no Notes 1 The Linux clients are not enabled for automounter support 2 The Linux operating system does not support loopback file systems LOFS Instead a loop device is available to allow devices or files mounted as whole file systems Loop devices are supported by the Tivoli Storage Manager Linux 140 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide clients in the same way as loopback file systems for other UNIX operating systems They are not part of the local domain but domain LOFS You must use the domain option to add them to your domain Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys or the client user options file dsm opt Syntax all local gt gt DOMain gt lt domain t all lofs t all nfs t al 1 auto nfs _all auto lofs Parameters all local Backs up all local file systems except LOFS file systems and LOFS through automounter This is the default The tmp directory is not included domain Defines the file systems to include in your default client domain When you use domain with the incremental command it processes these file systems in addition to those you specify in your default client domain all lofs Backs up all loopback file systems except those handled by automount
50. The Restore Destination window appears Enter the information in the Restore Destination window 5 Click Restore The Restore Task List window displays the restore processing status Transfer statistics may not match the file statistics if the operation was retried due to a failure such as a communications failure or session loss The transfer statistics will show the bytes attempted to be transferred across all command attempts Performing a Command Line Restore Use the restore command to restore files Indicate the file you want to restore and where you want to restore it If you do not indicate a destination the files are restored to their original location For example to restore the home monnett h1 doc file to its original directory enter dsmc restore home monnett hl doc To restore it under a new name use dsmc restore home monnett hl doc home monnett h2 doc If the file you want to restore is not on your workstation and you have run an incremental backup since deleting the file there is no active backup of the file on the server In this case you need to use the latest option to tell the server to Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories 75 restore the most recent backup version If you do not want the most recent version use the pick and inactive options to get a list of backups from which you can select For example if you want to restore the latest version of the deleted file home monnett h1 doc enter
51. UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TCPPort port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address that is used to communicate with a server The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1500 Examples Options file tcpp 1501 Command line tcpport 1501 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 217 Tcpserveraddress Authorized User The tcpserveraddress option specifies the TCP IP address for a server You can obtain this server address from your administrator Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TCPServeraddress server_address gt lt Parameters server_address Specifies a 1 to 64 character TCP IP address for a server Specify a TCP IP domain name or a dot address Examples Options file tcps dsmchost endicott ibm com Command line tcpserveraddress 129 33 24 99 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 218 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tcpwindowsize Authorized User The tcpwindowsize option specifies the amount of data in kilobytes that is buffered when rece
52. a file system backup with the domain option set to all local any subdirectories that are mount points for an automounted file system autofs are excluded from backup when the automounter has mounted these mount points Any files that exist on the server for the automounted subdirectory are expired When performing a backup with the domain option set to all lofs all explicit loopback file systems lofs are backed up and all automounted file systems are excluded For loopback file systems handled by automounter set the domain option to all auto lofs You should use the automount option with the domain option to specify one or more automounted file systems to be mounted and added into the domain The automounted file systems are remounted if they have gone offline in the meantime by using the automount option See Au 4 for more information Virtual mount points cannot be used with automounted file systems For HP UX The domain option is enhanced with the new keywords all auto lofs and all auto nfs to support automounted file systems To use this enhancement set the autofs parameter to 1 in the etc rc config d nfsconf file Changing this parameter requires a reboot For further information please refer to the HP documentation on this issue The following UNIX platforms support automounter LOFS or LOFS through automounter as indicated LOFS through Platform automounter LOFS automounter AIX and AIX 5L yes yes yes
53. a valid command for quiescing your database Command line Initial command line only preschedulecmd quiesce database Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 191 Queryschedperiod Authorized User The queryschedperiod option specifies the number of hours you want the client scheduler to wait between attempts to contact the server for scheduled work This option applies only when you set the schedmode option to polling This option is used only when the scheduler is running Your administrator can also set this option If your administrator specifies a value for this option that value overrides the value set in your client options file after your client node successfully contacts the server Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt QUERYSCHedperiod hours __________________1__1__1__ lt Parameters hours Specifies the number of hours the client scheduler waits between attempts to contact the server for scheduled work The range of values is 1 through 9999 the default is 12 Examples Options file querysch 6 Command line queryschedperiod 8 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 192 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX
54. an incremental by date image backup that backs up only new and changed files after the last full image backup However this only backs up files with a changed date not files with changed permissions See A for more information You must assign a mount point for the volume on which you want to perform an image backup Tivoli Storage Manager will not back up a volume without a mount point Performing an Image Backup from the GUI To create an offline or online image backup of your file system or raw logical volume perform the following steps 1 Click on the Backup files and directories button in the Tivoli Storage Manager main window The Backup window appears 64 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide 2 Expand the directory tree and select the objects you want to back up To back up a raw logical volume locate and expand the RAW directory tree object e To perform an offline image backup select Image Backup from the drop down list e To perform an online image backup select Image Snapshot Backup from the drop down list Linux only e To perform an incremental by date image backup select Incremental Image date only from the drop down list 3 Click Backup The Backup Task List window displays the backup processing status The Backup Report window displays a detailed status report Considerations e Running a full incremental backup after running file system backups and
55. and archive files from their workstations or file servers to storage and restore and retrieve backup versions and archived copies of files to their local file systems In addition to the backup archive client Tivoli Storage Manager includes the following components available on a variety of platforms e A server program that permits systems to perform either as a backup and archive server or migration server for distributed workstations and file servers The server program also supplies hierarchical storage management HSM services e An administrative client program that you can access from a Web browser or the command line The program permits an administrator to control and monitor server activities define storage management policies for backup archive and space management services and set up schedules to perform those services at regular intervals e An application program interface API that permits you to enhance an existing application with storage management services When an application is registered with a server as a client node the application can back up restore archive and retrieve objects from storage e A Web backup archive client that permits an authorized administrator help desk person or end user to perform backup restore archive and retrieve services using a Web browser on a remote machine Associated with Tivoli Storage Manager but sold separately is the Tivoli Space Manager client program which was prev
56. any AFS directory Setting the ACLs and DCE Login Ensure that the dsmcdfs program has the read and list rl permissions on all directories and the read r permission on all files To access files set up the directory and file ACLs correctly An AIX user can log on as the DCE root principal to back up any DFS directory and file Restoring AFS or DFS Files Ensure that you have ACL access to the AFS or DFS destination directories and files where you want to restore the data Setting Processing Options This section provides information about AFS DFS options for AFS DFS file backup clients The table below lists the processing options and their function Table 39 Processing Options Option Function afsbackupmntpnt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to see an AFS mount point as a mount point or as a directory dfsbackupmntpnt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to see a DFS mount point as a mount point or as a directory dfsinclexcl Specifies the path and file name of your DFS include exclude options file Note AFS uses the regular inclexcl options file domain Specifies the file systems you want to include in your client domain for incremental backup Appendix A The AFS and DFS File Backup Clients 339 Table 39 Processing Options continued Option Function exclude Excludes files directories and file systems from backup services virtualmountpoint Defi
57. appears 2 Click the Point in Time button from the Restore window The Point in Time Restore window appears 3 Select the Use a Point in Time date during restore selection box Select the date and time and click OK The point in time that you specified appears in the Point in Time display field in the Restore window 4 Display the objects you want to restore You can search for an object by name filter the directory tree or work with the directories in the directory tree 5 Click the selection boxes next to the objects you want to restore 6 Click the Restore button The Restore Destination window displays Enter the appropriate information 7 Click the Restore button to start the restore The Restore Task List window displays the restore processing status Note If there are no backup versions of a directory for the point in time you specify files within that directory are not restoreable from the GUI However you can restore these files from the command line To ensure that you can view and restore all existing files from the GUI during a point in time restore you must maintain the same number of backup versions for directories as days you are restoring back to You can start point in time restore from the command line client using the pitdate and pittime options with the query and restore commands For example when you use the pitdate and pittime options with the query backup command you establish the point in time for wh
58. archive bail or displays directories only incremental query archive query backup restore retrieve selective filelist Specifies a list of files to be processed archive bad for the command Tivoli Storage delete archive Manager opens the designated filelist expire and processes the files listed within incremental according to the command query backup query archive restore retrieve selective filesonly Backs up restores retrieves or incremental bad displays files only query archive query backup restore retrieve selective fromdate Sets a date limit for files Tivoli query archive basi Storage Manager does not include files processed before this date although older directories might be included 232 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide query backup restore retrieve restore image query image Table 31 Client Command Options continued Command Option Description Commands Page fromnode Displays file spaces for an alternate query archive bad node Also specifies an alternate node query backup from which to restore or retrieve files query filespace query mgmtclass restore retrieve query image restore image fromowner Displays file spaces for an alternate query archive bai owner Also specifies an alternate query backup owner from which to restore or query image retrieve files restore restore image retrieve fromtime Specifies a b
59. archive copies and images that match the file specification you enter Only active backups are considered unless you also use either the inactive or the latest option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt INActive gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore home zoe inactive pick 250 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Incrbydate Note If you have limited time during the week to perform backups but extra time on weekends you can maintain current server storage of your workstation files by performing an incremental backup with the incrbydate option on weekdays and a full incremental backup on weekends Use the incrbydate option with the incremental command to back up new and changed files with a modification date later than the last incremental backup stored at the server unless the file is excluded from backup Files added at the client after the last incremental backup but with a modification date earlier than the last incremental are not backed up An incremental by date updates the date and time of the last incremental at the server If an incremental by date is performed on only part of a file system the date of the last full incremental is not updated and the next incremental by da
60. are away from your office without a network connection and you lose data you can restore the data from the backup set Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories 79 Notes 1 If you cannot restore a backup set from portable media check with your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator to ensure that the portable media was created on a device using a format that is compatible with your device 2 There is no support in the Tivoli Storage Manager API for the backup set format 3 To enable the GUI client to restore a backup set on an attached device on a UNIX standalone workstation without requiring a server connection use the localbackupset option See for more information 4 Note that the restore backupset command supports restore of local backup sets from local media without using the localbackupset option Restoring an Entire or Partial Backup Set Tivoli Storage Manager considers a backup set as one object containing the whole file structure You can restore the entire backup set or just select portions The backup set media is self describing and contains all the information required to perform a successful restore Use the GUI to restore an entire backup set only The command line can_be used to restore an entire backup set or individual files within a backup set See Backunset on page 314 for information on how to use the restore backupset command Restoring Backup Sets Using the GUI Attention Before you begin a r
61. backup versions retained for files and directories that you erased from your drive This parameter is ignored as long as the file or directory remains on your drive If you erase the file or directory the next time you run an incremental backup the active backup version is changed to inactive and the oldest versions are erased that exceed the number specified by this parameter The expiration date for the remaining versions is based on the retain extra versions and retain only version parameters Retain Extra Versions The Retain Extra Versions attribute specifies how many days all but the most recent backup version is retained The most recent version is the active version and active versions are never erased If Nolimit is specified extra backup versions are deleted based on the versions data exists or the versions data deleted parameter settings Retain Only Version The Retain Only Version attribute specifies the number of days the last remaining inactive version of a file or directory is retained If Nolimit is specified the last version is retained indefinitely This parameter goes into effect during the next incremental backup after a file is deleted from the client machine Any subsequent updates to this parameter will not affect files that are already inactive For example If this parameter is set to 10 days when a file is inactivated during an incremental backup the file will be expired in 10 days Copy Serialization Th
62. c0tld0sO Solaris The client must support the raw device type on the specific platform in order to perform an image backup of a raw device If you want to perform an image backup for a file system mounted on a raw device the raw device must be supported Remember to specify raw devices by their block device name Note You should not back up disk slices containing cylinder 0 on Solaris because the volume table of contents VTOC will be overwritten after a restore Incremental by Date of Last Image Backup You can perform an incremental by date image backup to back up files that have changed since your last image backup The following restrictions apply e The file system can have no previous full incremental backups produced by the incremental command e You can perform the backup only on formatted volumes not on raw logical volumes e Incremental by date image backup does not inactivate files on the server therefore when you restore an image with the incremental option files deleted after the original image backup will be present after the restore e If this is the first image backup for the file system a full image backup is performed Performing an Image Backup Using Command Line Client Use the backup image and restore image commands to perform offline or online image backup and restore operations on a single volume See Ba base 28d and for more information Use the mode option with the backup image command to perform
63. dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the time that elapses from the beginning to the end of the process Both Tivoli Storage Manager processing and network time are included in the aggregate transfer rate Therefore the aggregate transfer rate is lower than the network transfer rate Note On occasion the aggregate data transfer rate may be higher than the network data transfer rate This is because the backup archive client can have multiple simultaneous sessions with the backup server When multiple sessions are open during backup the data transfer time represents the sum of the times reported by all sessions In this case aggregate data transfer time is mistakenly reported as higher However when running with a single session the aggregate data transfer rate should always be reported as lower than the network data transfer rate Objects compressed by Specifies the number of file data bytes sent over the net divided by the original size of the file on disk For example if the net data bytes are 10K and the file is 100K then Objects compressed by 1 10240 102400 x 100 90 Elapsed processing time The active processing time to complete a command This is calculated by subtracting the starting time of a command process from the ending time of the completed command process Total number of bytes transferred LanFree bytes transferred Performing an Image Backup Root User From your local workstation you can b
64. domain option Other options can be set as desired Defining the Client as an HACMP Application The Tivoli Storage Manager client must be defined as an application to HACMP to participate in failover processing See HACMP for AIX 4 4 1 Installation Guide C23 4278 for detailed instructions on how to perform this procedure Following is a summary of this procedure 1 Start HACMP for AIX system management with the following command smit hacmp Select Cluster Configuration Cluster Resources Define Application Servers and Add an Application Server Enter the following field values Server Name Enter an ASCII text string that identifies the server You use this name to refer to the application server when you define it as a resource during node configuration The server name can include alphabetic and numeric characters and underscores Use no more than 31 characters Appendix B TSM in an HACMP Takeover Environment 343 Start Script Enter the full path name of the script that starts the server This script is called by the cluster event scripts and must reside on a local disk This script must be in the same location on each cluster node that might start the server The start script is used in the following cases a when HACMP is started and resource groups are activated b when a failover occurs and the resource group is started on another node c when fallback occurs a failed node re enters the cluster and the reso
65. dsm sys Syntax N D gt gt ERRORLOGRetention 4 Ldays LS Parameters N or days Specifies how long to wait before pruning the error log N Do not prune the error log This permits the error log to grow indefinitely This is the default days The number of days to keep log file entries before pruning the log The range of values is zero through 9999 Dors Specifies whether to save the pruned entries Enter a space or comma to separate this parameter from the previous one D Discard the error log entries when you prune the log This is the default S Save the error log entries when you prune the log The pruned entries are copied from the error log to the dsmerlog pru file located in the same directory as the error log Examples Options file errorlogretention 400 S Command line errorlogr 400 S This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 151 Exclude Options Authorized User The exclude options exclude objects from backup image or archive services For example you might want to exclude all temporary files any local caches of network files all files that contain compiled object code that you can easily reproduce using other methods or your operating system files You can exclude specific files from encryption processing during a backup Notes 1 With the exception of exclude fs when you
66. dsmc res fs hl m1 u ann su yes preser none Restores these directories and files u ann file a u ann file b u ann file x u ann file y 264 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Todate Use the todate option with the totime option to specify an ending date and time For example you might request a list of files that were backed up before 11 59 PM on June 30 2002 Use the todate and totime options with the fromtime and fromdate options to request a list of backed up or archived files within a period of time For example you might request a list of files that were backed up between 6 00 AM on July 1 2002 and 11 59 PM on July 30 2002 Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt TODate date gt lt Parameters date Specifies an ending date Enter the date in the format you selected with the dateformat option When you include dateformat with a command it must precede the fromdate pitdate and todate options Examples Command line dsmc restore home userl todate 12 11 2002 Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 265 Totime Use the totime option with the todate option to specify an ending time on a specified date For example you might request a list of files that were backed up before 11 59 PM on June 30 2002 Tivoli Storage
67. each file For example to archive a group of files and assign the same description Project X to each file you would enter dsmc archive description Project X home allproj You can then use the description to retrieve all of the files Examples Command line dsmc archive home foo prj des 2002 Budget for Proj 1 Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 239 Detail The detail option displays detailed information about each management class in your active policy set If you do not use the detail option only the management class name and a brief description displays If you specify the detail option information about attributes in each copy group contained in each management class will display A management class can contain a backup copy group an archive copy group both or neither Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc query mgmtclass detail dsmc query filespace detail 240 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Dirsonly The dirsonly option processes directories only The client does not process files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt D
68. exclude a file that was previously included existing backup versions become inactive during the next incremental backup 2 The server can define exclude options with the inclexcl option Exclude any system files or images that could corrupt the operating system when recovered You should also exclude the client directory containing the client files Use wildcard characters to exclude a broad range of files See inchiding and x j for a list of wildcard characters that you can use Then if necessary use the include option to make exceptions To exclude an entire directory called any test enter the following exclude dir any test To exclude subdirectories that begin with test under the any directory enter the following exclude dir any test Attention See should always exclude 2 for a list of files that you Compression Processing If you want to exclude specific files or groups of files from compression processing during a backup or archive operation consider the following e You must set the compression option to yes to enable compression processing If you do not specify the compression option or you set the compression option to no Tivoli Storage Manager does not perform compression processing See for more information If you set the compression option to yes and no exclude compression statements exist Tivoli Storage Manager considers all files for compression processing e Tivoli Storage Manager proc
69. file names begin with proj Back up the single file named budget in the user home directory Command selective home devel proj user home budget Task Back up the home file system Command selective home 330 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Set Access The set access command gives users at other nodes access to your backup versions archived copies or backup images You can give another user access to a specific file or image multiple files or images or all files or images in a directory When you give access to another user that user can restore or retrieve your objects Specify in the command whether you are giving access to archives or backups Note You cannot give access to both archives and backups using a single command Supported Clients Syntax This command is valid for all UNIX clients SET Access ale ee node 7 gt user Backup image fs gt lt f Parameters Archive Permits access to archived files or images Backup Permits access to backup versions of files or images filespec Specifies the path file image or directory to which your are giving access to another node or user Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or images or all files and images in a directory all objects in a directory branch or all objects in a file system Use a single asterisk for the file
70. file that is stored in the same directory as the schedule log Examples Options file schedlogretention 30 S Command line schedlogretention 30 S This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 201 Schedmode Authorized User The schedmode option specifies whether you want to use the polling mode your client node periodically queries the server for scheduled work or the prompted mode the server contacts your client node when it is time to start a scheduled operation All communication methods can use the client polling mode but only TCP IP can use the server prompted mode Note This option applies only if you are using the TCP IP communication method and the schedule command is running Your administrator can specify that the server support both modes or just one mode If your administrator specifies that both modes are supported you can select either schedule mode If your administrator specifies only one mode you must specify that mode in your client options file or scheduled work will not process If you specify the prompted mode you must supply values for the tcpclientaddress and tcpclientport options on the schedule command You can then be contacted at an address or port other than the one that made first contact with the server Notes 1 Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outs
71. files However you can still back up test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files using a selective backup as follows dsmc sel subdir yes test dan datal However the next time you perform an incremental backup these backup versions are expired If you exclude a directory that was previously included Tivoli Storage Manager marks existing backup versions of the files and directories beneath it inactive during the next incremental backup Use this option to exclude a portion of your data in which no underlying files need to be backed up The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option exclude encrypt Excludes the specified files from encryption processing exclude fs Excludes file spaces matching the pattern The client does not consider the specified file space for processing and the usual deleted file expiration process cannot occur If you exclude a file space that was previously included existing backup versions remain on the server subject to retention rules specified in the associated management class definition exclude fs nas Excludes file systems on the NAS file server from an image backup when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified applies to all NAS file servers The backup nas command ignores all other exclude statements including exclude fs and exclude dir statements This option is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clie
72. following e LAN free data transfer e High performance and scalable backups and restores e Backup to local tape devices without network traffic rs following support is provided Full file system image backup of all files within a NAS file system e Differential file system image backup of all files that have changed since the last full image backup e Parallel backup and restore operations when processing multiple NAS file systems e Choice of interfaces to initiate monitor or cancel backup and restore operations Web client Backup archive command line client Administrative command line client backup and restore operations can be scheduled using the administrative command scheduler Administrative Web client The following functions are not supported e Archive and retrieve e Restoring or tracking of individual files within a file system image e Client scheduling Use server commands to schedule a NAS backup e Detection of damaged files e Data transfer operations for NAS data stored by Tivoli Storage Manager Migration Reclamation Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 347 Storage pool backup and restore Move data Export Backup set generation Backing up NAS File Systems using the Web Client GUI For information on how to install and configure the Web client see Installing andl For both the Web client GUI and the command line client you must specify passwordaccess generate which
73. for Tivoli Storage Manager xvii Technical Changes for Version 5 1 Apal 2002 Xvii Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 1 Root and Authorized Usir Tasks si Migrating from Earlier Versions amp al Upgrade Path for Clients and Servers ao Upgrading from ADSM Version 3 1 to a Later Client Version ah hl ds gh ob b 4 5 2 ACL Support 2 Data Protection for NDMP Version 5 1 Requirements Enterprise Edition only 2 Processing Virtual Mount Points lt 9 Additional Migration Information 3 Client Environment Requirements wid AIX Client Environment io HP UX Client Environment 4 Linux for X86 Client Environment P Linux for zSeries or S 390 Client Environment 6 OS 390 UNIX System Services Client Environment 6 Silicon Graphics IRIX Client Environment 7 Solaris Client Environment 8 Pre Installation Information 8 Online Startup Information 9 Installing the Backup Archive Client 9 Installing the AIX Clients 10 Installing the AIX 5L Client 12 Installing the HP UX Clients 14 Installing the Linux86 Client 16 Installing the Linux390 Client 18 Installing the Silicon Graphics IRIX Clients 20 Installing the Solaris Clients es 21 Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli a Manager 25 Creating and Modifying ie Client Options File Required Root User or Authorized User Task 25 Creating a Default Client User Options File Optional Root User or Authorized User Task 26 Registering Your Works
74. for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 3 Getting Started This chapter includes instructions for the following tasks rg D ga El El 6l Bel E A E E BS eS E Tivoli Storage Manager Client Authentication When using the native backup archive GUI or command line clients or the Web client you can logon using a nodename and password or administrative user ID and password Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for your user ID and compares it to the configured nodename If they match Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to authenticate the user ID as a nodename If the authentication fails or if the user ID does not match the configured nodename the client attempts to authenticate the user ID as an administrative user ID To use an administrative user ID with any of the backup archive clients the user ID must have one of the following authorities e System privilege Authority over the entire system e Policy privilege Authority over the node s domain e Client owner Authority over the configured nodename With client owner authority you own the data and have physical access to it To use the Web Client you need to have an administrative user ID with client access authority over the configured nodename From the Web Client you can back up and restore files on the client machine you are remotely accessing However you cannot use a remote Web Client to rest
75. from the stack below the line In this example A is the default You can override A by choosing B or C You can also specify the default explicitly Repeatable Choices A stack of items followed by an arrow returning to the left means you can select more than one item or in some cases repeat pp Y 4 a a single item In this example you can choose any combination of A B or C xiv Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Syntax Diagram Description Example Syntax Fragments The fragment name mo Some diagrams because of their length must fragment the syntax The fragment name appears between vertical bars in the diagram The fragment name The expanded fragment appears between vertical bars in the diagram after a heading A with the same fragment name B Lc Related Publications Included here is a list of the publications that are referred to in this manual Table 2 Tivoli Storage Manager Client Publications Publication Title Order Number Tivoli Storage Manager Messages GC32 0767 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Backup Archive Clients GC32 0788 Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager for NetWare Backup Archive Client Installation GC32 0786 and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager for Macintosh Backup Archive Client GC32 0787 Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Space M
76. gt MAcro macroname gt lt Parameters macroname Specifies the fully qualified name of the file containing the commands Examples The following is an example of how to use the macro command Task Selectively back up files in the following directories devel project proja devel project projb devel project projc Command macro backabc mac where backabc mac contains the following statements Selective devel project proja Selective devel project projb Selective devel project projc Chapter 11 Using Commands 299 Monitor Process The monitor process command displays a list of current backup and restore processes for all NAS nodes for which the administrative user has authority The administrative user can then select one process to monitor Client owner privilege over a particular NAS node is sufficient authority to monitor the selected NAS process When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Syntax gt e MONitor Process Parameters There are no parameters for this command Examples Task Monitor a current NAS backup process Command monitor process 300 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Query Access The query access command displays a list of users to whom you hav
77. gt lt Parameters nodename Specifies the node name for the NAS file server Examples Options file nasnodename nas2 Command line nasnodename nas2 178 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Nfstimeout The nfstimeout option specifies the number of seconds the server waits for a status system call on an NFS file system before it times out You can use this option to mitigate the default behavior of status calls on NFS file systems For example if an NFS file system is stale a status system call will be timed out by NFS softmounted or hang the process hardmounted When the value of this option is changed to a value other than zero a new child process is created to issue the status system call The new process is timed out by the main parent process and the operation can continue Note The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza or the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt NFSTIMEout number i Parameters number Specifies the number of seconds the server waits for a status system call on an NFS file system before timing out The default is 0 seconds Examples Options file nfstimeout 10 Command line nfstimeout 10 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not
78. home newdevel projectn Task Retrieve files in the user project directory Use the pick option Command ret user project pick Task Retrieve all files archived from the proj directory with the description 2002 survey results Command retrieve proj desc 2002 survey results Task Retrieve archived file home devel budget with description my budget to the dev rmt1 tape drive Command mkfifo fifo dd if fifo of dev rmt1 amp dsmc retrieve replace yes description mybudget home devel budget fifo 326 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Schedule Authorized User The schedule command starts the client scheduler on your workstation The client scheduler must be running before scheduled work can start If the schedmode option is set to polling when you start the client scheduler it continuously contacts the server for scheduled events based on the time you specified with the queryschedperiod option in your client user options file dsm opt If your administrator sets the queryschedperiod option for all nodes that setting overrides your setting If you are using TCP IP communications the server can prompt your workstation when it is time to run a scheduled event To do so set the schedmode option to prompted in the client user options file dsm opt or on the schedule command Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the client scheduler runnin
79. is hard mounted the NFS daemons will try repeatedly to contact the server The NFS daemon retries will not time out Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide will affect system performance and you cannot interrupt them but control will return to Tivoli Storage Manager when the nfstimeout value is reached Soft mount If the NFS file system is soft mounted NFS will try repeatedly to contact the server until either e A connection is established e The NFS retry threshold is met e The nfstimeout value is reached When one of these events occurs control returns to the calling program Backing Up Opened Files Tivoli Storage Manager looks for files that have changed between the start and the completion of the file s backup Some files on your system may be in use or open when you try to back them up Because an open file may change a backup action might not reflect the correct contents of the file at a given time Consider if a file is important Can you build the file again If the file is not important you may not want to back up the file Or if the file is important a root user on your workstation can ensure the file is closed before back up If your backups run on a schedule a root user can use the preschedulecmd option to enter a command to close the file For example if the open file is a database use the database s quiesce command to shut down the database A root user ca
80. letter A through Z uppercase or lowercase 0 9 Any number 0 through 9 Plus Period _ Underscore Hyphen amp Ampersand Examples Options file password secretword Command line password secretword This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 184 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Passwordaccess Authorized User The passwordaccess option specifies whether you want to generate your password automatically or set as a user prompt Your administrator can require a password for your client node by enabling the authentication feature Ask your administrator if a password is required for your client node If a password is required you can choose to e Set the password for your client node yourself and have Tivoli Storage Manager prompt for it each time you request services e Let Tivoli Storage Manager automatically generate a new password for your client node each time it expires encrypt and store the password in a file and retrieve the password from that file when you request services You are not prompted for the password Use the passworddir option in your client system options file dsm sys to specify the directory location in which to store the encrypted password file The default directory location depends on how the client was installed When the passwordaccess option is set to generate and you specify the password
81. linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 help displaying online 50 online forum 50 service and technical support 50 help command 292 HP UX client client components 4 communication methods 5 hardware requirements 4 installing 14 operating system requirements 4 software requirements 5 httpport option 159 https secure socket layer SSL specifying TCP IP port address for 160 httpsport option 160 l identifying DFS include exclude file 137 identifying AFS user accounts 225 ifnewer option 249 image backup 62 considerations 63 backup image command 280 restoring 78 image backup backing up a file space 63 considerations 63 example 65 file systems or logical volumes 280 incremental by date restrictions 64 offline and online 62 perform 62 point in time restore 280 server free 280 supported devices 63 using mode option 281 using the GUI 64 inactive files displaying 49 303 inactive option 250 inclexcl option 162 include option management class 102 processing 34 373 Index include option continued wildcard characters 33 34 include options include 163 include archive 163 include backup 163 include compression 163 include encrypt 163 include file 163 include fs nas 163 include image 163 include exclude file 137 include exclude list creating 29 query order of processing 308 include exclude options file bottom up processing 34 description 55 specifyi
82. lost because it was not part of the original image 2 Based on the information from the server about subsequent incremental backups the client removes files 1 and 2 3 The client restores file 4 4 The client restores the latest version of file 3 Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 65 LAN Free Data Movement AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients support LAN free data movement which shifts the movement of client data from the communications network to a storage area network SAN Shifting the client data movement from the communications network to a SAN decreases the load on the Tivoli Storage Manager server The SAN provides a path that allows you to backup restore archive and retrieve data to and from a SAN attached storage device Client data moves over the SAN to the storage device via the Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent The Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent must be installed on the same system as the client LAN Free Prerequisites To enable LAN Free support you must install and configure the Tivoli Storage Manager Managed System for SAN feature on the client workstation For more information refer to the following publications e Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Managed System for SAN Storage Agent User s Guide GC32 0771 e Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Managed System for SAN Storage Agent User s Guide GC32 0781 e Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Managed System for SAN Storage Agent User s
83. managementclass Specifies an available management class in the active policy set of your policy domain This management class overrides the default management class for the files you are archiving Examples Command line dsmc archive archmc RET2YRS home plan projl budget jan 236 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Class The class option specifies whether to display a list of NAS objects or client objects when using the following commands e query backup e delete filespace e query filespace For example to display a list of the file spaces belonging to a NAS node specify the class nas option with the query filespace command Supported Clients This option is valid for the AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only clients The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Syntax mcl nc CLASS gt lt F Parameters nas Specifies that you want to display a list of file spaces for a NAS node client Specifies that you want to display a list of file spaces for a client node This is the default Examples Command line q backup class nas Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 237 Deletefiles Use the deletefiles option with the archive command to delete files from your workstation after you archive them You can also use this option with the restore image command and the incremental option to delete files from the restored i
84. mount points in different ways You also can create a mount point for a root fileset of a foreign cell This action expands your subdirectory to include a large tree that would be unimportant to back up With AFS you can add volume mount points in any directory where you have write access The command for performing this task is the AFS fs mkmount command With DFS you can add fileset mount points in any directory where you have write access The command for performing this task is the DFS fts crmount command The following options address these problems e afsbackupmntpnt e dfsbackupmntpnt e virtualmountpoint e domain The Afsbackupmntpnt Option By default Tivoli Storage Manager AFS file backup clients do not cross AFS mount points AFS mount points and symbolic links require similar backups For example if you define afs xyz cell u foo as a Tivoli Storage Manager virtual mount point and enter this command incremental afs xyz cell u foo Tivoli Storage Manager performs the following incremental backup for foo 336 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide 1 Backs up any files under foo that are eligible for backup 2 Backs up directories under foo that are not AFS mount points 3 Backs up mount point information for any AFS mount point under foo Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not process files or subdirectories under any AFS mount point encountered under foo P
85. number of objects backed up How Special File Systems are Handled Special file systems contain dynamic information generated by the operating system they contain no data or files The Tivoli Storage Manager client ignores special file systems and their contents Special file systems include the following e the proc file system on most of the UNIX platforms e the dev fd file system on Solaris and SGI e the dev pts on Linux How Files are Assigned to Management Classes Tivoli Storage Manager uses management classes to determine how to manage your backups on the server Every time you back up a file the file is assigned a management class The management class used is either a default selected for you or one assigned to the file by an Authorized User with an include option in the include exclude options list The selected oo class must contain a backup for more oaan on management dee how an Authorized User assigns management classes to files and storage management policies EET Understanding How Symbolic Links are Handled A UNIX symbolic link is a file that contains a pointer to another file or directory Tivoli Storage Manager handles symbolic links differently than it does regular files and directories In some operations such as a backup only the path information that the symbolic link contains is backed up In other operations such as archive the file to which the symbolic link points is archived but under the name of t
86. or a similar problem When such a failure occurs the file space is locked on the server and its files cannot be moved off the server s sequential volumes To unlock the file space either restart the restore and allow it to complete restart restore command or cancel the restore cancel restore command Use query restore to determine if you have any restartable restore sessions and which file spaces are affected Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query Restore options Parameters options For information about common options you can use with the query restore command see K Examples Task Display your restartable restore session in the server database Command query restore Chapter 11 Using Commands 311 Query Schedule The query schedule command displays the events scheduled for your node Your administrator can set up schedules to perform automatic backups and archives for you To plan your work use this command to determine when the next scheduled events occur Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query SCHedule gt lt a pitong Parameters options You can use the dateformat common option with the query schedule command See KDa j for more information Examples Task Display your scheduled events Command query schedule 312 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients
87. request Tivoli Storage Manager services If you use the groups option the users option or both only users included in one of the specified groups or included in the list of users can request Tivoli Storage Manager services Define your root user name only with the users option to exclude all other users from accessing the server Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax p gt _USERs username gt lt Parameters username Names a user that you want to authorize to request Tivoli Storage Manager services Examples Options file users carol larry davecd kathyba michelle users amyb tkaspar kbsmith egray srjames Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 223 Verbose The verbose option specifies that you want processing information to display on your screen This is the default When you run the incremental selective or archive commands information displays about each file that is backed up Use the quiet option if you do not want to display this information The following behavior applies when using the verbose and quiet options e If the server specifies either the quiet or verbose option in the server client option set the server settings override the client values even if force is set to No on
88. restore command and do not specify any of the options inactive latest pick fromdate or todate the client uses a different method for retrieving files and directories from the server This method is called no query restore because instead of querying the server for each object to be restored a single restore request is sent to the server This request results in files and directories being returned directly from the server without further action by the client The client merely accepts the data coming from the server and restores it to the destination named on the restore command An example of an unrestricted wildcard command would be home mydocs 1999 An example of a restricted wildcard command would be home mydocs 1999 sales When the client uses this method the restore session is treated differently If the restore process is interrupted for any reason such as a power outage or network failure the server records the point at which the restore was interrupted This record is known to the client as a restartable restore It is possible to create more than one restartable restore session Use the query restore command to find out if your client has any restartable restore sessions in the server database Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 73 The existence of a restartable restore inhibits further backups of that file system until the restartable restore is completed If you attempt to repeat the restore that was interrupted or tr
89. series of commands can process more quickly Tivoli Storage Manager processes the commands and returns to the tsm gt prompt Process Commands in Batch Mode When you enter a single command in batch mode precede it with the executable program name dsmc Tivoli Storage Manager processes the command and returns to the shell command prompt For example to process the incremental command in batch mode you would enter dsmc incremental If a password is required Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you each time you enter a command if the passwordaccess option is set to prompt and authentication on the server is set to On Type your password and press Enter You can also enter your password using the password option with a command but your password appears on the screen For example if your password is secret enter dsmc incremental password secret If you set the passwordaccess option to generate in your dsm opt file you do not need to specify the password with the command Tivoli Storage Manager only prompts you for your password if you are registering your workstation with a server or manually changing your password Process Commands in Interactive Mode Use the interactive mode to enter a series of commands Enter dsmc on the command line and press Enter When the tsm gt command prompt appears type the command name and press Enter Do not precede each command with the executable program name dsmc Alternatively you can enter dsmc
90. spec to give access to all files or images owned by you and backed up on the server When the command set access backup node is entered no check is made with the server it is assumed you have at least one object backed up If you give access to a branch of the current working directory you only need to specify the branch If you give access to objects that are not in a branch of the current working directory you must specify the complete path The file spec to which you gave access must have at least one backup version or archive copy object file or directory on the server To give access to all objects below a certain level use an asterisk directory delimiter and an asterisk at the end of your file spec For example to give access to all objects below home test use file spec home test To specify all files or images in a named directory enter home mine proj1l on the command line To specify all files or images in all directories off of the root directory enter on the command line Enter on one set access Chapter 11 Using Commands 331 command and on another if you want another user to have complete access to all of your files The first gives access to all subdirectories and all files or images off of the root directory image fs The name of the image file system to be shared This may be specified as an asterisk to allow access to all images owned by the user granting access node Specifies t
91. the home file space the home monnett file space or the home monnett project1 file space depending on which form you use Which Files are Backed Up When you request an incremental or selective backup Tivoli Storage Manager backs up a file if all of the following requirements are met e The file is not excluded from backup in your include exclude options list If you do not have an include exclude list all files will process e The selected management class contains a backup copy group See Chapter 7 on _page 91 for more information on management classes oF Se copy groups e The file meets the copy serialization requirements defined in the backup copy group If serialization is static or shared static and the file is in use during back up the backup does not occur When you perform an incremental backup of your files Tivoli Storage Manager also checks the following e Mode requirements defined in the backup copy group If the copy mode has a value of modified the file must have changed since the last backup If the copy mode has a value of absolute the file can be backed up even if it has not changed e Frequency requirements defined in the backup copy group The minimum number of days since the last backup must elapse before a file is backed up When you run an incremental or selective backup Tivoli Storage Manager also backs up all directory information that is not already backed up Directories are counted in the
92. the directory exists For example your filelist includes the entries home dir filel and home dir If the dir directory does not exist on the server the home dir directory is sent to the server a second time Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt FILEList filelistspec gt lt Parameters filelistspec Specifies the location and name of the file that contains the list of files to process with the command Note When you specify the filelist option on the command line you cannot use the subdir option Examples Command line sel filelist home avi filelist txt Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 243 Filesonly The filesonly option restricts backup and restore processing to files only You cannot restore or retrieve directories from the server when using the filesonly option with the restore or retrieve commands However directories with default attributes are created if required as placeholders for files that you restore or retrieve Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt FILESOnly gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc incremental filesonly 244 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Fromdate The fromdate option specifies
93. the location of the environment prerequisites for each supported platform m Attention For current information concerning the client environment prerequisites for all Tivoli Storage Manager supported client platforms refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media Table 3 Client Requirements Operating System Page W Bo N Go EI A E AIX Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the AIX platform Client Components e Backup archive client command line and GUI e Administrative client command line e Web backup archive client e Tivoli Storage Manager API 32 bit and 64 bit e AIX 4 3 only AFS DFS client X Open API Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 3 Hardware Requirements AIX 4 3 A RISC System 6000 or pSeries e AIX 5L A Power PC machine 64 bit CHRP compliant e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory 64 MB This includes any applications running on IBM s Scalable POWERparallel Systems 2 SP2 Software Requirements e AIX 4 3 3 e AIX 5L for POWER V5 1 32 bit and 64 bit with JFS2 file system support e AIX 4 3 3 and AFS 3 6 for Tivoli Storage Manager AIX AFS client e AIX 4 3 3 and DCE DFS 3 1 for Tivoli Storage Manager AIX DFS client Communication Methods
94. the server e If you specify quiet in your dsm opt file and you specify verbose on the command line verbose prevails e If you specify both quiet and verbose on the same command the last option encountered during options processing prevails If you specify quiet verbose verbose prevails If you specify verbose quiet quiet prevails Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt VErboseAA A __________________pa Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Options file verbose Command line verbose This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode 224 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Virtualmountpoint Authorized User The virtualmountpoint option defines a virtual mount point for a file system if you want to consider files for backup that begin with a specific directory within that file system Using the virtualmountpoint option to identify a directory within a file system provides a direct path to the files you want to back up saving processing time It is more efficient to define a virtual mount point within a file system than it is to define that file system using the domain op
95. to no The client program crosses the DFS fileset mount points in the sanjose ibm com fs u directory The client program then backs up all the mounted DFS user filesets For example enter the following line in the client system options file dfsbackupmntpnt no Attention Use this DFS setup with caution because it backs up all filesets mounted below sanjose ibm com fs u When you create AFS mount points you expose the backup operation to potential cyclic mount points If you link to the root of a foreign DFS cell you also expose the backup operation to potential mount points 338 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide You can set domain options in your client user options file to include the virtual mount point in your default client domain See the examples below For AFS domain afs sanjose ibm com u For DFS domain sanjose ibm com fs u alice domain sanjose ibm com fs u bob domain sanjose ibm com fs u charlie You can then schedule a daily incremental backup using the dsmcafs incremental or dsmcdfs incremental command through a crontab job or any other scheduling tool Setting the ACLs and Kerberos Login Ensure that the dsmcafs program has the read and list rl permissions on all directories that you must back up If you want the backup program to access the files set up the directory ACLs correctly Use the AFS administrator identity to back up
96. u tmp save fil enter include home tmp save fil The exclude command works with symbolic links to directories when you enter the backup command with the absolute path that contains the symbolic link You cannot use wildcard characters with the include fs nas and exclude fs nas options Table 10 Using Wildcard Characters with Include and Exclude Patterns Task Pattern Exclude all files during backup with an exclude bak extension of bak except those found on the include usr dev bak usr file system in the dev directory Exclude all files and directories in any tmp exclude tmp directory that might exist except for the file inc home tmp save fil Include this file ude home tmp save fil Exclude any o file in any directory on the exclude usr 1 3 0 usr1 usr2 and usr3 file systems Exclude the o files found in the root exclude usr2 0 directory in the usr2 file system only Exclude any file that resides under the tmp exclude tmp directory found in any file space Exclude the entire directory structure var spool from all processing excl ude dir var spool Exclude all file systems mounted anywhere excl in the test myfs fs01 and test myfs fs02 exc directory tree from backup processing ude ude fs test myfs fs test myfs Exclude the home mydir test1 directory and any files and subdirectories under it Exclud
97. user GUI you have to add the nodeps option of rpm to disable the check for requirements Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 5 Communication Methods To use this To connect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard with Linux AIX HP UX VM z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT Linux for zSeries or S 390 Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the Linux for zSeries or 390 Linux390 platform Client Components e Backup archive client command line e Administrative client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API e Web backup archive client Hardware Requirements e A 9672 G5 or G6 Multiprise 3000 or zSeries 900 32 bit mode e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory 64 MB Software Requirements The backup archive client requires the following software to run e Linux kernel 2 2 16 or higher e glibc 2 1 2 or higher e libstdc 2 9 0 or higher e RPM 3 0 4 or higher The Linux distributions that fulfill these requirements include SUSE 7 0 Note The Linux z series and S 390 was certified by Tivoli for this distribution Please verify for other distributions that the software requirements listed above are fulfilled Communication Methods To use this To con
98. which the client performs work The amount of data sent applies when files are batched together during backup or when receiving files from the server during a restore procedure The server administrator can limit the number of files or directories contained within a transaction group using the txngroupmax option the actual size of a transaction can be less than your limit Once this number is reached the client sends the files to the server even if the transaction byte limit is not reached Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TXNBytelimit number Parameters number Specifies the number of kilobytes the client program can buffer together in a transaction before it sends data to the server The range of values is 300 through 2097152 2 GB the default is 2048 Examples Options file txnb 2048 Command line txnb 2048 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 222 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Users Authorized User The users option authorizes specific users on your workstation to request services from a server You can use this option more than once to specify a large number of user IDs If you do not specify group names with the groups option or user IDs with the users option all users can
99. with server setting up Windows Me NT 2000 NET clients 28 communications establishing through firewall 47 compressalways option 130 compression option 131 compression processing 131 152 163 Index 371 configuring optional tasks 25 required tasks 25 copy destination attribute 101 copy frequency attribute 99 copy group name attribute 99 copy groups 97 archive 98 backup 98 copy mode attribute absolute 101 modified 101 copy serialization attribute 100 copy type attribute 99 D dateformat option 133 default management class 97 policy domain 97 default client user options file creating and modifying 26 example of 26 defaultserver option 135 delete access command 287 archived files 86 file space 83 deletefiles option 238 description option 239 detail option 99 240 DFS backup using dsmdfs command 58 specifying an include exclude file 29 using dsmcdfs command 58 DFS file backup clients 335 dfsbackupmntpnt option 136 337 dfsinclexcl option 137 directories restrictions on processing during incremental backup 56 restrictions on processing during incremental by date 57 directory management classes 138 specifying 274 dirmc option 138 dirsonly option 241 disaster recovery 82 disk recovery 82 disk space requirements AIX client 4 client 3 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or 5 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 display active
100. you want to perform an online image backup during which the volume is available to other system applications This is the 164 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide default for file systems residing on a logical volume created by the Linux Logical Volume Manager Valid for Linux86 only dynamic Replaces the dependency on the Copy Serialization value in the management class to perform an image backup without unmounting and remounting the file system read only Use this option only if the volume cannot be unmounted and re mounted read only Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the volume as is without remounting it read only The backup may be corrupted if applications write to the volume while the backup is in progress This may be corrected by running chkdsk after a restore Valid for AIX AIX5L Solaris HP UX and Linux86 only static Replaces the dependency on the Copy Serialization value in the management class Specifies that you want to perform an offline image backup during which the volume is unmounted and remounted read only This is the default for AIX AIX5L Solaris and HP UX Valid for AIX AIXSL Solaris HP UX and Linux86 only snapshotcachesize Specifies an appropriate snapshot size so that all old data blocks can be stored during an online image backup A snapshot size of 100 percent will ensure a valid snapshot See a 09 for more information Valid for Linux86 only Paramet
101. 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 9 Installing the AIX Clients Attention For current installation and configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning supported platforms and for the latest documentation refer to the product Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_megr tivolimain html The following packages are available on the installation media in the usr sys inst images directory tivoli tsm client ba aix43 32bit Installs the backup archive client files command line and GUI administrative client command line and HSM 4 3 3 only into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client image aix43 32bit Installs the image backup component into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client web aix43 32bit Installs the Web client into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client nas aix43 32bit Installs the NAS backup component into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client books Installs the PDF and HTML book files into the usr tivoli tsm client books directory tivoli tsm client ba msg lang Installs NL messages for the Backup Archive client Where lang is the language identifier for example Ja_JP for Japanese American English messages are already included in the backup archive client code The default
102. 112 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide El El Table 21 Backup and Archive Processing Options continued Option Description Page compression Specifies whether to compress files before sending them to the server Note The compression option also applies to migrated files if you install the Tivoli Storage Manager HSM client on your workstation dfsbackupmntpnt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to see a DFS mount point as a mount point or as a directory dirmc Specifies the management class to use for directories If not specified Tivoli Storage Manager uses the management class with the longest retention period domain domain image Specifies the file systems to include in your default client domain for an incremental backup Specifies the file systems you want to include in your default client domain for an image backup This option is for AIX HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only El El domain nas Specifies the volumes to include in your default La domain for nas backups This option is for AIX and Solaris clients only enablelanfree Specifies whether to enable an available had LAN Free path to a storage area network SAN attached storage device exclude These options are equivalent Use these options to La exclude backup exclude a file or group of files from backup exclude file services and space management services
103. 273 starting a session 43 bottom up processing include exclude list 34 include exclude options file 34 Bourne and Korn shell pointing to client user options file 109 Bourne and Korn shell variables setting 39 C C shell 108 cancel process command 285 cancel restore command 286 central scheduling summary of options 115 changingretries option 125 class option 237 client registering with server 28 setting password 28 client acceptor daemon use to manage scheduler 174 use to manage scheduler and Web client 174 use to manage Web client 174 client command options 274 archme 236 class 237 clusternode 126 deletefiles 238 description 239 detail 240 dfsbackupmntpnt 136 dirsonly 241 filelist 242 filesonly 244 fromdate 245 fromnode 246 fromowner 247 fromtime 248 ifnewer 249 inactive 250 incrbydate 251 incremental 252 latest 253 noprompt 257 client command options continued overriding the client options file 231 pick 259 pittime 261 preservepath 262 todate 265 totime 266 type 267 using options with commands 231 v2archive 268 volinformation 269 client commands overriding client options file 120 client components AIX client 3 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 client options 274 archsymlinkasfile 123 automount 124 changingretries 125 commmethod 127 commrestartduration 128 commrestartinterval 1
104. 29 compressalways 130 compression 131 dateformat 133 defaultserver 135 dfsbackupmntpnt 136 dirmc 138 domain 139 domain image 142 domain nas 143 editor 145 enablelanfree 146 errorlogname 150 errorlogretention 151 exclude exclude archive 30 152 exclude backup 30 152 exclude compression 30 152 exclude dir 30 152 exclude encrypt 152 exclude file 30 152 exclude file backup 30 152 exclude fs 30 152 exclude fs nas 152 exclude image 30 152 followsymbolic 156 groups 157 guitreeviewafterbackup 158 httpport 159 httpsport 160 imagetype 161 inclexcl 162 include 163 include archive 163 include backup 163 include compression 163 include encrypt 163 include file 163 include fsnas 163 client options continued include image 163 lanfreecommmethod 167 lanfreeshmport 169 lanfreetcpport 170 largecommbuffers 171 localbackupset 172 location 254 mailprog 173 managedservices 174 maxcmdretries 176 memoryefficientbackup 177 mode 255 monitor 256 nfstimeout 179 nodename 180 numberformat 182 optfile 258 overriding using command line 120 password 184 passwordaccess 185 passworddir 187 pitdate 260 postnschedulecmd 188 postschedulecmd 188 prenschedulecmd 190 preschedulecmd 190 queryschedperiod 192 quiet 193 replace 194 resourceutilization 195 retryperiod 197 revokeremoteaccess 198 schedcmddisabled 199 schedlogname 200 schedlogretention 201 schedmode 202 scrolllines 204 scrollprompt 205 servername 206 setting ina file 11
105. 67 lanfreeshmport option 169 lanfreetcpport option 170 LANG environment variable setting language locale 36 language locales supported 36 largecommbuffers option 171 latest option 253 restore latest backup version 81 linux for zSeries or 5 390 client client components 6 communication methods 6 hardware requirements 6 operating system requirements 6 linux390 client installing 18 linux86 client client components 5 communication methods 6 hardware requirements 5 installing 16 operating system requirements 5 local backup set enabling GUI for local restore 79 localbackupset option 172 location option 254 log pruning error 151 logical volume image backup of 62 restoring 78 Logical Volume Snapshot Agent installing and configuring 62 loop command 298 LVSA installing and configuring 62 macro command 299 mailprog option 173 managedservices option 174 management class assigning 68 management classes assigning to directories 103 138 assigning to files 102 binding to files 104 default 97 displaying 99 displaying information about 309 overriding during archive processing 103 overriding the default 102 processing 102 questions to consider 102 selecting for files 102 specifying with include option 102 using management class example 102 maxcmdretries option 176 memory required for client processing UNIX restrictions 58 memory requirements AIX client 4 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 3
106. 9 shmport 208 snapshotcachesize 209 subdir 210 tapeprompt 212 tcpbuffsize 213 tcpclientaddress 214 tcepclientport 215 tcpnodelay 216 tcpport 217 tcpserveraddress 218 tcpwindowsize 219 timeformat 220 txnbytelimit 222 users 223 using with commands 120 verbose 224 virtualmountpoint 225 virtualnodename 227 webports 229 client options file creating and modifying 25 required options for 25 client scheduler connecting to server schedule 93 displaying completed work 95 displaying scheduled work 94 370 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide client scheduler continued scheduled command 93 starting 93 327 starting automatically 48 client system options automount 124 changingretries 125 commmethod 127 commrestartduration 128 commrestartinterval 129 compression 131 defaultserver 135 dirmc 138 editor 145 enablelanfree 146 errorlogretention 151 exclude exclude archive 30 152 exclude backup 30 152 exclude compression 30 152 exclude dir 30 152 exclude file 30 152 exclude file backup 30 152 exclude fs 30 152 exclude fs nas 152 groups 157 httpport 159 httpsport 160 imagetype 161 inclexcl 162 include 163 include archive 163 include backup 163 include compression 163 include file 163 include fs nas 163 include image 163 lanfreecommmethod 167 lanfreeshmport 169 lanfreetcpport 170 largecommbuffers 171 localbackupset 172 mailprog 173 managedservices 174 maxcmdretrie
107. 90 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 memoryefficientbackup option 177 messages displaying on screen 224 stop displaying 193 migrated files restoring 73 migrating from earlier versions of the product 1 mode option 255 performing an image backup 281 mode parameter 99 modes batch 273 interactive loop 273 modified mode 99 101 monitor option 256 monitor process command 300 mount points afs 336 dfs 336 potential problems 336 multiple sessions backup objects using 61 N naming a server 206 NAS backing up file systems 66 347 backup file systems 283 backup NAS command 283 374 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide NAS continued cancel process command 285 class option 237 deleting file spaces 83 289 domain nas option 143 exclude fs nas option 152 include volumes in an image backup 143 include fs nas option 163 monitor process command 300 monitoring backup or restore operations 256 nasnodename option 178 query node command 310 restore file systems 323 restore NAS command 323 restoring file systems 350 type option 267 nasnodename option 178 Network Attached Storage NAS file server backup file systems 66 283 347 deleting file spaces 83 289 display backup and restore processes to cancel 285 display backup and restore processes to monitor 300 display file spaces on server 306 display nodes for which admin ID has autho
108. Add file systems to the default domain with the domain option For example if your default domain contains file systems home and usr back up those file systems plus the mfg file system using dsmc incremental domain mfg You can also perform an incremental backup on selected parts of any file system For example to do an incremental backup on your home directory and all its subdirectories and files enter this command dsmc incremental HOME subdir yes To start an incremental by date add the incrbydate option dsmc incremental incrbydate 60 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Displaying Backup Processing Status During a backup by default Tivoli Storage Manager displays the status of each file it attempts to back up Tivoli Storage Manager reports the file s size path file name total number of bytes transferred and whether the backup attempt was successful Similar statistics are produced by the selective and archive commands These also display in the dsmsched 1og file for scheduled commands If you have set the resourceutilization option Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to improve performance and load balancing by using multiple sessions when it backs up a file space or other set of files The Web client and backup archive client GUI provide a Task List window that displays information about files during processing When a task completes a Backup Report window displa
109. Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Quiet The quiet option limits the number of messages that display on your screen during processing For example when you run the incremental selective or archive commands information may appear about each file that is backed up Use the quiet option if you do not want to display this information When you use the quiet option error and processing information appears on your screen and messages are written to log files If you do not specify quiet the default option verbose is used Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define the quiet option and override the client setting Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt QUIET gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Options file quiet Command line quiet This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 193 Replace The replace option specifies what you want the system to do when it restores files that already exist on your workstation This option applies to the restore retrieve and restore backupset commands only Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid fo
110. C name e UNIX Logical space that contains a group of files backed up or archived from the same file system or part of a file system defined with the virtualmountpoint option in the client system options file frequency A copy group attribute that specifies the minimum interval in days between incremental backups fuzzy backup A backup version of a file that might not accurately reflect what is currently in the file because the file was backed up at the same time as it was being modified fuzzy copy An archive copy of a file that might not accurately reflect what is currently in the file because Tivoli Storage Manager archived the file while the file was being modified G generate password Processing that stores a new password in an encrypted password file when the old password expires Automatic generation of a password prevents password prompting Password generation can be set in the options file passwordaccess option See options file gigabyte GB 1 One billion 10 bytes 2 When referring to memory capacity 1 073 741 824 in decimal notation GPFS node set A set of AIX SP nodes that can mount a defined group of GPFS file systems graphical user interface GUI A graphical user interface offers pictoral rather than text based access to a computer A graphical user interface includes e A combination of graphics and icons e Use of a mouse or pointing device e Menu bars dropdown lists and overlapping windows
111. Clients Installation and User s Guide client polling A client and server communication technique where the client node queries the server for scheduled work client server A communications network architecture in which one or more programs clients request computing or data services from another program the server client system options file An editable file that contains communication authorization central scheduling backup archive and space management options A root user on your workstation sets the options in a client system options file The file name is dsm sys located in your Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory client user options file A user editable file containing options that identify the Tivoli Storage Manager server to contact specify backup archive restore retrieve and space management options and set date time and number formats The file name is dsm opt located in your Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory closed registration A registration process in which a Tivoli Storage Manager administrator must register workstations as client nodes with the server Contrast with open registration command line interface A type of user interface where commands are specified on the command line Contrast with graphical user interface communication method The method by which a client and server exchange information For Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive clients the method can be TCP IP See Tra
112. Command Line enter quit when working in interactive mode To end a Web client session open a different URL or close the browser Online Forum To participate in online user discussions of Tivoli Storage Manager you can subscribe to an Internet Listserv forum This is not officially supported by Tivoli Storage Manager but support people do participate in the discussions along with other users You can subscribe by sending a note to Listserv vm marist edu that contains subscribe adsm 1 yourfirstname yourlastname Posts can then be sent to adsm l1 vm marist edu Other Sources of Online Help An anonymous FTP server is available where you can find PTF maintenance and other Tivoli Storage Manager related materials Four other anonymous servers are unofficially maintained by non IBM volunteers These servers are ftp software ibm com storage primary IBM ftp rz uni karlsruhe de mirror Germany ftp wu wien ac at mirror Austria ftp cac psu edu mirror Pennsylvania sunsite unc edu pub packages mirror North Carolina If you have the required username and password you can get maintenance information from the Tivoli Storage Manager support page at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html Contacting Customer Support For support for this or any Tivoli product you can contact Tivoli Customer Support in one of the following ways e Visit the Tivoli Storage Manager technical support Web si
113. Contrast with command line interface See windowed interface GUI Graphical user interface H hierarchical storage management client A program that runs on a workstation or file server to provide space management services The hierarchical storage management client automatically migrates eligible files to Tivoli Storage Manager storage to maintain specific levels of free space on local file systems Automatic recalls are made for migrated files when they are accessed Users are also permitted to migrate and recall specific files HSM Hierarchical Storage Management 362 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide image A full file system or raw logical volume backup as a single object inactive version A copy of a backup file in Tivoli Storage Manager storage that either is not the most recent version or the corresponding original file was deleted from the client file system Inactive backup versions are eligible for expiration according to the management class assigned to the file include exclude file A file containing statements to determine the files to back up and the associated management classes to use for backup or archive See include exclude list include exclude list A list of include and exclude options that include or exclude selected files for backup An exclude option identifies files that should not be backed up An include option identifies files that are exempt from the exc
114. Creating a key pair e Requesting a certificate e Receiving the certificate into the key ring Creating a Key Pair To create a public private key pair request a certificate receive it into the key ring file and 1 Enter mkkfe to start the utility 2 Enter n to create a new key ring file The key ring file is used to store one or more key pairs and certificates 3 Name the file certkey kyr The Web client will not recognize any other name Requesting a Certificate To request a certificate 1 Select w from the main menu to work with certificates Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 353 5 6 Select c to create a new certificate Enter apollo at the password prompt This is the password for the key ring file The Web client does not recognize any other password After the password is entered twice a prompt asks if the password will expire answer no Press s to create a PEM certificate A request for certificate information displays Press m to modify the request for certificate information You can enter the information requested in each field or leave the field blank by pressing Enter Note e When prompted for the key entry name type TSM Web Client e The second entry is for the key size The recommended key size is 512 e When prompted for the server s fully qualified TCP IP domain name be sure to enter the TCP IP domain name where the client is installed Press r to create the certificate request When prompted
115. Defining the Client as an HACMP Application 343 Creating an HACMP Resource Group to Add a Client 344 Adding the Client to an HACMP Resource Group 345 Appendix C Backing Up NAS File Systems Using NDMP 347 Backing up NAS File Systems using the Web Client GUI oe ee B48 Performing a Command Line Backup ete c a BAD Restoring NAS File Systems 350 Appendix D Web Client Secure Socket Layer 353 Configuring SSL Communications 353 Creating a Key Pair 353 Requesting a Certificate p 353 Receiving the Certificate into the Key Ring 354 Configuring Web Client for SSL 354 Notices 357 Glossary a 2 ss amp 359 Index 1 ww ew ee ee ee we 369 Vi Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tables Clie hor 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Typographical Conventions Tivoli Storage Manager Client Publications Client Requirements UNIX Client Installation Ref rerce Tivoli Storage Manager Server Quick Start Publications Options for Excluding File Spaces anid Directories j Options for Controlling Backup Archiv and Image Processing z Options for Controlling Compression and Encryption Processing Wildcard and Other Special Characters Using Wildcard Characters with Include and Exclude Patterns J 4 Preliminar
116. FIG For the C shell add the DSM_CONFIG variable to cshrc in your HOME directory For example we recommend that you use full path names instead of relative path names when you set environment variables setenv DSM_CONFIG home monnett dsm opt 108 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide 3 From the Tivoli Storage Manager GUI click Edit and_then click Preferences and enter any options that you want to change See for options supported on your platform and detailed information about each option The preferences editor updates the client configuration files dsm opt and dsm sys if any options have changed The preferences editor uses the environment variables DSM_DIR to locate the client system options file dsm sys and DSM_CONFIG to locate the client user options file default name dsm opt The preferences editor queries the server for options on the server but only updates the client options file The preferences editor groups the options into the following categories e General e Backup e Restore e Include Exclude e Scheduler e Regional Settings e Authorization e Web client e Command line e Diagnostics e Communication You may use some options only with commands For more information about these options see Communication Options You use communication options to specify how your client node communicates with a Tivoli Storage Manager server For UNIX u
117. FS support perform the following steps 1 Delete or rename dsm and dsmc 2 Rename dsmafs or dsmdfs and dsmcafs or dsmcdfs to dsm and dsmc Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 335 Then you can enter dsm to start a GUI session or dsmc to start a command line session with the current AFS or DFS support Set the Exclude fs Option You may specify that you do not want to back up an entire AFS or DFS directory tree that begins with afs or dfs For AFS enter exclude fs afs in a file specified by the inclexcl option For DFS enter exclude fs dfs in a file specified by the dfsinclexcl option This prevents the directory from appearing in the backup archive list and from being included in incremental backups Understanding Potential Backup Problems Caused by Mount Points Mount points are UNIX symbolic links with special syntax They can cause problems for a backup program that crosses the tree formed with these mount points For example user foo creates an AFS mount point for the user foo volume in his home directory User foo also forms a cycle in the directory tree The backup program enters an infinite loop that looks like this afs xyz cell u foo afs xyz cell u foo foo afs xyz cel 1 u foo foo foo User foo can also create a mount point for a root volume of a foreign cell This expands the subdirectory of user foo to include a tree that would be unimportant to back up With DFS you can create loops by adding DFS fileset
118. Guide GC32 0727 LAN Free Options After installing and configuring the Tivoli Storage Manager Managed System for SAN feature on the client workstation you can use the following options to enable LAN Free data movement enablelanfree Specifies whether to enable an available LAN free path to SAN attached storage device See ablela a lanfreecommmethod Specifies a communication protocol between the client and the Storage Agent See La age 167 for more information lanfreetcpport eee the TCP IP port number where the ee Agent is listening See lanfreeshmport Specifies the Shared Memory port number where the Storage Agent is listening See Backing Up NAS File Systems Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup and restore of network attached storage NAS file system images to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to NAS file servers Tivoli Data Protection for NDMP enables backup and restore support on the Tivoli Storage Manager Windows NT 2000 XP and Windows NET AIX and Solaris servers for NAS file servers from Network Appliance Tivoli Data Protection for NDMP is a separately priced and licensed product See 47 for more information Backup Additional Considerations This section includes topics related to incremental and selective backups You do not need to understand this information to use Tivoli Storage Manager for basic work 66 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installat
119. HACMP Resource Group The Tivoli Storage Manager client must be defined to a cluster resource group See HACMP for AIX 4 4 1 Installation Guide SC23 4278 for detailed instructions on how to perform this procedure Following is a summary of how to define resources as part of a resource group 1 Start HACMP for AIX system management with the following command smit hacmp 2 Select Cluster Configuration Cluster Resources and Change Show Resources Attributes for a Resource Group Press Enter 3 Select the desired resource group 4 Press Enter The Configure a Resource Group screen appears 5 Enter values that define all the resources you want to add to this resource group 6 Synchronize cluster resources after entering field values in Step 5 Do this by selecting Cluster Configuration Cluster Resources and Synchronize Cluster Resources 7 Press F10 to exit smit and return to the command line Press F3 to perform other configuration tasks The Tivoli Storage Manager client must be added to the resource group that contains the file systems to be backed up These file systems must also be the same file systems specified by the domain option in the dsm opt file defined for this client instance Both JFS and NFS file systems can be defined as cluster resources NFS supports only 2 node clusters in a cascading takeover relationship Appendix B TSM in an HACMP Takeover Environment 345 346 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Arc
120. I Restore Backupset 318 Restore Image e e 321 Restore NAS 0 0420 323 Retrieve 2 ee ee BD Schedule 2 ee 8327 Selective 2 e a aA 8329 Set Access eee eee BBA Set Password 333 Appendix A The AFS and DFS File Backup Clients ioe w a 339 Contrasting AIX File Backup Clients oa 2 335 Select Backup Functions 335 Set the Exclude fs Option 336 Understanding Potential Backup Problems Caused by Mount Points 2o a amp amp ara D90 The Afsbackupmntpnt Option poa th 2 2336 The Dfsbackupmntpnt Option 337 Set the Virtualmountpoint and Domain Options 337 Use Another Method to Set These Options 338 Setting the ACLs and Kerberos Login 339 Setting the ACLs and DCE Login 339 Restoring AFS or DFS Files 339 Setting Processing Options 339 Appendix B Configuring the Backup Archive Client in an HACMP Takeover Environment 341 Installing the Backup Archive Client 341 Configuring the Backup Archive Client To Process Local Nodes So we a2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager Backup Archive Client To Process Cluster Disk Resources 342 Step 1 Register the Client to a Server 342 Step 2 Configure the Client System Options File 342 Step 3 Configure the Client User Options File 343
121. Irsonly gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc query backup dirsonly Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 241 Filelist Use the filelist option to process a list of files The Tivoli Storage Manager client opens the file you specify with this option and processes the list of files within according to the specific command With the exception of the restore and retrieve commands when you use the filelist option Tivoli Storage Manager ignores all other file specifications on the command line Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option The files entries listed in the filelist must adhere to the following rules e Each entry must be a fully or partially qualified path to a file or directory or a relative path e Each entry must be on a new line e Do not use wildcard characters e Each entry results in the processing of only one object file or directory e If the file name contains any spaces enclose the file name with quotes e Tivoli Storage Manager ignores any entry that is not valid The following is an example of a list of files within a filelist home dir filel usr tivoli file2 usr avi dirl fs1 dir2 file3 fs2 Ha Ha Ha file txt s3 file txt If an entry in the filelist indicates a directory only that directory will process and not the files within the directory If the file name the filelistspec you spe
122. MAGES type snapshot snapshotcachesize 40 Command line Does not apply 166 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Lanfreecommmethod Authorized User The lanfreecommmethod option specifies the communications protocol between the Tivoli Storage Manager client and Storage Agent This enables processing between the client and the SAN attached storage device Use the lanfreeshmport to specify the Shared Memory port number where the Storage Agent is listening See 9 for more information Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients only Attention The lanfreecommmethod option is not valid if HSM is installed See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients GC32 0794 for more information Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax gt gt LANFREECommmethod commmethod gt lt Parameters commmethod Specifies the supported protocol for your Tivoli Storage Manager client TCPip The Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP communication method Use the lanfreetcpport to specify the TCP IP port t number where the Storage Agent is listening See LLa a Q for more information For AIX AIX 5L and HP UX root users the Shared Memory communication method is the default and TCP IP is optional AIX AIX 5L and HP UX non ro
123. MP Resource Group to Add a Client You must first create an HACMP resource group so you can add the client to it The following is a summary of this procedure 1 Start HACMP for AIX system management with the following command smit hacmp 2 Select Cluster Configuration Cluster Resources Define Resource Groups and Add a Resource Group The Add a Resource Group window is displayed 3 On the Add a Resource Group window enter the following field values Resource Group Name Enter an ASCII text string that identifies the resource group The resource group name can include alphabetic and numeric characters and underscores Use no more than 31 characters 344 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Node Relationship Select Cascading Participating Node Names Default Node Priority Select the node names that are participating in the resource group Add the nodes in order of priority The node owner of the resource group should be the first node listed 4 Click OK 5 Press F10 to exit smit and return to the command line Press F3 to perform other configuration tasks The Tivoli Storage Manager client must be in a resource group with a cascading or rotating takeover relationship The client does not support a concurrent access resource group See HACMP for AIX 4 4 1 Planning Guide SC23 4277 for additional information regarding HACMP topology and strategy Adding the Client to an
124. Manager using the dsm command Tivoli Storage Manager can run as either a foreground or background process To run in the foreground enter dsm To run in the background enter dsm amp Tivoli Storage Manager locates the client user options file dsm opt and starts with Password and User ID Your administrator can require you to use a password to connect to the server Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for the password if one is required Contact your administrator if you do not know your password For information about changing your password see Attention If you are working on an AIX workstation and you want to back up or archive AFS or DFS files ask the root user responsible for setting up Tivoli Storage Manager on your workstation if you can use the AFS or DFS version of Tivoli Storage Manager See k for more information Configuration Wizard When the GUI client starts initially and does not find an options file the setup wizard guides you through the configuration process You can launch the setup wizard to modify your setup files at any time by opening the Utilities menu and selecting Setup Wizard from the client GUI s main window Note The Setup Wizard is not available through the Web client Starting a Command Line Session An alternate way to start the client is from the command line Start a command line session using one of the following methods 42 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archiv
125. Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt SCROLLLines number gt lt Parameters number Specifies the number of lines of information that display on your screen at one time The range of values is 1 through 80 the default is 20 Examples Options file scrolllines 25 Command line scrol11 25 This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode 204 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Scrollprompt The scrollprompt option specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to stop and wait after displaying the number of lines of information you specified with the scrolllines option or scroll through and stop at the end of the information list Use the scrollprompt option with all query commands except the following e query mgmtclass e query schedule e query session e query inclexcl Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt SCROLLPrompt _ gt lt ves Parameters No Scrolls to the end of the list and stops This is the default Yes Stops and waits after displaying the number of lines you specified with the scrolllines option The following prompt displays at the
126. Setting Font Defaults Running the backup archive GUI outside the CDE desktop could result in errors due to unresolved fonts Ensure that all required fonts are available for your language environment when running the backup archive GUI outside the CDE desktop Note The command xrdb m Xdefaults must be issued to update the X System on demand When running the backup archive GUI under Motif and outside the CDE desktop add the following entry to the Xdefaults file in your home directory dsm fontList dt interface system medium r normal xs For Linux X86 add the following entries to the Xdefaults file in your home directory Remove the exclamation point in front of the dsm fontList entry to activate the appropriate locale ja_JP locale dsm fontList adobe helvetica medium r 14 misc medium r 14 zh_CN locale dsm fontList helvetica medium r normal 120 7508859 isas fangsong ti medium r normal 16 160 72 72 c 160 gb2312 1980 0 zh_TW locale Idsm fontList helvetica medium r normal 140 is08859 defaul t ming medium r normal 16 c 160 big5 0 1 ko_KR dsm fontList helvetica medium r 120 7508859 daewoo mincho medium r normal 16 120 100 100 c 160 ksc5601 1987 r ru_RU dsm fontList sony_windows_1251 fixed medium r normal 16 120 100 100
127. The fully qualified path and file name where you want to store error log information Ensure that all directories and subdirectories in the path exist and are accessible by client processing Tivoli Storage Manager will not create directories for you The default is the path indicated by the DSM_LOG or DSM_DIR environment variable If DSM_LOG or DSM_DIR are not specified the dsmerror 1og file will reside in the current working directory The dsmerror 1og file cannot be a symbolic link Examples Options file errorlogname tmp tsmerror 1log Command line errorlog home temp dsmerror 1log This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 150 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Errorlogretention Authorized User The errorlogretention option specifies how many days to maintain error log entries before pruning and whether to save the pruned entries The error log is pruned when the first error is written to the log after a Tivoli Storage Manager session is started If the only session you run is the client scheduler and you run it twenty four hours a day the error log might not be pruned according to your expectations Stop the session and start it again to prune the error log when the next error is written Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file
128. X 5L only Examples Options file largecommbuffers yes Command line largecommbuf fers yes This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 171 Localbackupset The localbackupset option specifies whether the Tivoli Storage Manager GUI bypasses initial logon with the Tivoli Storage Manager server to restore a local backup set on a standalone workstation You can use this option on the command line or place it your client options file dsm opt If you set the localbackupset option to yes the GUI does not attempt initial logon with the server In this case the GUI only enables the restore functionality If you set the localbackupset option to no the default the GUI attempts initial logon with the server and enables all GUI functions To start the GUI and bypass the initial logon with the server to restore a local backup set on a standalone workstation enter dsm localbackupset yes Note The restore backupset command supports restore of local backup sets on a standalone workstation without using the localbackupset option See 81 for more information Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt or the client system options file dsm sys Syntax No gt gt LOCALbackupset gt lt L_Yes Parameters No Specifies that th
129. XFS file systems on the SGI client Files with an ACL set backed up with a Version 3 7 1 or lower client must be backed up again even if the files have not changed This updates the ACL data on the server Notes 1 The standalone package LSCqfs 3 5 0 is the only supported version of QPS In addition the following restrictions also apply to the QFS file system e Image Backup is not supported on QFS file systems e The Solaris backup archive client does not support the combination of QFS and SAM needed to archive files onto tertiary background storage such as tapes Instead it recalls files from tape to disk automatically if it finds migrated files during a backup e A OFS file system contains two hidden system files and a system directory that cannot be backed up This is acceptable because a backup of these files is not needed They contain internal data to manage the file system This data will be automatically excluded from a backup and recreated automatically by the file system itself if a restore of files in that file system is invoked Chapter 11 Using Commands 295 Attention If you are running GPFS for AIX in a multi node cluster and all nodes share a mounted GPFS file system Tivoli Storage Manager processes this file system as a local file system Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the file system on each node during an incremental backup To avoid this you can do one of the following e Explicitly configure the
130. a The file owner is different The file permissions are different e Absolute The file is considered for incremental backup regardless of whether it changed since the last backup For archive copy groups the mode is always absolute indicating that a file is archived regardless of whether it changed since the last archive request Copy Destination Names the destination where backups or archives are stored The destination can be either a storage pool of disk devices or a storage pool of devices that support removable media such as tape Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 101 Retain Versions Specifies the number of days an archived file remains in storage When the specified number of days elapse for an archived copy of a file it is deleted from server storage Selecting a Management Class for Files If the default management class meets the backup and archive requirements for all the files on your workstation it is not necessary to take any action to associate your files with that management class This is done automatically when you back up or archive your files When selecting a different management class for your files consider these questions e Does the management class contain a backup copy group If you attempt to back up a file associated with a management class that does not contain a backup copy group the file is not backed up e Does the management class contain an archive copy group
131. a date from which you want to search for backed up or archived files Files that were backed up or archived before this date are not included although older directories might be included if necessary to restore or retrieve the files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt FROMDate date gt lt Parameters date Specifies the date from which you want to search for backup copies or archived files Enter the date in the format you selected with the dateformat option When you include dateformat with a command it must precede the fromdate pitdate and todate options Examples Command line dsmc query backup fromdate 12 11 2002 home dilbert Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 245 Fromnode The fromnode option permits one node to perform commands for another node A user on another node must use the set access command to permit you to query list restore or retrieve files or images for that other node Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt FROMNode node se Parameters node Specifies the node name on a workstation or a file server whose backup copies or archived files you want to access Examples Command line dsmc query archive fromnode bob subdir yes home jones 246 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installat
132. a logical volume created by the Linux Logical Volume Manager during which the volume is available to other system applications Note You can use the imagetype option with the backup image command or the include image_option to specify whether to perform an offline or online image backup See for more information Before You Perform an Image Backup Before you perform an image backup please consider the following e For offline image backups only Ensure that no other application is using the volume when you run an offline image backup The client will lock the volume so no other applications can use it to ensure a consistent image The volume remains mounted but unavailable If the volume is in use when the client attempts to lock the volume the backup will fail If the client cannot lock a volume because it is in use and online image backup is not available you can use an include image statement to force the client to continue the image backup without unmounting and remounting the volume in read only mode Set the imagetype option to dynamic in the include image statement The backup may be corrupted if applications write to the volume while the backup is in progress This may be corrected by running chkdsk after a restore to fix any corrupted blocks See more information Important If a mounted file system has nested mount points unmount them before attempting a backup Otherwise Tivoli Storage Manager will be unable to un
133. ab rs abrs abtrs abrsrs ars aabrs abrss ab ef rs abefrs abefghrs abefr abers abcd abcd c abcd txt abcd abcde abcdtxt Question Mark ab abc ab abab abzzz ab rs abfrs abrs abllrs ab ef rs abdefjrs abefrs abdefrs abefjrs ab rs abcdrs abzzrs abrs abjrs abkkkrs Note In batch mode you must enclose values containing wildcards in double quotes For example dsmc selective home me c Entering Commands Follow the general rules below when you enter commands e Enter a maximum of 256 characters on the command line Enter the characters in a continuous string If you press the return key the command will process e When you enter options with a command always precede the option with a dash e Enter more than one option in any order in a command before or after the file specification Separate multiple options with a blank space Client Commands Reference The following sections contain detailed information about each of the Tivoli Storage Manager commands These commands are arranged in alphabetical order Information for each command includes e A description of the command e A syntax diagram of the command The command name is shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase characters The uppercase characters Chapter 11 Using Commands 277 indicate the minimum abbreviation you can use for the command name See for an explanation of these diagrams e Detailed descriptions of the comma
134. access to all backups and archives that originated from the specified node When connecting to a server the client must identity itself to the server This login identification is determined in the following ways e If the nodename and virtualnodename options are not specified or a virtual node name is not specified on the command line the default login ID is the name returned by the hostname command e If the nodename option is specified the name specified with the nodename option overrides the name returned by the hostname command e If the virtualnodename option is specified or a virtual node name is specified on a command line it cannot be the same name as the name returned by the hostname command When the virtual node name is accepted by the server a password is required assuming authentication is on even if the passwordaccess option is generate Once a connection to the server is established then access is permitted to any file backed up using this login ID Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt VIRTUALNodename nodename gt lt Parameters nodename Specifies a 1 to 64 character name that identifies the node for which you want to request Tivoli Storage Manager services There is no default Examples Options file virtualnodename cougar Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 227 Command
135. ack up one or more volumes or raw logical volumes as a single object image backup on your system An image backup provides the following benefits Improves the speed with which Tivoli Storage Manager restores file systems containing many small files Conserves resources on the server during backups since only one entry is required for the image Provides a point in time picture of your logical volume which may be useful if your enterprise needs to recall that information For special cone rane regarding point in time restores see Restores a corrupt file system or raw logical volume Data is restored to the same state it was when the last logical volume backup was performed The traditional offline image backup prevents access to the volume by other system applications during the operation Use the imagetype dynamic option to back up the volume as is without remounting it read only Corruption of the backup may occur if applications write to the volume while the backup is in progress In this case run chdsk after a restore This option replaces the dependency on the Copy 62 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Serialization value in the management class to perform an image backup without unmounting and remounting the file system read only See for more information For Linux86 only By default Tivoli Storage Manager performs an online image backup of file systems residing on
136. acked up or archived See serialization Contrast with dynamic shared dynamic and static share point A drive or directory on Windows NT 2000 Me XP or Windows Net whose files are available for shared access across a network The share point name is part of a UNC name See Universal Naming Convention UNC name shift click Click on an item while pressing the Shift key space management The process of keeping sufficient free storage space available on a local file system for new data and making the most efficient and economical use of distributed storage resources special files Special files define devices for the system or temporary files created by processes There are three basic types of special files FIFO first in first out block and character FIFO files are also called pipes Pipes are created by one process to temporarily allow communication with another process These files cease to exist when the first process finishes Block and character files define devices Tivoli Storage Manager processes only device and named pipe special files Socket special files are not processed snapshot An image backup type A snapshot is a point in time view of a volume When you perform an online image backup the Logical Volume Snapshot Agent LVSA takes a snapshot of the volume Any changes that occur to the volume after the snapshot begins are not included in the backup stabilized file space A file space that exists on the server but n
137. ackup archive client the security token is passed to the Web client and is used to authenticate the user ID Since this token permits the user access to the client the Web client provides the user the option to securely pass this information from the administrative Web interface to the Web client using the HTTPS protocol HTTPS is simply the HTTP protocol transmitted over a secure socket layer If your administrators are hyperlinking to client machines to use the Web client and you need to protect the security token when it is transmitted over the network then you should configure the Web client for SSL so that the HTTPS protocol can be used The following sections contain information that will help you manage SSL communications e Configuring SSL Communications e Configuring Web Client for SSL To support SSL the product install package includes utilities to create and maintain certificates SSL communication is supported on the AIX and AIX 5L clients only You can use the Make Key File utility MKKFE to create public private key pairs and certificate requests receive certificate requests into a key ring and manage keys in a key ring MKKFE prompts you for the necessary information Optionally after you have created a certificate request you can send it to a Certificate Authority CA to have it signed Configuring SSL Communications This section describes the following tasks for setting up SSL communications for your backups e
138. ager clients work in conjunction with the Tivoli Storage Manager server Contact your administrator to obtain backup or archive access to the server or refer to the following publications to install and configure a Tivoli Storage Manager server Table 5 Tivoli Storage Manager Server Quick Start Publications Publication Title Order Number Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Quick Start GC32 0770 Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Quick Start GC32 0774 Tivoli Storage Manager for OS 390 and z OS Quick Start GC32 0777 Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Quick Start GC32 0780 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Quick Start GC32 0784 Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 23 24 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager Attention For current configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media After installation required configuration tasks include the following Task Page bal D3 Task Page bol Bd bd bd Creating and Modifying the Client Options File Required Root User or Authorized User Task During the installation the sample client system options file dsm sys smp is placed in the default installation directory Refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media
139. ager server Table 26 Authorization Options Option encryptkey Description Specifies whether to save the encryption key locally or whether to prompt the user for the encryption key Reference kaal groups Specifies the groups on your workstation that you want to authorize to request services from the server mailprog Specifies the program and user ID where you want to send a newly generated password when the old one expires password Specifies a Tivoli Storage Manager password passwordaccess Specifies how Tivoli Storage Manager handles a password if one is required for your workstation passworddir Specifies the directory in which you want to store the automatically generated password for your client node The encryption key and password are encrypted and stored in the TSM PWD file El B El OB Sod revokeremoteaccess Restricts an administrator with client access privileges from accessing your workstation through the Web client El users Specifies users on your workstation who can request services from a server El Error Processing Options These options specify the name of the error log file and how Tivoli Storage Manager treats the entries in the log file Table 27 Error Processing Options Option Description Page errorlogname Specifies the path and name of the error log Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 117 Table 27 Error Proc
140. ailure or session loss the transfer statistics will display the number of bytes Tivoli Storage Manager attempted to transfer during all command attempts Therefore the statistics for bytes transferred may not match the file statistics such as those for file size Supported File Systems and ACL Support Special file systems contain dynamic information generated by the operating system they contain no data or files The UNIX client ignores special file systems and their contents Special file systems include the following e the proc file system on most of the UNIX platforms e the dev fd file system on Solaris and SGI e the dev pts on Linux Tivoli Storage Manager provides ACL support for the client file systems in Table 37 Supported File Systems and ACL Support Platform File System ACL Support AIx jfs yes gpfs yes afs dfs yes JFS2 yes 294 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Table 37 Supported File Systems and ACL Support continued Platform File System ACL Support AIX 5L jfs yes gpfs yes afs dfs yes JFS2 yes HP UX hfs yes VxFS JFS Veritas yes V3 3 Layout 4 Linux86 ext2 no ext3 no jfs no reiserfs no Linux 390 ext2 yes ext3 no jfs no OS 390 UNIX hfs no zfs yes SGI efs no xfs yes Solaris ufs yes VxFS yes QFS no Beginning with Version 3 7 2 Tivoli Storage Manager provides full ACL support for GPFS file systems on the AIX client and
141. ain Defines the file systems or raw logical volumes to include in your default client image domain Examples Options file domain image fs1 fs2 Command line Does not apply 142 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Domain nas The domain nas option specifies the volumes to include in your NAS image backups You can specify all nas to include all the mounted file systems on the NAS file server except those you exclude with the exclude fs nas option When you use this option in your client system options file dsm sys the domain nas option defines your default domain for NAS image backups Tivoli Storage Manager uses your domain for NAS image backups when you run a backup nas command and you do not specify which volumes to process When you perform a NAS file system image backup using the backup nas command Tivoli Storage Manager adds volumes that you specify on the command line to the volumes defined in your dsm sys file For example if you enter the following in your dsm sys file domain nas nasl vol vol0 nas1 vol voll and you enter the following on the command line dsmc backup nas nasnodename nasl vol vol2 Tivoli Storage Manager performs a backup for the following volumes on node nasl vol vol0 vol vol1 and vol vol2 When performing a backup if you use a file specification and set the domain nas option to all nas in the dsm sys file all nas takes precedence Tiv
142. ains blanks enclose the command string in double quotes If you placed double quotes within the command string then enclose the entire command string in single quotes 188 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file postschedulecmd restart database The command string is a valid command for restarting your database Command line Initial command line only postschedulecmd restart database Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 189 Preschedulecmd Prenschedulecmd Authorized User The preschedulecmd option specifies a command that the client program processes before it runs a schedule The client program waits for the command to complete before it starts the schedule If you do not want it to wait specify prenschedulecmd Notes 1 Successful completion of the preschedulecmd command is considered to be a prerequisite to running the scheduled operation If the preschedulecmd command does not complete with return code 0 the scheduled operation and any postschedulecmd and postnschedulecmd commands will not run The client will report that the scheduled event failed and the return code will be 12 If you do not want the preschedulecmd command to be governed by this rule you can create a script or batch file that invokes the command and exits with return code 0 Then configure preschedulecmd to invoke the script or batch file The return code for the preschedu
143. anager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage GC32 0794 Management Clients Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Managed System for SAN Storage GC32 0771 Agent User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Managed System for SAN GC32 0781 Storage Agent User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Managed System for SAN Storage GC32 0727 Agent User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager Using the Application Programming Interface GC32 0793 Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Administrator s Guide GC32 0768 Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Administrator s Guide GC32 0778 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Administrator s Guide GC32 0782 Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Quick Start GC32 0770 Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Quick Start GC32 0774 Tivoli Storage Manager for OS 390 and z OS Quick Start GC32 0777 Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Quick Start GC32 0780 Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Quick Start GC32 0784 The Tivoli Storage Manager publications are available on the following CD ROM Tivoli Storage Manager Publications Version 5 1 SK3T 8176 About This Book XV Tivoli Storage Manager publications are available in softcopy at the following Web page http www tivoli com support public Prodman public_manuals td TD_PROD_LIST html The IBM International Technical Support Center redbooks are available in softcopy on the IBM Redbooks Web site at the following Web page http www redbooks ibm com You can order hardcopies o
144. and Solaris clients For all other UNIX clients only American English is available 36 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager supports the following language locales Languages AIX and AIX HP UX Solaris Linux X86 5L American English en_US en_US en_US en_US Simplified Chinese zh_CN zh_CN eucCN zh_CN zh_CN Traditional Chinese zh_TW zh_TW eucTW zh_TW zh_TW big5 Zh_TW big5 Zh_TW big5 Japanese ja_JP Ja_JP ja_JP eucJP ja_JP ja_JP Korean ko_KR ko_KR eucKR ko_KR ko_KR French Standard fr_FR fr_FR German Standard de_DE de_DE Italian Standard it_IT it_IT Portuguese Brazil pt_BR pt_BR Note Traditional Chinese BIG5 has locale zh_TW on Linux while zh_TW is used on other platforms for eucTW e zh_CN GB18030 is supported in Linux X86 but only on the command line e Only the command line interface is supported for Linux X86 e Not all UNIX shells are able to show multi byte characters e For Motif Make sure that your command line shell is capable of showing the selected locale The native GUI has to be started from a Window Manager for example CDE KDE2 or Gnome that supports the selected locale To set the LANG environment variable to Japanese type the following export LANG ja_JP Note To display the Tivoli Storage Manager help browser menus in the language of your current locale insure that the NLSPATH environment variable in the
145. and inactive backup versions 74 policy information 99 displaying active backup versions 49 displaying continued archived files 302 backed up files 303 inactive backup versions 49 messages 224 messages stopping 193 online help 50 restartable restore sessions 311 scheduled events 312 session information 313 domain backing up automounted file systems 140 domain option 60 139 setting 337 domain image option 142 domain nas option 143 dsm and dsmc executable files 335 dsm command 42 DSM_CONFIG 38 adding to cshre file 40 pointing to client user options file 38 109 using on Solaris 38 DSM_DIR adding to cshre file 40 pointing to dsm sys file 38 pointing to executable files 38 pointing to resource files 38 set for image or NAS backup or restore 38 dsm_log 39 DSM_LOG adding to cshre file 40 set to point to dsmerror log dsmwebcl log dsmsched log 38 dsm dsmc commands dsm 335 dsmafs 335 dsme 335 dsmcafs 335 dsmcdfs 335 dsmdfs 335 dsm opt file creating 26 creating and modifying 108 creating and modiying 25 example of 26 required options for 25 dsm opt smp file 26 creating client user options file 108 dsm smp file copying to dsm opt 25 location 25 dsm sys file creating 25 creating and modifying 107 example of 25 dsm sys smp file 25 copying to dsm sys 107 dsmafs command to back up AFS files 58 dsmcafs command to back up AFS files 58 dsmcdfs command to back up DFS files 58 dsmdfs command to back up DFS file
146. archive a file to which you have read access you own the archived copy of the file You are the only user who can retrieve the archived file unless you grant access to another user Understanding How Symbolic Links are Handled When you archive a symbolic link Tivoli Storage Manager archives the file to which the symbolic link points It does not archive path information for the directory If you archive a symbolic link that points to a directory Tivoli Storage Manager archives the files contained in the directory and its subdirectories if the subdir option is set to yes under the name of the symbolic link Use the archsymlinkasfile option to specify whether Tivoli Storage Manager archives the symbolic link and the file or directory it points to or the symbolic link only See Archsymlinkasfile on page 123 for more information The following table shows symbolic link archive and retrieve functions and the action taken Table 15 Symbolic Link Management Table for Archive and Retrieve Function Action Taken Archive of a file link Archives the file to which the symbolic link points Archive of a directory link Archives the directory and its contents Archive of a file with subdir yes Archives the directory its contents and contents of subdirectories Archive of a directory with subdir yes Archives the directory its contents and contents of subdirectories Chapter 6 Archiving and Retrieving Files 87 Ta
147. are included in a backup how long they are kept on the server and how many versions of the file the server should keep The server administrator selects a default management class You can specify your own management class to override the default management class You can assign a management class for a file or file group by using an include statement in your client systems options dsm sys file or the include exclude file specified by the inclexcl option Management class names are not case sensitive For example to associate all the files in the costs directory with a management class named budget you would enter include home jones costs budget 102 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide To specify a management class named managall to use for all files to which you do not explicitly assign a management class you would enter include managal The example below demonstrates how to use a management class exclude sno include home winter ice mcweekly include home winter december ice mcdaily include home winter january ice mcmonthly include home winter winter white sno Processing follows these steps 1 The file named white sno is backed up following bottom up processing rules Because you did not specify a management class the file is assigned to the default management class 2 Any file with an extension of ice in the home winter january directory i
148. are not excluded in the include exclude list and meet the requirement for serialization in the backup copy group of the management class assigned to each file Contrast with incremental backup serialization A copy group attribute that specifies whether a file can be modified during a backup or archive operation See static dynamic shared static and shared dynamic server A program running on a mainframe workstation or file server that provides shared services such as backup and archive to other various often remote programs called clients server prompted scheduling A client server communication technique where the server contacts the client node when tasks need to be done Glossary 365 session A period of time in which a user can communicate with a server to perform backup archive restore or retrieve requests shared dynamic A Tivoli Storage Manager copy group serialization mode This mode specifies if a file changes during backup or archive and continues to change after a number of retries The last retry commits the file to the Tivoli Storage Manager server whether or not the file changed during backup or archive Contrast with dynamic shared static and static shared static A copy group serialization value specifying that a file must not be modified during a backup or archive operation Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to retry the operation a number of times If the file is in use during each attempt the file is not b
149. ask Display a list of help choices Command help 292 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Incremental The incremental command backs up all new or changed files or directories in the default client domain or from file systems directories or files you specify unless you exclude them from backup services To incrementally back up selected files or directories enter a file specification in the command If you do not enter a file specification the default is to back up files or directories in the default domain The following attributes in the management class assigned to the file or directory affect whether the data is actually backed up Frequency The number of days that must elapse between successive backups for the file Use this attribute during a full incremental backup Mode Permits you to back up only files that changed since the last backup modified Also permits you to back up the files whether they changed or not absolute Serialization Permits or denies backup of files or directories according to the following values e static In order to be backed up data must not be modified during backup or archive e shared static If data in the file or directory changes during each of the allowed attempts to back up or archive it it is not backed up or archived The value of the changingretries option determines how many attempts are made The default is 4 e dynami
150. asses Command query mgmtclass Chapter 11 Using Commands 309 Query Node The query node command displays all the nodes for which an administrative user ID has authority to perform operations The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID Use the type option to specify the type of node to filter for Valid values are nas client server and any The default is any See for more information Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Syntax gt lt gt gt Query Node C 7 options Parameters options You can use the type command line option with the query node command See E ae ed Examples Task Display all NAS nodes Command query node type nas 310 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Query Restore The query restore command displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database The list contains these fields owner replace subdir preservepath source and destination A restartable restore session is created when a wildcard restore command fails because of network outage client failure server outage
151. ast backup must elapse before a file is backed up Frequency is ignored for partial incremental backups See information Incremental By Date Backup For a disk or volume to be eligible for incremental by date backups you must first perform a full incremental backup of that entire disk or volume Running an incremental backup of only a directory branch or individual file will will not make the disk or volume eligible for incremental by date backups To perform an incremental by date backup using the GUI select the Incremental date only option from the type of backup pull down menu or use the incrbydate option with the incremental command The client backs up only new and changed files with a modification date later than the date of the last incremental backup stored at the server unless you exclude the file from backup services Files added at the client after the last incremental backup but with a modification date earlier than the last incremental are not backed up The directories in the path that contain the file are also backed up unless they already exist on the server A directory that already exists on the server is only backed up again if its modification timestamp changes The files under the directory are also backed up even if their modification timestamps have not changed If you run an incremental by date backup of the whole file system the server updates the date and time of the last incremental If you perform an i
152. at is not explicitly excluded You do not need to use an include option to include specific files unless those files are in a directory you want to exclude You can also specify the include and exclude options in the client system options file dsm sys For more information on creating an include exclude options file see Encryption You can encrypt the data that is sent to the server during a backup or archive operation using standard DES 56 bit encryption Files are selected for encryption using include encrypt and exclude encrypt processing By default files are not encrypted unless they are explicitly included using the include encrypt option For more ee enon about the exclude encrypt option see LEx 2 For more information about the include encrypt option see To encrypt file data you must select an encryption key password which Tivoli Storage Manager uses to generate the encryption key for encrypting and decrypting the file data Store the encryption key password for later use You can specify whether to save the encryption key password in a file named TSM PWD by using the encryptkey option While restoring the encrypted file Tivoli Storage Manager will prompt you for the key password to decrypt the file in the following cases e If the encryptkey option is set to Prompt e If the key supplied by the user in the above case does not match e If the encryptkey option is set to Save and the locally saved key password
153. atch all files h Question mark With an h somewhere in the file name regardless of extension One character that matches all files with 2 cpp hm cpp Asterisk and question mark The extension exe with one and only one character in the file name Three character names beginning with hm and that have the exe extension Asterisk and question mark combinations matching hm All four character file names ending in hm no matter what extension they have In a path name for a file specification you cannot specify a directory whose name contains an asterisk or a question mark Tivoli Storage Manager will recognize those characters only as wildcard characters 72 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories Use Tivoli Storage Manager to restore backup versions of specific files a group of files with similar names or entire directories Select the files you want to restore using file specification file path name and extension a directory list or a subdirectory path to a directory and its subdirectories Table 14 BIE BA ABR e e UNIX socket files are skipped during restore including socket files that were backed up with earlier versions of Tivoli Storage Manager No Query Restore When you enter an unrestricted wildcard source file specification on the
154. ate of the last incremental backup stored at the server unless the files are excluded from backup by an exclude statement If an incremental by date is performed on only part of a file system the date of the last full incremental is not updated and the next incremental by date will back up these files again Changes to the access control lists ACL are not backed up during an incremental by date Use the query filespace command to determine the date and time of the last incremental backup of the entire file system To perform an incremental by date backup use the incrbydate option with the incremental command Unlike a full incremental an incremental by date does not maintain current server storage of all your workstation files because It does not expire backup versions of files that are deleted from the workstation e It does not rebind backup versions to a new management class if the management class has changed e It does not back up files with attributes that have changed unless the modification dates and times have also changed e It ignores the copy group frequency attribute of management classes For these reasons if you have limited time during the week to perform backups but extra time on the weekends you can perform an incremental by date backup on weekdays and a full incremental backup on weekends to maintain current server storage of your workstation files If the incremental command is retried because of a communication f
155. atements For example consider the following include exclude list include compression home jones proj1 file txt exclude home jones projl file txt Tivoli Storage Manager examines the exclude home jones projl file txt statement first and determines that home jones projl file txt is excluded from processing and is not a candidate for compression processing e Include exclude compression processing is valid for backup and archive processing only Processing NAS File Systems Use the include fs nas option to bind a management class to Network Attached Storage NAS file systems for backup processing A NAS file system specification uses the following conventions e NAS nodes represent a new node type The NAS node name uniquely identifies NAS file server and its data to Tivoli Storage Manager You can prefix the NAS node name to the file specification to specify the file server to which the include statement applies If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system you specify applies to all NAS file servers Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 163 e Regardless of the client platform NAS file system specifications use the forward slash separator as in this example vol vol0 e You cannot use wildcards with include fs nas and exclude fs nas statements For example to assign a management class to the vol voll1 file system of a NAS node called netappsj specify the following include statement include fs nas netappsj vo
156. ation on these platforms Instead the Web client displays a message containing a link to the appropriate URL from which you can manually install the JRE You can download and install the JRE 1 3 1 unless otherwise noted plug in manually from the appropriate URL e For Windows Solaris Linux http java sun com j2se 1 3 jre e AIX http www 106 ibm com developerworks java jdk aix index htm Version 1 3 0 e HP UX http www hp com productsl unix java java2 sdkrtel_3 downloads index html e SGI IRIX http www sgi com developers devtools languages javaplugin131 htm1 Note Note for proxy server users The JRE 1 3 1 may return a security exception if the Tivoli Storage Manager Web Client attempts to open a TCP IP socket to a socks server to communicate with the Tivoli Storage Manager Remote Client Agent To avoid this you can use one of the following methods to bypass a proxy server allowing the Web client to establish a direct connection to the Agent machine e Change your Java plug in settings For Windows 1 Open the Windows Start menu and select Settings gt Control Panel 2 In the Control Panel double click Java Plugin 3 In the Java Plug In Control Panel select the Proxies tab and uncheck the Use browser settings check box For UNIX 1 Change directory to the installation directory of your JRE and then change directory to the bin directory 2 Run the JavaPluginControlPanel executable and click the Pro
157. ave changed since your last incremental backup To perform a selective backup using the client GUI see tho GUT on page 59 for more information Use the selective command to perform a selective backup from the client command line See 4 for more information Unlike incremental backups a selective backup e Does not cause the server to update the date and time of the last incremental e Backs up directory and file entries even if their modification timestamp or permissions have not changed Saving Access Permissions When you back up your files Tivoli Storage Manager also saves standard UNIX access permissions assigned to the files Depending on your operating system it also saves extended permissions For example for files on an AIX workstation Tivoli Storage Manager saves access control lists If you use the AFS or DFS versions of the dsm and dsmc commands dsmafs and dsmcafs for AFS dsmdfs and dsmcdfs for DFS to back up AFS or DFS files on an AIX workstation only Tivoli Storage Manager also saves the access control lists that exist for each AFS or DFS directory If you perform a command line backup of AFS or DFS files using the non AFS DFS versions Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the files and standard UNIX access permissions but does not save the AFS or DFS access control lists for directories See Using the AFS DFS Backup Clients for more information Note It is possible for an Authorized User to back up file
158. backup which is the occupancy of the file system After the backup completes the NAS Backup Report window displays processing details including the actual size of the backup Note If it is necessary to close the Web browser session current NAS operations will continue after disconnect You can use the Dismiss button on the NAS Backup Task List window to quit monitoring processing without ending the current operation 6 Optional To monitor processing of an operation from the GUI main window open the Actions menu and select Monitor TSM Activities During a differential backup the status bar indicates processing status A percentage estimate does not display To restore NAS file system images using the Web client GUI see Restoring NAG 348 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Performing a Command Line Backup able 4d lists the commands and options you can use to back up NAS file system images from the command line Table 40 NAS Options and Commands Option or Command Definition Page domain nas Specifies the volumes to include in your default domain for La NAS backups exclude fs nas Excludes file systems on the NAS file server from an image backup when used with the backup nas command This option is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only include fs nas Includes a file system or assigns a management class when used with the backup nas command This op
159. backup 58 deleting 287 pick option 259 pitdate 260 pittime option 261 plug in library for image or NAS backup or restore 38 point in time restore 77 point in time restore continued image backup 280 policies storage management 97 policy domains default policy domain 97 standard policy domain 97 policy sets active policy set 97 portable media restoring backup sets 79 postnschedulecmd options 188 postschedulecmd options 188 prenschedulecmd option 190 preschedulecmd option 190 preservepath option 262 processing options afsbackupmntpnt 122 authorization 117 backup and archive 112 central scheduling 115 communication 109 dfsbackupmntpnt 136 dfsinclexcl 137 error processing 117 format 116 node option 110 restore and retrieve 115 server and node 110 setting 119 specifying in commands 120 transaction processing 118 Web client 118 processing time estimating 59 processing transactions 222 pruning error log 151 Q OFS file system restrictions 295 query include exclude list 308 query access command 301 query archive command 302 query backup command 303 query backupset command 305 query filespace command 306 display another user s filespaces 81 query image command 307 query inclexcl command 308 query mgmtclass command 99 309 query node command 310 query restore command 311 query schedule command 312 query session command 313 queryschedperiod option 192 quiet option 193 R raw logical volume image backup of 62
160. backup copy group for the management class specifies keeping multiple backup versions of the file and you request multiple backups the server always has one active backup version the current version and one or more inactive backup versions of the file All backup versions of a file are bound to the same management class and are managed based on the attributes in the backup copy group When you archive a file for the first time Tivoli Storage Manager binds it to the default management class to the management class specified in your include exclude list or to a management class you specify when modifying your archive options during an archive Archived files are never rebound to a different management class If you change the management class for a file any previous copies of the file that you archived remain bound to the management class specified when you archived them Rebinding Backup Versions of Files Backups of files are bound again to a different management class in the following conditions In each condition the files active and inactive are not bound again until the next backup e You specify a different management class in an Include statement to change the management class for the file The backups are managed based on the old management class until you run another backup e Your administrator deletes the management class from your active policy set The default management class is used to manage the backup versions wh
161. ble 15 Symbolic Link Management Table for Archive and Retrieve continued Function Action Taken Archive of a symbolic link that points to a file or directory that does not exist Archives the symbolic link Retrieve a symbolic link that points to file the file and link exist Replaces the file if replace y is set Retrieve a symbolic link that points to file the symbolic link no longer exists Retrieves the file replacing the file name with the symbolic link name and places it in the directory where the symbolic link resided Retrieve a symbolic link that points to a directory the symbolic link and directory no longer exist A directory is created in the directory where the symbolic link resides and all files and subdirectories are restored to that directory The symbolic link name is used as the new directory name Retrieve a symbolic link that points to a directory the symbolic link and directory still exist Tivoli Storage Manager will not retrieve as long as the symbolic link exists Understanding How Hardlinks are Handled When you archive a file that is hard linked to another file Tivoli Storage Manager stores both the link information and the data file on the server When you retrieve a hard linked file Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to re establish its links For example if you had a hard linked pair of files and only one of the hard linked files was on your workstation when you ret
162. bottom of the screen Press Q to quit C to continuous scroll or Enter to continue Examples Options file scrollprompt yes Command line scrollp yes This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 205 Servername In your client system options file dsm sys the servername option specifies the name you want to use to identify a server and to begin a stanza containing options for that server You can name and specify options for more than one server The following example demonstrates how to specify options for two different servers SErvername server_a COMMMethod TCPip TCPPort 1500 TCPServeraddress almvmd almaden ibm com PASSWORDAccess prompt GRoups tsm USERS sullivan mushock tallan INCLExcl adm tsm backup excl SErvername server_b COMMMethod SHAREdmem shmport 1520 PASSWORDAccess generate MAILprog usr bin xsend root GRoups system tsm INCLExcl adm tsm archive excl In your client user options file dsm opt the servername option specifies which server of those named in your client system options file dsm sys to contact for backup archive services When specified in a client options file or on the command line the servername option overrides the default server specified in your client system options file Notes 1 You cannot use the servername option to override the server that is specified for migration in your client system options f
163. c The object is backed up or archived on the first attempt whether or not data changes during the process e shared dynamic The object is backed up or archived on the last attempt even if data changes during the process Using the include option in an include exclude list you can assign the default management class to a file You can also assign a specific management class to a file You can perform either a full incremental backup or an incremental by date backup The default is a full incremental backup You can also use the selective command to perform a selective backup that backs up only the files directories or empty directories that you specify For more information see Selective on page 329 A full incremental backs up all files or directories that are new or have changed since the last incremental backup During a full incremental backup the client queries the server to determine the exact condition of your storage Tivoli Storage Manager uses this information to e Back up new files or directories e Back up files or directories whose contents have changed e Mark inactive backup versions on the server for files or directories that are deleted from the workstation Chapter 11 Using Commands 293 e Rebind backup versions to management classes if the management class assignments change Incremental by Date An incremental by date backup backs up new and changed files with a modification date later than the d
164. ce when needed The only options applicable to the dsmcad program are optfile httpport httpsport and webports You can specify the httpport httpsport and webports options in the dsm sys file You can specify the optfile option on the command line only All Web client messages are written to the Web client log file dsmwebcl 10g Error messages are written to the error log file dsmerror 1og or the file you specify with the errorlogname option The dsmwebcl log and dsmerror log files 46 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide reside in the directory you specify with the D M LOG environment variable or in the current working directory See k for more information 6 To access the Web client enter the following URL from any supported browser http your_machine_name 1581 where your_machine_name is the host name of the machine running the Web client Port 1581 is the default port number Your administrator can set a different port number using the httpport option See Hittpport on page 159 for more information You can also access the Web client workstation through the Web administrative GUI To use the Web client on AIX or AIX 5L with secure socket layer SSL communications or for more information about Tivoli Storage Manager client socket layer SSL interface to the Web client See information Tivoli Storage Manager Firewall Support In most cases the Tivoli St
165. ced type represents fragments of a program or information as it would display on a screen plus sign A plus sign between two keys indicates you should press both keys at the same time Reading Syntax Diagrams This section describes how to read the syntax diagrams used in this manual To read a syntax diagram follow the path of the line Read from left to right and top to bottom e The symbol indicates the beginning of a syntax diagram e The gt symbol at the end of a line indicates the syntax diagram continues on the next line e The symbol at the beginning of a line indicates a syntax diagram continues from the previous line e The gt 4 symbol indicates the end of a syntax diagram Syntax items such as a keyword or variable can be e On the line required element e Above the line default element e Below the line optional element xii Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Syntax Diagram Description Example Abbreviations gt gt KEYWOrd gt lt Uppercase letters denote the shortest acceptable truncation If an item appears entirely in uppercase letters it cannot be truncated You can type the item in any combination of uppercase or lowercase letters In this example you can enter KEYWO KEYWORD or KEYWOrd Symbols Asterisk Braces Enter these symbols exactly as they appear in Colon the syntax diagram Co
166. ces To perform a full incremental backup using the client GUI select the Incremental complete option from the type of backup pull down menu on the backup window or use the incremental command on dsmc prompt Specify file systems directory trees or individual files to include in the backup During an incremental backup the client queries the server to determine the exact state of your files since last incremental backup The client uses this information to e Back up new files e Back up files whose contents changed since the last backup The client considers a file changed if any of the following attributes changed since the last backup File size Date or time of last modification Access Control List If only the following items change they are updated without causing the entire file to be backed up to the server File owner File permissions Last access time Inode Group ID e Expire backup versions of files on the server that do not have corresponding files on the workstation The result is that files which no longer exist on your workstation will not have active backup versions on the server e Rebind backup versions to management classes if you change management class assignments even if you do not back up the file Attention If a file s modification timestamp changes it will be backed up during the next full incremental backup The directories in the path that contain the file are also backed up unle
167. cifies a beginning time on a specific date from which you want to search for backed up or archived files If you do not specify a time the time defaults to 23 59 59 Specify the time in the format you selected with the timeformat option When you include the timeformat option in a command it must precede the fromtime pittime and totime options Examples Command line dsmc q b timeformat 4 fromt 11 59AM fromd 06 30 99 tot 11 59PM tod 06 30 99 home 248 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide lfnewer The ifnewer option replaces an existing file with the backup if the backup is newer than the existing file Only active backups are considered unless you also use the inactive or latest options Note This option is ignored if the replace option is set to No Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt IFNewer gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore home grover sub y rep y ifnewer Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 249 Inactive Use the inactive option with the following commands and the pick option to display both active and inactive objects e restore e restore nas e query backup e restore image e query image You can also use the pick option to display backup versions
168. cifies the path and file name that you want to query Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory If you use wildcard characters enclose the file specification in double quotation marks Specify an asterisk to display information about backup versions for all of your files in the current directory Do not use wild cards when you query NAS file system images with class nas option Examples Task Display a list of all active and inactive backup versions of your files in the current directory Chapter 11 Using Commands 303 Command query backup inactive Task Display a list of files that were backed up from the home proj directory with file names that begin with proj Use the dateformat and timeformat options Command q b date 1 time 4 home proj proj Task Display a list of active and inactive backup file versions in the home file system Use the dateformat and timeformat options Command q b date 5 time 1 ina su yes home Task Query file system images from the nas2 NAS file server Command query backup nasnodename nas2 class nas 304 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Query Backupset The query backupset command queries a backup set from a local file tape device or the server See Location on page 254 for information on how to specify supported tape devices This command displays the backup set na
169. cify with the filelist option does not exist the command fails Tivoli Storage Manager skips any entries in the filelist that are not valid files or directories Tivoli Storage Manager logs errors and processing continues to the next entry Use file specifications with the restore and retrieve commands to denote the destination for the restored filelist entries For example in the restore command restore filelist home dir file3 usr record dsmc restore filelist sys u projecta files voll u dirl record preservepath complete the file specification usr record represents the restore destination for all entries in the filelist However in the selective command selective filelist home dir file3 usr record the file specification usr record is ignored If you specify a directory in a filelist for the delete archive command the directory is not deleted Filelists that you use with the delete archive command should not include directories The entries in the list will be processed in the order they appear in the filelist For optimal processing performance pre sort the filelist by file space name and path Note Tivoli Storage Manager may back up a directory twice if the following conditions exist e The filelist contains an entry for the directory 242 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide e The filelist contains one or more entries for files within that directory e No backup of
170. ckup Be absolutely sure that you 78 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide need to restore an image for it will replace your entire current file system or raw volume with the image on the server e Ensure that the file system or volume to which you are restoring the image is at least as large as the image that is being restored e The file system or volume you are restoring to does not have to be the same type as the original The volume does not even have to be formatted The image restore process will create the appropriately formatted file system for you e Ensure that the target volume of the restore is not in use The client will lock the volume before starting the restore The client will unlock the volume after the restore completes If the volume is in use when the client attempts to lock the file system the restore will fail e You cannot restore an image to where the Tivoli Storage Manager client program is installed e If you have run progressive incremental backups and image backups of your file system you can perform an incremental image restore of the file system The process restores individual files after the complete image is restored The individual files restored are those backed up after the original image Optionally if files were deleted after the original backup the incremental restore can delete those files from the base image Incremental backups and restores can b
171. ckup set from the dev rmt0 device Command dsmc restore backupset dev rmt0 loc tape Task Restore a single file named budget dev from the dev rmt0 device to the original source path Command dsmc restore backupset dev rmt0 home jones budget dev loc tape Chapter 11 Using Commands 319 Task Restore all files in the budget directory that contain a file extension of txt from the tape s on the dev rmt0 device to the original source path Command dsmc restore backupset dev rmt0 home budget txt loc tape Task Restore the backup set bset01 001 from the server Command dsmc restore backupset bset01 001 loc server Task Restore the backup set contained in local file home jones bset01 file Command dsmc restore backupset home jones bset01 file loc file 320 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Restore Image The restore image command restores a file system or raw volume image that was backed up using the backup image command This command can restore an active base image or a point in time base image with associated incremental updates Notes 1 The API must be installed to use the restore image command 2 Image restore of the Sun OFS file system is not supported Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only Syntax gt gt REStore Image E sourcefilespec a gt options sourcefi
172. ckup2 excl 3 i J Figure 3 Sample Client System Options File Use the servername option in the default client user options file dsm opt or on the command line to specify a server to contact for backup archive services This overrides the default server specified in your client system options file dsm sys Note You cannot override the migration server specified in the client system options file Node Options You may specify the following node options in your client system options file dsm sys Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 111 Table 20 Server and Node Options Option Description Page defaultserver The name of the Tivoli Storage Manager server to contact for backup archive services by default if more than one server is defined in the client system options file dsm sys Also specifies the server to contact for space management services if you have the HSM client installed and do not specify a server with the migrateserver option See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients GC32 0794 for more information clusternode Specifies whether Tivoli Storage Manager participates in a High Availability Cluster Multi Processing HACMP environment nasnodename Specifies the node name for the NAS file server nodename Specifies the name of your workstation so that you can establish communications with the Tivoli Storage Manager server
173. client nodes in a logical way For example a policy domain might include e A department such as Accounting e A physical location such as a particular building or floor e A local area network such as all clients associated with a particular file server Tivoli Storage Manager includes a default policy domain named Standard At first your client node might be associated with the default policy domain However your administrator can define additional policy domains if there are groups of users with unique backup and archive requirements A policy set is a group of one or more management classes Each policy domain can hold many policy sets The administrator uses a policy set to implement different management classes based on business and user needs Only one of these policy sets can be active at a time This is called the active policy set Each policy set contains a default management class and any number of additional management classes Using Management Classes and Copy Groups A management class is a collection of backup and archive copy groups that establishes and contains specific storage management requirements for backing up and archiving data An administrator can establish separate management classes to meet the backup and archive requirements for different kinds of data such as Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 97 e System data that is critical for the business e Application data that changes frequently e Report
174. client only Contains stanzas describing Tivoli Storage Manager servers to contact for services These stanzas also specify communication methods backup and archive options and select scheduling options owner The owner of backup archive files sent from a multi user client node such as AIX 364 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide P pattern matching character See wildcard character plug in A self contained software component that modifies adds or changes function in a particular software system When you add a plug in to a software system the foundation of the original software system remains intact policy domain A policy object that contains one or more policy sets Client nodes are associated with a policy domain See policy set management class and copy group policy set A policy object that contains a group of management class definitions that exist for a policy domain At any one time there can be many policy sets within a policy domain but only one policy set can be active See active policy set and management class progress indicator A control used to inform a user about the progress of a process R raw logical volume A portion of a physical volume which is comprised of unallocated blocks and has no Journaled File System JFS definition A raw logical volume is read write accessible only through low level I O functions reboot To restart the operating system
175. code 8 unless the scheduled operation encounters a more severe error yielding a higher return code If you do not want the postschedulecmd command to be governed by this rule you can create a script or batch file that invokes the command and exits with return code 0 Then configure postschedulecmd to invoke the script or batch file The return code for the postschedulecmd command is not tracked and does not influence the return code of the scheduled event The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option The server can also define the postschedulecmd option and the postnschedulecmd option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt POSTSchedul Sonera a cmdstring gt lt _POSTNschedul ecmd Parameters cmdstring Specifies the command to process You can enter a command to be executed after a schedule with this option Use only one postschedulecmd option Use a blank or null string for cmdstring if you want to prevent any commands from running that the administrator uses for postschedulecmd or preschedulecmd If you specify a blank or null string on either option it prevents the administrator from using a command on both options If your administrator uses a blank or null string on the postschedulecmd option you cannot run a post schedule command If the command string cont
176. contains all backed up images In this case the images selected from the pick list are restored to their original location If you specify the source file space and the destination file space you may select only one entry from the pick list Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax PIck gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc restore home project pick inactive Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 259 Pitdate Use the pitdate option with the pittime option to establish a point in time for which you want to display or restore the latest version of your backups Files or images that were backed up on or before the date and time you specified and which were not deleted before the date and time you specified are processed Backup versions that you create after this date and time are ignored Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt PITDate date gt lt Parameters date Specifies the appropriate date Enter the date in the format you selected with the dateformat option When you include dateformat with a command it must precede the fromdate pitdate and todate options Examples Command line dsmc restore fsl sub y
177. ct password API applications must supply the password when a session is initiated The application is responsible for obtaining the password generate Encrypts and stores your password locally and generates a new password when the old password expires An encrypted password is kept on your workstation when a session starts A password prompt displays when registering a workstation with a server using open registration or if your administrator changes your password manually You can use the mailprog option to specify the program and user ID where you want to send the new password each time the old password expires When logging in locally users do not need to know the Tivoli Storage Manager password for the client node However by using the nodename option at a remote node users can access files they own and files to which another user grants access If you change the name of your client node using the nodename option in the dsm sys file and you specify the same node name in the dsm opt file Tivoli Storage Manager prompts the users for the client node password If a user enters the correct password the user becomes a virtual root user The same is true if a user specifies the same node name using the nodename option with a command Examples Options file passwordaccess generate Command line passwordaccess generate This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 186 Tivoli Sto
178. d directory name for the directory you want to use as the virtual mount point for a file system You cannot use wildcard characters in either the path or directory names Define only one virtual mount point with each virtualmountpoint option that you include in your client system options file Use the virtualmountpoint option as many times as necessary to define all of the virtual mount points that you want to use Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 225 Examples Options file virtualmountpoint afs xyzcorp com home ellen virtualmountpoint afs xyzcorp com home ellen test data Command line virtualmountpoint afs xyzcorp com home ellen This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 226 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Virtualhnodename The virtualnodename option specifies the node name of your workstation when you want to restore or retrieve files to a different workstation When you use the virtualnodename option in your client options file or with a command e You must specify the name you specified with the nodename option in your client systemoptions file dsm sys This name should be different from the name returned by the hostname command on your workstation e Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for the password assigned to the node you specify if a password is required If you enter the correct password you have
179. d to customize the time for your system Refer to the user s manual for complete client scheduler instructions 2 Add the following entries in the etc rc file to set environment variables to retrieve the servername and nodename options from dsm sys and to start the client scheduler as follows Set environment variables to retrieve the servername and nodename options from dsm sys export DSM _DIR tivoli tsm client ba bin export DSM _CONFIG tivoli tsm client ba bin dsm opt Start the TSM Client scheduler and redirect outputs to schedule out instead of the etc log file _BPX_JOBNAME ADSMCLNT tivoli tsm client ba bin rundsmc 1 gt tivoli tsm client ba bin schedule out 2 gt amp 1 amp Note Enter the _BPX_JOBNAME entry on a single line in the etc rc file The client scheduler may fail to initialize properly at IPL because TCP IP is not fully initialized You may need to customize the time for your system to compensate for this Tivoli Storage Manager does not recognize changes made to the dsm opt or the dsm sys file while the client scheduler is running If you make changes to these files while the client scheduler is running and you want to use the new values immediately stop the client scheduler and restart it For example if you change the inclexcl option in your dsm sys file to point to a different include exclude options file you must stop the client scheduler and restart it before Tivoli Storage Manager uses the ne
180. d up exclude home usr include home usr includefile txt 4 If you wish you can specify an include exclude file using the inclexcl option The file can be located_in any directory to which all users on your workstation have read access See Hnclexcl on page 1401 for more information Save the file and close it Restart Tivoli Storage Manager client to enable your new client system options file dsm sys on Using Include Exclude Options This section provides the following e Brief descriptions of the include and exclude options that you can specify in your client system options file dsm sys See table references for more information about each option e A minimum include exclude list that excludes system files e A list of supported wildcard characters that you can use to include or exclude groups of files for processing e Examples of how you might use wildcard characters with include and exclude patterns Excluding File Spaces and Directories Use Exclude fs and Exclude dir statements to exclude file spaces and all files and sub directories in the specified directory from processing Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates all Exclude fs and Exclude dir statements first and removes the excluded file spaces directories and files from the list of objects available for processing The Exclude fs and Exclude dir statements override all include statements that match the pattern Table 6 Options for Excluding File Spaces and Dir
181. data that Management reviews monthly e Legal information that must be retained indefinitely requiring a large amount of disk space Note If you have the Tivoli Space Manager client installed it can also contain specific requirements for migrating files to storage Most of the work you do with storage management policies is with management classes You must associate or bind each file and directory that you back up and each file that you archive with a management class If you do not associate a file with a management class Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default management class in the active policy set If you do not specify a management class for directories Tivoli Storage Manager uses the management class in the active policy set specifying the longest retention period You can use include statements in your include exclude list to associate files with management classes See ag more information In your client par pe file dsm sys file you can associate directories with a management class using the dirmc option See Selecting A Within a management class the specific backup and archive requirements are in copy groups Copy groups define the specific storage management attributes that describe how the server manages backed up or archived data Copy groups include both backup copy groups and archive copy groups A management class can have one backup copy group one archive copy group both or neither A backup copy group co
182. des the server with details about file spaces directories and files 2 The server sorts the data using an internal sort table which minimizes tape mounts 3 The data to be restored is sent to the client File and directory objects stored on disk are sent immediately since sorting for such data is not required before restoring it For more information on using the command line to begin restartable restores see J For help with performing restartable restores using a GUI follow these steps 1 Click Help from the Restore window 2 Click Restoring Backup Versions 3 Click Work with restartable restore sessions Do You Want to Restore an Active or Inactive Backup Your administrator determines how many backup versions Tivoli Storage Manager maintains for each file on your workstation Having multiple versions of a file permits you to restore older versions if the most recent backup is damaged The most recent backup version is the active version Any other backup version is an inactive version Every time Tivoli Storage Manager backs up your files it marks the new backup version as the active backup and the last active backup becomes an inactive backup When the maximum number of inactive versions is reached Tivoli Storage Manager deletes the oldest inactive version 74 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide To restore a backup version that is inactive you must display both ac
183. directories it is not necessary to take any action to associate directories with that management class Tivoli Storage Manager does it automatically when it backs up your directories If the default management class does not meet your requirements select a management class with an adequate retention period specified on the retain only version parameter You should keep directories at least as long as you keep the files associated with those directories Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 103 To assign a management class other than the default to directories use the dirmc option in your client system options file dsm sys For example to assign a management class named direct1 to your directories you would enter dirmc directl Note For archive operations directories are assigned to a management class whose retention period meets or exceeds that of the files contained in those directories The management class is rebound as needed to ensure that directories with files do not expire Binding and Rebinding Management Classes to Files Binding associates a file with a management class When you back up a file for the first time Tivoli Storage Manager binds it to either the default management class or the management class specified in your include exclude list In later backups of the same file if you change the management class both active and inactive versions are bound again to the new management class If the
184. directory Refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media for the location of dsm opt smp for your UNIX client Figure 1 on page 27 shows the contents of the sample client user options file 26 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide x SErvername A server name defined in the dsm sys file Figure 1 Contents of the Sample Client User Options File If you are a root user you can create a default client user options file dsm opt that can be used by all users on your workstation by using one of the following methods 1 From the GUI a Click Utilities and then click Setup Wizard b Select Create a new options file c Follow the instructions on the screen 2 From the UNIX command line Copy dsm opt smp to dsm opt or a new file name of your choice The dsm opt file must reside in the default installation directory or the directory pointed to by the DSM_CONFIG environment variable Attention If you are reinstalling and you want to keep your existing dsm opt file intact do not copy the dsm opt smp file to dsm opt You can then edit your dsm opt file as appropriate for your system From the GUI you can edit this file using the the preferences editor by opening the Edit menu and selecting Preferences Your client user options file dsm opt can include options to control backup and archive processing authorization of stored files and scheduling of tasks Se
185. dministrator gives you authority you can delete entire file spaces from the server You cannot delete individual backup versions that are kept on the server When you delete a file space you delete all the files and images both backup versions and archive copies that are contained within the file space For example if you delete the file space for your home monnet file system you are deleting every backup for every file in that file system and every file you archived from that file system Carefully consider whether you want to delete a file space You can delete file spaces using the Tivoli Storage Manager GUI or command line clients To delete NAS file spaces use the Web client or command line client To delete a file space using the GUI perform the following steps 1 Select Utilities Delete Filespaces from the main window 2 Click the selection boxes next to the file spaces you want to delete 3 Click the Delete button Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for confirmation before deleting the file space You can also delete a file space using the delete filespace command See a age 289 for more information Use the class option with the delete filespace command to delete NAS file spaces See for more information Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories 83 84 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 6 Archiving and Retrieving Files Archiving and retrieving fi
186. doc home jones h2 doc Use the pick option to get a list of archives from which you can select Also see j for more information Understanding How Your Archives are Managed As with backing up files Tivoli Storage Manager checks the include options in your include exclude options list to determine which management class to assign to your archived files If you do not specifically assign a management class to a file with an include option Tivoli Storage Manager assigns the file the default management class Tivoli Storage Manager can only archive a file if the selected management class contains an archive copy group You can override the default management class by using the archmc option or by selecting the management class from the Options menu in the GUI TETTA abou using the include aide options list Chapter 6 Archiving and Retrieving Files 89 90 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 7 Automating Tasks This chapter applies to the Authorized User only Root authorization is only required when updating the etc inittab and etc rc files Your administrator can schedule Tivoli Storage Manager to perform tasks automatically on a regular basis For example you can automatically back up files at the end of each day or archive some of your files every Friday This procedure known as central scheduling is a cooperative effort between the server and your client nod
187. document and all licensed material available for it are provided by IBM under terms of the IBM Customer Agreement IBM International Program License Agreement or any equivalent agreement between us Information concerning non IBM products was obtained from the suppliers of those products their published announcements or other publicly available sources IBM has not tested those products and cannot confirm the accuracy of performance compatibility or any other claims related to non IBM products Questions on the capabilities of non IBM products should be addressed to the suppliers of those products If you are viewing this information softcopy the photographs and color illustrations may not appear 358 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Glossary Term definitions in this glossary pertain to the Tivoli Storage Manager library If you do not find a term you are looking for you can refer to the following publications e IBM Dictionary of Computing at URL http www ibm com networking nsg nsgmain htm e Tivoli Software Glossary at URL http www tivoli com support documents glossary termsm03 htm This glossary may include terms and definitions from e The American National Standard Dictionary for Information Systems ANSI X3 172 1990 copyright ANSI You can purchase copies from the American National Standards Institute 11 West 42nd Street New York New York 10036 e The In
188. does not match the encrypted file For more information about this option see Backing Up Files and Directories Your administrator might have set up schedules to automatically back up files on your workstation See Cha A for information on checking and running the schedules available fe you The following sections discuss how to back up files without using a schedule Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 55 There are two types of incremental backup full incremental and partial incremental Full Incremental Backup The first time you run a full incremental backups Tivoli Storage Manager backs up all of the files and directories on the file systems you specify This process can take a long time if you have several files to back up Successive full incremental backups will only back up new and changed files This allows the backup server to maintain current versions of your workstation files without having to waste time or space by backing up files that already exist in server storage Depending on your storage management policies the server may keep more than one version of your files in storage The most recently backed up files are active backup versions Older copies of your backed up files are inactive versions However if you delete a file from your workstation the backup server will not maintain an active backup version of that file If you need to retrieve a file you have ele ou will need to management poli
189. domain statement in the client system options file dsm sys to list the file systems you want that node to back up e Set the exclude fs option in the client system options file dsm sys to exclude the GPFS file system from backup services Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax v Incremental options filespec filespec Parameters options You can use these command line options with the incremental command dirsonly filelist filesonly incrbydate volinformation For more information You can use these common options with the incremental command changingretries domain memoryefficientbackup subdir tapeprompt For information about these options see K filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to back up Use wildcards to select a group of files or all the files in a directory You can also enter up to 20 file specifications in a command by separating the file specifications with a space If you do not specify a file specification the default domain or the domain specified as an option is backed up If you specify a file system all new and changed files are backed up In addition the last incremental date for the file space is updated on the server If you specify a file or directory the last incremental date is not updated This means the file or directory might be backed up again if a later backup is performed using the
190. dress Authorized User The tcpclientaddress option specifies a TCP IP address if your client node has more than one address and you want the server to contact an address other than the one that was used to make the first server contact Use this option only if you use the prompted parameter with the schedmode option or when the schedule command is running Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TCPCLIENTAddress client_address gt lt Parameters client_address Specifies the TCP IP address you want the server to use to contact your client node Specify a TCP IP Internet domain name or a dot address Examples Options file tcpclienta dsmcInt sanjose ibm com Command line tcpclientaddress 128 33 10 249 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 214 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tcpclientport Authorized User The tcpclientport option specifies a different TCP IP port number for the server to contact than the one that was used to make the first server contact If the default port or the specified port is busy the server attempts to use any available port Use this option only if you specify the prompted parameter with the sc
191. e 2 2 1 1 123 Automount 124 Changingretries a 125 Clusternode 126 Commmethod a 127 Commrestartduration 128 Commrestartinterval 129 Compressalways 130 Compression a s 131 Dateformat 133 Defaultserver 2 135 Dfsbackupmntpnt 136 Dfsinclexcl s ee ee ws ce ce ce Ge 4 LBZ Dirme e e aodo a Roo ee ee 138 Domain 3 i s sop s s be a 2 139 Domainimage a 142 Domain nas ee eee 148 Editof s s s s 8 san a 145 iv Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Enablelanfree Encryptkey Errorlogname Errorlogretention Exclude Options Followsymbolic Groups Guitreeviewafterbackup Httpport Httpsport Imagetype Inclexcl Include Options Lanfreecommmethod Lanfreeshmport Lanfreetcpport Largecommbuffers Localbackupset Mailprog Managedservices Maxcmdretries Memoryefficientbackup Nasnodename Nfstimeout Nodename Numberformat Password Passwordaccess Passworddir Postschedulecmd Postnschedulecmd Preschedulecmd Prenschedulecmd Queryschedperiod Quiet F Replace Resourceuilization Retryperiod Revokeremoteaccess Schedcmddisabled Schedlogname Schedl
192. e QZ for more information for more information about setting for options that are supported on your and detailed oean about each option 09 for communication protocols supported ie you UNIX client Creating a Customized Client User Options File Optional User Task If you are a user and want to use different options than those specified in the default client user options file dsm opt you can create your own client user options file You can set all the options that can be set in the default user options file For example in the client user options file you can use the domain option to specify the file systems you want to incrementally backup The default is all locally mounted file systems except for tmp You can use one of the following methods to create your own client user options file 1 From the GUI a Open the Utilities menu and select Setup Wizard b Select Create a new options file c Follow the instructions on the screen 2 Contact the root user on your workstation to determine the location of the sample client user options file dsm opt smp and do the following Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager 27 a Copy dsm opt smp to your home directory as dsm opt or a new file name of your choice You can store your client user options file in any directory to which you have write access b Set the DSM_CONFIG environment variable to point to your new client user options file For instruction
193. e Your administrator associates clients with one or more schedules that are part of the policy domain maintained in the server database The administrator defines central scheduling on the server and you start the client scheduler on your workstation Once you start the client scheduler further intervention is not necessary With client scheduling you can also e Display information about available schedules e Display information about work that the schedule has completed e Modify scheduling options in the client options file Notes 1 The schedule start time is based on the server s local time not the workstation s 2 Install the command line client and ensure the communication software is running before you start the client scheduler Specifying Scheduling Options You can modify scheduling options in the client system options file dsm sys or in the graphical user interface However if your administrator specifies a value for these options that value overrides the value in your client For more information about scheduling options changing the scheduling mode specifying the TCP IP address or port number or running commands before or after a schedule see Return Codes from the Command Line Interface Earlier versions of the backup archive client did not exit with consistent documented return codes This made automation with scripts batch files or other scheduling facilities difficult since there was no ea
194. e performed only on mounted file systems not on raw logical volumes Note If for some reason a restored image is corrupted you can use the chkdsk tool to attempt to repair the image Restoring Data from a Backup Set Your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator can generate a backup set a collection of your active files that reside on the server onto portable media created on a device using a format that is compatible with the client device It is possible to generate a backup set as a number of special files if the device class the Tivoli Storage Manager administrator is file These files can be stored locally on client to provide more restore flexibility for the client Portable media can be used on devices such as a tape CD ROM DVD and Iomega JAZ or ZIP drives Current device support information is available at the following Web site http www tivoli com support storage_mgr requirements html You can restore backup sets from the following locations e From portable media on a device attached to your client workstation e Directly from the server You must be a root user to restore an entire backup set from the server otherwise only files you own are restored Backup sets can provide you with instant archive and rapid recovery capability as described below Instant Archive This capability allows an administrator to create an archive collection from backup versions already stored on the server Rapid Recovery When you
195. e 261 postnschedulecmd 188 postschedulecmd 188 prenschedulecmd 190 preschedulecmd 190 preservepath 262 queryschedperiod 192 quiet 193 replace 194 resourceutilization 195 restore and retrieve summary 115 retryperiod 197 revokeremoteaccess 198 schedcemddisabled 199 schedcmduser server defined only 96 schedlogname 200 schedlogretention 201 schedmode 202 375 Index options continued scrolllines 204 scrollprompt 205 servername 206 shmport 208 snapshotcachesize 209 specifying in commands 120 subdir 210 tapeprompt 212 tcpbuffsize 213 tcpclientaddress 214 tcpclientport 215 tcpnodelay 216 tcpport 217 tcpserveraddress 218 tcpwindowsize 219 timeformat 220 todate 265 totime 266 transaction processing summary 118 txnbytelimit 222 type 267 users 223 using options with commands 231 v2archive 268 verbose 224 virtualmountpoint 225 virtualnodename 227 volinformation 269 Web client summary 118 webports 229 OS 390 UNIX System Services client client components 7 communication method 7 hardware requirements 7 operating system requirements 7 overriding the client options file 231 P parameters command optional 274 required 274 password changing 48 333 number of characters 49 setting for client 28 using 43 valid characters 49 password option 184 passwordaccess option 185 passworddir option 187 performance transaction options 118 transaction processing 222 permissions access saving standard and extended 87
196. e Clients Installation and User s Guide Using Using e On the command line change directory to the Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory and enter dsmc followed by the command if you want to run a single command batch mode e On the command line change directory to the Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory and enter dsmc This places you in interactive mode permitting you to run several commands without preceding each with dsmc Your administrator can require you to use a password to connect to the server Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for the password if one is required If you do not know your password contact your administrator You can start a client command session in either batch or interactive mode Batch Mode Use batch mode to enter a single client command When you use batch mode you must precede the command with dsmc If a Tivoli Storage Manager password is required at your server Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for your password each time you enter a command For example to issue the incremental command enter the following at the prompt dsmc incremental When you type in your password and press Enter the password does not display on your screen Interactive Mode Use interactive mode when you want to issue a series of commands Because Tivoli Storage Manager establishes the connection to the server only once for interactive mode you can process a series of commands more quickl
197. e Copy Serialization attribute determines whether a file can be in use during a backup or archive and what to do if it is The value for this attribute can be one of the following e Static A file or directory must not be modified during a backup or archive If the object is changed during a backup or archive attempt it is not backed up or archived 100 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide e Shared static A file or directory must not be modified during backup or archive Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to perform a backup or archive as many as four additional times depending on the value specified on the changingretries option in your client system options dsm sys file If the object is changed during every backup or archive attempt it is not backed up or archived e Dynamic A file or directory is backed up or archived on the first attempt regardless of whether it changes during a backup or archive e Shared dynamic A file or directory is backed up or archived regardless of whether it changes during a backup or archive Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to perform a back up or archive as many as four additional times depending on the value specified on the changingretries option in your client system options file without the file changing during the attempt The file is backed up or archived on the last try even if it has changed Note Be careful when you select a management class con
198. e GUI attempts initial logon with the server and enables all functions This is the default Yes Specifies that the GUI does not attempt initial logon with the server and enables only the restore functionality Examples Options file localbackupset yes Command line dsm localbackupset yes 172 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Mailprog Authorized User UNIX requires access authority The mailprog option specifies the program and user ID to which you want to send a newly generated password when the old password expires Use this option only when you select generate with the passwordaccess option Supported Clients This option is for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt MAILprog filespec userid ______________1_W lt Parameters filespec Specifies the path and file name of the program to which you want to send a newly generated password The program you specify must accept standard output userid Specifies the user ID of the user to whom you want to send a newly generated password For OS 390 UNIX System Services enter the user ID in uppercase letters Examples Options file mailprog usr bin xsend root for AIX AIX 5L mailprog bin mailx USER1 for 0S 390 UNIX System Services Note Run the enroll command before you use xsend Command line Does not apply Chapt
199. e Manager firewall support 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax p gt gt WEBPorts cadport agentport gt lt Parameters cadport Specifies the required Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon port number If a value is not specified the default zero 0 causes TCP IP to randomly assign a free port number Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 229 agentport Specifies the required Tivoli Storage Manager Web client agent service port number If a value is not specified the default zero 0 causes TCP IP to randomly assign a free port number Examples Options file webports 2123 2124 Command line Does not apply 230 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands The client program includes a group of client command options that you can enter with specific commands only from the command line You can also enter common options to override many of the options set in your client options file dsm opt Options are processed following this precedence order 1 Options defined on the server with server enforced client options The client cannot override the value Options entered locally on the command line Options defined on the server f
200. e all directories under the home mydir exc directory with names beginning with test excl ude ude dir home mydir test1l dir home mydir test Exclude all directories directly under the excl mydir directory with names beginning with test on any file system ude dir mydir test Exclude the raw logical volume from image exc backup You must use the suffix to include or exclude logical volumes ude image dev hd0 Processing Include and Exclude Options The Tivoli Storage Manager server can define include exclude options using the inclexcl parameter in a client option set The include exclude statements specified 34 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide by the server are evaluated along with those in the client user options file dsm opt The server include exclude statements are always enforced and placed at the bottom of the include exclude list and evaluated before the client include exclude statements If the client system options file dsm sys include exclude list contains one or more inclexcl options that specify include exclude files the include exclude statements in these files are placed in the list position occupied by the inclexcl option and processed accordingly When performing an incremental backup Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates all exclude fs and exclude dir statements first and removes the excluded file space
201. e file system name that you want to query Omitting logicalvolumename and filespacename causes all images to display Examples Task Display all backed up images Command q image Task Display all backed up images owned by kutras at node avalon Command query image fromnode avalon fromowner kutras Task Display active and inactive version of the usr image Command q i usr inactive Chapter 11 Using Commands 307 Query Inclexcl The query inclexcl command displays a list of include exclude statements in the order in which they are processed during backup and archive operations The list displays the type of option the scope of the option archive all etc and the name of the source file You can test the validity of patterns you wish to use in your include exclude list before you actually insert them in your options file See the test pattern explanation below Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query INCLexcl 4 2 e test pattern Parameters test pattern Use for testing the validity of patterns you wish to use in your include exclude list When you use a test pattern with this command the following occurs e The internal include exclude list is not displayed e The pattern is processed as if it had come from an include exclude statement including all the usual error checking e The pattern is displayed as it would appear in the include exclude list If th
202. e given access to backup versions or archive copies of specific files Tivoli Storage Manager displays a list of authorization rules that you defined with the set access command or with User Access List on the graphical user interface GUI Utilities menu The information includes e Authority you gave a user to restore backup versions or retrieve archive copies e The node name of the user to whom you gave authorization e The ID of the user at that node to whom you gave authorization e The files to which the user has access Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query ACcess potions Parameters options You can use the following common options with the query access command scrolllines scrollprompt For more information about common options you can use with this command see Ch Examples Task Display a list of users who have access to your files Command query access Chapter 11 Using Commands 301 Query Archive The query archive command displays a list of your archived files the file size archive date file specification expiration date and file description Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query ARchive filespec gt lt apitons Filespec Parameters options You can use these command line options with the query archive command description dirsonly filelist fileso
203. e incremental backup on your default domain The schedule has no expiration date The schedule name WEEKLY_INC starts a weekly incremental backup in the proj file system Displaying Information about Completed Work When you run the schedule command in the foreground your screen displays output from the scheduled commands Output is also directed to the dsmsched log file in the current directory unless you change the path and file name using the schedlogname option When you run the schedule command in the background output from scheduled commands is directed to the dsmsched 1og file in the current directory or to the path and file name that you specified Please note that the dsmsched 1log cannot be a symbolic link After scheduled work is performed check the schedule log to verify that all work completed successfully When a scheduled command is processed the schedule log may contain the following entry Scheduled event eventname completed successfully The client indicates whether Tivoli Storage Manager successfully issued the scheduled command associated with the eventname No attempt is made to determine the success or failure of the command You can assess the status of the command by evaluating the return code from the scheduled command in the schedule log The schedule log entry for the command s return code is prefaced with the following text Chapter 7 Automating Tasks 95 Finished command Return code is Th
204. e or more blank spaces followed by the option value For example compression yes nodename client_a Some options consist of only the option name such as verbose and quiet You can enter the entire option name or its abbreviation For example you can specify the verbose option as either of the following verbose ve Follow these additional rules when entering options in your client user options file dsm opt e Do not enter comments on the same line as an option e Indent options with spaces or tabs e Begin each comment with an asterisk as the first character in a line e Enter each option on a separate line and enter all parameters for an option on the same line For example to specify a group of five different file systems as your default client domain enter domain home mfg planning mrkting mgmt e Enter one or more blank spaces between parameters e Use blank lines between options e The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum combined length of the file name and path name is 1024 characters If you update the client user options file while a GUI or Web client session is active you must restart the session to pick up the changes Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 119 Using Options with Commands You can override some of the options in your options file by entering them with appropriate backup archive commands You cannot override options by entering them with HSM commands
205. e schedule log continues to schedlogretention option See more information Scheduling Options for Commands The scheduler executes commands under a user ID of 0 however some commands may need to be executed under a user ID different than 0 In this case your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator can define schedules for commands that will be executed under a user ID different from the scheduler user ID using the schedcmduser server option The schedcmduser option specifies the name of a valid user on the system where a scheduled command is executed If this option is specified the command is executed with the authorization of the specified user Otherwise it is executed with the scheduler authorization This option is valid for UNIX clients only gt gt SCHEDCMDUser user_name gt lt user_name Specifies the name of a valid user on the system where a scheduled command is executed Enabling Disabling Scheduled Commands You can query the schedules defined by your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator by entering the following command query schedule You can use the schedcmddisabled option to disable the scheduling of commands by the server Commands are scheduled by using the action command option on the define schedule server command The schedcmddisabled option does not disable the preschedulecmd and postschedulecmd commands However you can specify preschedulecmd or postschedulecmd with a blank or a null
206. e test pattern has no errors the compiled pattern result is the same as the test pattern Examples Task Display a list of include exclude statements Command query inclexcl Task Test the validity of this pattern x log Command query inclexcl x 1og 308 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Query Mgmtclass The query mgmtclass command displays information about the management classes available in your active policy set Your administrator defines management classes that contain attributes controlling whether a file is eligible for backup or archive services Management classes also determine how backups and archives are managed on the server Your active policy set contains a default management class it can contain any number of additional management classes You can assign specific management classes to files using include options that are located in the client user options file dsm opt If you do not assign a management class to a file Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default management class When you archive files you can override the assigned management class by using the archmc option Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query Mgmtclass gt lt E attang Parameters options You can use the detail and fromnode command line options with the que Examples Task Display default and available management cl
207. e you to use a password to connect to the server Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for the password if one is required Contact your administrator if you do not know your password If you are using passwords you should change them regularly to restrict access to your data To change your password from the GUI 48 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide From the main window open the Utilities menu and select Change password Enter your current and new passwords and enter your new password again in the Verify password field 3 Click Change hp To change your password from the command line enter dsmc set password Then enter your old and new passwords A Tivoli Storage Manager password can be up to 63 characters Valid characters are Character Description A Z Any letter A through Z upper or lower case 0 9 Any number 0 through 9 Plus Period E Underscore Hyphen amp Ampersand assword on page 84 A password is not case sensitive See for additional password information The following are additional password information sources Sorting File Lists You can sort a list of files by various attributes such as name directory size or modification date Sorting files by the last backup date can be useful in determining what date and time to use for the point in time function see To sort a file list select one of the Sort by items fro
208. ecified on a command line it cannot be the same name as the name returned by the hostname command When the server accepts the virtual node name a password is required if authentication is on even if the passwordaccess option is generate When a connection to the server is established access is permitted to any file that is backed up using this login ID Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax gt gt NODename nodename gt lt Parameters nodename Specifies a 1 to 64 character node name for which you want to request Tivoli Storage Manager services The default is the name of the workstation 180 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file nodename cougar Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 181 Numberformat The numberformat option specifies the format you want to use to display numbers The AIX AIX 5L Solaris and HP UX clients support locales other than English that describe every user interface that varies with location or language Solaris and HP UX clients only support English Simplified Chinese and Japanese locale information The default directories for system supplied locales are as follows e usr lib nls loc for AIX and AIX 5L e usr 1ib locale for Solaris e usr
209. ectories Option Description Page exclude fs Excludes file spaces matching the pattern The client does not La consider the specified file space for processing and the usual deleted file expiration process cannot occur If you exclude a file space that was previously included existing backup versions remain on the server subject to retention rules specified in the associated management class definition See for more information 30 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Table 6 Options for Excluding File Spaces and Directories continued Option Description Page exclude fs nas Excludes file systems on the NAS filer from an image backup a when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified applies to all NAS filers The backup nas command ignores all other exclude statements including exclude fs and exclude dir statements This option is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only exclude dir Excludes a directory its files and all its subdirectories and 52 their files from backup processing For example exclude dir test dan datal excludes test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files However you can still back up test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their files using a selective backup as follows dsmc sel subdir yes test dan datal However the next time you per
210. ectories are processed For more information see If a subdirectory is a mounted file system it will not process even if you specify subdir yes for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file subdir no Command line To restore the structure path2 dirl path2 dirl filel path2 dirl dir2 path2 dirl dir2 filel enter any of the following commands dsmc rest path dirl path2 su yes dsmc rest path dirl filex path2 su yes dsmc rest path dirl filel path2 su yes Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 211 Tapeprompt The tapeprompt option specifies whether you want to wait for a tape to mount if it is required for a backup archive restore or retrieve process or to be prompted for a choice Tape prompting does not occur during a scheduled operation regardless of the setting for the tapeprompt option The tapeprompt option can be used with the following commands archive incremental restore retrieve selective Note The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt TAPEPrompt gt lt Yes Parameters No You are not prompted for your choice The server waits for the appropriate tape to mount This is the default Yes You are prompted when a tape is required to back up archive r
211. ed Files You can delete archive copies if you decide you no longer need them Unlike backup versions you can delete individual archive copies without deleting the entire file space To delete an archive copy 1 Click on Utilities from the client GUI main window 86 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide 2 Click on Delete Archive Data The Archive Delete window displays 3 Expand the directory tree The directory tree contains groups of files identified by a description and archived to the server 4 Click the selection boxes to select the objects you want to delete 5 Click on Delete The Archive Delete Status window displays the archive deletion processing status If you are using commands you can delete archive copies with the delete archive command For example to delete the file home jones t exe enter dsmc delete archive home jones t exe Archive Advanced Considerations This section covers some advanced considerations in archiving files You do not need to understand this information in order to use Tivoli Storage Manager for basic work Saving Access Permissions When you archive a file Tivoli Storage Manager saves standard UNIX access permissions assigned to the file Depending on your operating system it also saves extended permissions For example for files on an AIX workstation Tivoli Storage Manager saves access control lists If you are a user and you
212. ed applies to all NAS filers The backup nas command ignores all other include statements This option is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Controlling Compression and Encryption Processing After Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates Exclude fs Exclude dir and any other include exclude options controlling backup archive image and system objects it uses the following options to determine which files undergo compression encryption or subfile processing Table 8 Options for Controlling Compression and Encryption Processing Option Description Page Compression Processing exclude compression Excludes files from compression processing if compression yes is specified This option applies to backups and archives include compression Includes files for compression processing if compression yes is specified This option applies to backups and archives Encryption Processing exclude encrypt Excludes files from encryption processing include encrypt Includes files for encryption processing Excluding System Files For UNIX we recommend that you have the following minimum include exclude list in your include exclude options file exclude unix exclude dir unix exclude core 32 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Leal If you are using AFS also specify exclude usr vice cache exclude var vice cache These are syst
213. ed on home you can issue backup image home but backup image dev lv01 will fail with an error ANS1063E Invalid path specified For Sun systems Specify either a file system name or a raw device name block device type Examples Task Task Task Back up the home test file space over which the logical volume is mounted and perform an image incremental backup that backs up only new and changed files after the last full image backup Command dsmc backup image home test mode incremental Perform an offline image backup of the home directory during which the volume is unmounted and remounted read only Command dsmc backup image home imagetype static Back up the dev 1v01 raw logical volume Command dsmc backup image dev 1v01 282 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Backup NAS The backup nas command creates an image backup of one or more file systems belonging to a Network Attached Storage NAS file server The NAS file server performs the outboard data movement A server process starts in order to perform the backup Use the nasnodename option to specify the node name for the NAS file server When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID The NAS node name identifies the NAS file server to the Tivoli Storage Manager server the NAS node name must be registered at the server Place
214. ed paper containing 10 recovered post consumer fiber GC32 0789 00 Losey gpIn4 saos pue UOTETTeISUT suon sATyo y dnypeg JOANI Sue XINA 107 toseueyy ILIO TOAT uoL ewaozul BULAS
215. edule log Tivoli Storage Manager removes all entries in the schedule log with a different date format when pruning the log When you change the date format and use the errorlogretention option to prune the error log Tivoli Storage Manager removes all entries in the error log with a different date when pruning the log When changing the date format copy the schedule log and error log if you want to preserve log entries that contain a different date format Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt DATEformat format_number gt lt Parameters format_number Displays the date using one of the following formats Select the number that corresponds to the date format you want to use 0 Use the locale specified date format For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris This is the default if the locale specified date format consists of digits and separator characters 1 MM DD YYYY This is the default Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 133 For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris This is the default if the locale specified date format consists of anything but digits and separator characters 2 DD MM YYYY 3 YYYY MM DD 4 DD MM YYYY 5 YYYY MM DD For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris To set a particular date format edit the source file for your locale and modify the d_fmt line to support your needs Whatev
216. eginning time on the query archive baal specified date Use with the fromdate query backup option This option is ignored if the restore fromdate option is absent retrieve restore image ifnewer Replaces existing files with the latest restore bad backup version only if the backup restore backupset version is newer than the existing retrieve version inactive Displays a list of active and inactive query backup psd files when used with the pick option restore restore nas query image restore image incrbydate Requests an incremental backup by incremental Bail date incremental Applies changes to the base image restore image p52 using information from incremental backups made after the original image backup latest Restores the most recent backup restore p53 version of a file whether it is active or inactive location Specifies whether Tivoli Storage query backupset p54 Manager searches for a backup seton restore backupset the server in local files or on a tape device during a query or restore operation mode Specifies whether to perform an image backup nas B55 backup on an entire file system or only backup image those files that change after the original image backup monitor Specifies whether you want to monitor backup nas bsd an image backup or restore of one or restore nas more file systems belonging to a NAS file server noprompt Suppresses the confirmation prompt delete archive psd when deleting an archived file restore image
217. em files that cannot be recovered without possibly corrupting the operating system Including and Excluding Groups of Files To specify groups of files that you want to include or exclude use the wildcard characters listed in Hable d This table applies to include and exclude statements only For information about using wildcard characters in Tivoli Storage Manager commands see Table 9 Wildcard and Other Special Characters Character Function The match one character matches any single character except the directory separator it does not match the end of the string For example The pattern ab matches abc but does not match ab abab or abzzz The pattern ab rs matches abfrs but does not match abrs or abllrs The pattern ab ef rs matches abdefjrs but does not match abefrs abdefrs or abefjrs The pattern ab rs matches abcdrs abzzrs but does not match abrs abjrs or abkkkrs i The match all character For example The pattern ab matches ab abb abxxx but does not match a b aa bb The pattern ab rs matches abrs abtrs abrsrs but does not match ars or aabrs abrss e The pattern ab ef rs matches abefrs abefghrs but does not match abefr abers The pattern abcd matches abcd c abcd txt but does not match abcd abcdc or abcdtxt fex The match n character matches zero or more directories The directory separator character limits the scope of the search for the
218. ement class 102 filtering files 59 fuzzy 101 GPFS multi node cluster environment 139 296 grace period retention 98 groups of files 60 hard links 70 image 62 considerations 63 offline and online 62 restrictions for incrmental by date 64 specify type 161 supported devices 63 using command line 64 using DSM_DIR to point to plug in library 38 using the GUI 64 inactivate a list of files 291 incremental 59 restrictions for directories 56 incremental by date 57 59 restrictions for directories 57 restrictions for image backup 64 LAN based image 280 managing 97 maximum file size 275 NAS using DSM_DIR to point to plug in library 38 NAS file systems 66 347 new and changed files 55 56 online image specify percent value of the target volume to create 209 opened files 71 overview 55 performance comparison between incremental and incremental by date 57 purpose 54 requirements 68 saving encryption key password 148 searching files 59 selective 58 59 server free image 280 sorting file list 49 subdirectories 60 369 backup continued symbolic links 68 using LAN Free Data Movement 146 using multiple sessions 61 using the Web client 44 backup copy group 98 attributes 99 backup image command 280 supported devices 63 backup NAS command 283 backup set enabling GUI for local restore 79 enabling GUI for local restore of 172 restore 79 backup sets restoring in a SAN environment 318 backup archive client overview 1 batch mode
219. ement class assigned to the file Only the first ten characters of the management class name are displayed Querying NAS File System Images You can use the query backup command to display information about file system images backed up for a NAS file server Use the nasnodename option to identify the NAS file server to query When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID Place the nasnodename option in your client system options file dsm sys The value in the client system options file is the default but this value can be overridden on the command line See a for more information Use the class option to specify the class of the file space to query To display a list of images belonging to a NAS node use the class nas option Using the default class client will not change the current query backup behavior See Class onl for more information Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query Backup filespec gt lt antiin L Filespec Parameters options You can use these command line options with the query backup command class dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromowner fromtime inactive pitdate pittime todate totime For more information see scrolllines nasnodename scrollprompt See Cha for information about these common options filespec Spe
220. en you back up the file again e Your administrator assigns your client node to a different policy domain and the active policy set in that domain does not have a management class with the same name The default management class for the new policy domain is used to manage the backup versions 104 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Using a Retention Grace Period Tivoli Storage Manager also provides a backup retention grace period and an archive retention grace period to help protect your backup and archive data when it is unable to rebind a file to an appropriate management class The backup retention grace period is used when e You change the management class for a file but neither the default management class nor the new management class contain a backup copy group e The management class to which a file is bound no longer exists and the default management class does not contain a backup copy group The backup retention grace period defined in your policy domain starts when you run an incremental backup The default is 30 days However your administrator can lengthen or shorten this period When Tivoli Storage Manager manages a file using the backup retention grace period it does not create any new backup versions of the file All existing backup versions of the file expire 30 days or the number of days specified in your policy domain from the day they are marked inactive
221. ent Clase Tr Files ko 102 Assigning a Management Class to Files 102 Overriding the Management Class for Archived Files s 103 Selecting a Management Class for Directories 103 Binding and Rebinding Management Classes to Files Soh 6 dk sy Oe Rebinding Backup Versions of Files kha Se fy aa LOA Using a Retention Grace Period 105 Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 107 Creating and Modifying the Client System Options File 107 Creating and Modifying ie Client User Options File s 108 Communication Options amp oy ew amp whe Gace 3 e O09 TCP IP Options s s 109 Shared Memory Options 110 Server and Node Options 110 Server Options M1 Node Options zoa as a UI Backup and Archive Processing Options a dooa we 2 Restore and Retrieve Processing Options 115 Scheduling Options 115 Format Options 2 6 amp 4 4 36 Command Processing Options fou eos a a aG Authorization Options 17 Error Processing Options 117 Transaction Processing Options 118 Web Client Options v lt 118 Setting Options in a File 119 Using Options with Commands 120 Entering Options witha Command 120 Client Options Reference 121 Afsbackupmntpnt 122 Archsymlinkasfil
222. ent system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax No gt gt SCHEDCMDDi sabled L_Yes Parameters Yes Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager disables the scheduling of commands by the server using the action command option on the define schedule server command No Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager does not disable the scheduling of commands by the server using the action command option on the define schedule server command This is the default Examples Options file schedcmddisabled no Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 199 Schedlogname Authorized User The schedlogname option specifies the path and file name where you want to store schedule log information Use this option only when the scheduler is running When you run the schedule command output from scheduled commands is displayed on your screen Output is also sent to the file you specify with this option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt SCHEDLOGName filespec gt lt Parameters filespec Specifies the path and file name where you want to store schedule log information when processing scheduled work If you specify a file name only the file is stored in your current directory The defau
223. ents e A SGI workstation with MIPS processor IP19 R4K or higher e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory 64 MB Software Requirements IRIX UNIX 6 5 with EFS or XFS File systems Communication Methods To use this To connect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard with IRIX UNIX AIX HP UX VM z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT Additional Software Requirements The backup archive client GUI requires e X Window System X11R6 e Motif 1 2 or 2 0 Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 7 Solaris Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the Sun Solaris platform Client Components e Backup archive client command line and GUI e Administrative client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API 32 bit and 64 bit e X Open API e Web backup archive client Hardware Requirements e ASPARCstation based on sun4u architecture e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory 64 MB Software Requirements e Sun Solaris 2 6 7 or 8 32 bit Sun Solaris 7 or 8 64 bit Communication Methods To use this To connect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard with S
224. er all nfs Backs up all network file systems except those handled by automounter all auto nfs Backs up all network file systems which are handled by automounter all auto lofs Backs up all loopback file systems which are handled through automounter Examples Options file domain tst datasave joe domain all local Command line domain fs1 fs2 domain tmp Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 141 Domain image The domain image option specifies the mounted file systems and raw logical volumes that you want to include in your client domain for an image backup Raw logical volumes must be named explicitly If you do not specify a file system with the backup image command the file systems you specify with the domain image option are backed up When you specify a file system with the backup image command the domain image option is ignored If you do not use the domain image option to specify file systems in your client options file and you do not specify a file system with the backup image command a message is issued and no backup occurs Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux86 Solaris only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt DOMAIN Image gt lt Comana Parameters dom
225. er 9 Setting Processing Options 173 Managedservices Authorized User UNIX requires access authority The managedservices option specifies whether the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon CAD manages the scheduler the Web client or both Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option See LCon j for instructions to set up the CAD to manage the scheduler The CAD serves as an external timer for the scheduler When the scheduler is started it queries the server for the next scheduled event The event is either executed immediately or the scheduler exits The CAD restarts the scheduler when it is time to execute the scheduled event Notes 1 If you set the schedmode option to prompt the server prompts the CAD when it is time to run the schedule The scheduler will connect and disconnect to the server when the CAD is first started 2 Set the passwordaccess option to generate in your client system options so that Tivoli Storage Manager generates your password automatically See 85 for more information Using the managedservices option can provide the following benefits e Memory retention problems that may occur when using traditional methods of running the scheduler are resolved Using the CAD to manage the scheduler requires very little memory between scheduled operations e The CAD can manage both the scheduler program and the Web client reducing the number of background pr
226. er date format you select applies both to output and to input however the input year can be either 2 or 4 digits m d y Displays the date in the form MM DD YY d m Y Displays the date in the form DD MM YYYY Examples Options file dateformat 3 Command line date 4 This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode If you use this option in interactive mode it remains in effect for the entire interactive session or until you enter another dateformat option 134 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Defaultserver Authorized User The defaultserver option specifies the default server to which you want to back up or archive files from your local systems If you have the HSM client installed on your workstation and you do not specify a migration server with the migrateserver option use this option to specify the server to which you want to migrate files See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients for more information Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option at the beginning of the client system options file dsm sys before any server stanzas Syntax gt gt DEFAULTServer servername gt lt Parameters servername Specifies the name of the default server to which you back up or archive files The server to which files are migrated from
227. er files click the Search icon from the tool bar To search a Enter your search criteria in the Find Files Retrieve window b Click the Search button The Matching Files Retrieve window appears c Click the selection boxes next to the files you want to retrieve and close the Matching Files Retrieve window To filter 1 Enter your filter criteria in the Find Files Retrieve window 2 Click the Filter button The Retrieve window displays the filtered files 3 Click the selection boxes next to the filtered files or directories you want to retrieve 3 To modify specific retrieve options click the Options button Any options you change are effective during the current session only To estimate the transfer time for your archived selections click the Estimate button 4 Click Retrieve The Retrieve Destination window appears Enter the appropriate information in the Retrieve Destination window 5 Click Retrieve The Retrieve Task List window displays the retrieve processing status Performing a Command Line Retrieve Use the retrieve command to retrieve files Indicate the file you want to retrieve and the destination If you do not indicate a destination the files are retrieved to their original location For example to retrieve the home jones h1 doc file to its original directory enter dsmc retrieve home jones h1 doc To retrieve the home jones hl doc file under a new name enter dsmc retrieve home jones hl
228. er of digits in each group that is separated by the thousands_sep character Examples Options file num 4 Command line number format 4 This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 183 Password The password option specifies a Tivoli Storage Manager password If you do not specify this option and your administrator has set authentication to On you are prompted for a password when you start a Tivoli Storage Manager session Notes 1 If the server prompts for a password the password does not display as you enter it On Solaris if you use the password option on the command line your password will display as you enter it On all other UNIX clients your password does not display as you enter it on the command line 2 If the Tivoli Storage Manager server name changes or Tivoli Storage Manager clients are directed to a different Tivoli Storage Manager server all clients will need to have a new password initialized for the new server name The password option is ignored when the passwordaccess option is set to generate Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt PASsword password gt Parameters password Specifies a 1 to 63 character password A password is not case sensitive Valid characters include Characters Description A Z Any
229. er that contains files you backed up or archived Tivoli Storage Manager assigns a separate file space on the server for each file system at your workstation from which you back up or archive files The file space name is the same as the file system name Querying NAS File Spaces Use the nasnodename option to identify the NAS file server to query When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID Place the nasnodename option in your client system options file dsm sys The value in the client system options file is the default but this value can be overridden on the command line If the nasnodename option is not specified in the client system options file it must Be specified on the command line when processing NAS file systems See LNa for more information Use the class option to specify the class of the object to query To display a list of file spaces belonging to a NAS node use the class nas option Using the default class client will not change the current query filespace behavior See E Class on for more information Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query Filespace J gt lt options Parameters options You can use the fromnode detail class and nasnodename command line options with the filespace command For more information see filespace command See K for more informatio
230. er to overwrite an existing file or hol to prompt you for your selection when you restore or retrieve files El subdir Specifies whether you want to include subdirectories of a named directory El tapeprompt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to wait for a tape required for a restore or retrieve to be mounted or to prompt you for your choice Scheduling Options You can use the following options to regulate central scheduling Tivoli Storage Manager uses scheduling options only when the Scheduler is running Table 23 Scheduling Options Option Description Page El managedservices Specifies the services to be managed by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor maxcmdretries Specifies the maximum number of times the client scheduler attempts to process a scheduled command that fails postschedulecmd Specifies a command to process after running a postnschedulecmd schedule preschedulecmd Specifies a command to process before running a prenschedulecmd schedule queryschedperiod Specifies the number of hours the client scheduler waits between unsuccessful attempts to contact the server for scheduled work El K El El E retryperiod Specifies the number of minutes the client scheduler waits between attempts to process a scheduled command that fails or between unsuccessful attempts to report results to the server El schedcmddisabled Specifies whether to disable the
231. ers pattern Specifies the objects to include for backup or archive processing or to assign a specific management class End the pattern with a file specification Note For NAS file systems You must prefix the NAS node name to the file specification to specify the file server to which the include statement applies If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified refers to the NAS node name specified in the client system options file dsm sys or on the command line If the pattern begins with a single or double quote or contains any embedded blanks or equal signs you must surround the value in either single or double quotation marks The opening and closing quotation marks must be the same type of quotation marks For the include image option the pattern is the name of a mounted file system or raw logical volume mgmtclassname Specifies the name of the management class to assign to the objects If a management class is not specified the default management class is used Examples Options file include home proj text devel include home proj text textfiles include managal include image home include archive home proj text myarchiveclass Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 165 include backup home proj text mybackupclass include compression home proj text devel include encrypt home proj gordon include fs nas netappsj vol vol homemgmtclass include image home ALLI
232. ervices can be used Subject to valid intellectual property or other legally protectable right of Tivoli Systems or IBM any functionally equivalent product program or service can be used instead of the referenced product program or service The evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products except those expressly designated by Tivoli Systems or IBM are the responsibility of the user Tivoli Systems or IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in this document The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to these patents You can send license inquiries in writing to IBM Director of Licensing IBM Corporation North Castle Drive Armonk NY 10504 1785 U S A For license inquiries regarding double byte DBCS information contact the IBM Intellectual Property Department in your country or send inquiries in writing to IBM World Trade Asia Corporation Licensing 2 31 Roppongi 3 chome Minato ku Tokyo 106 Japan The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any other country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or imp
233. es are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client api bin directory The documentation files are installed in opt tivoli tsm client books After installation completes see Ch for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Siorave Manager Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 15 Installing the Linux86 Client Attention For current installation and configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning Tivoli Storage Manager supported platforms and documentation refer to the Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html The following installation options are available in uncompressed packages on the CD tsmcli 1inux86 TIVsm BA Installs the backup archive client command line and GUI administrative client command line and the Web client tsmcli 1inux86 TIVsm API Installs the API If there is a previous unsupported Linux client installed you must uninstall the unsupported Linux client To delete previously installed Tivoli Storage Manager client packages log in as root and enter rpm e TIVsm BA and for the API rpm e TIVsm API Note The package version number is not needed for uninstall Use the following procedure to install the Tivoli Storage Manager clients 1 Log in as the root user and mount the CD ROM to cdro
234. es for individual files Note If you already have the appropriate values set for the subdir replace tapeprompt and quiet options in your client user options file you do not need to include those options in the commands When you enter multiple commands to restore your files you must specify a unique part of the file space in each restore command Be sure you do not use any overlapping file specifications in the commands To display a list of the directories in a file space use the query backup command For example dsmc query backup dirsonly subdir no usr As a general rule you can enter from two to four restore commands at one time The maximum number you can run at one time without degrading performance depends on factors such as how much memory you have and network utilization The speed at which you can restore the files also depends on how many tape drives are available on the server and whether your administrator is using collocation to keep file spaces assigned to as few volumes as possible 76 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide For example if home monnett and home gillis are on the same tape the restore for home gillis must wait until the restore for home monnett is complete However if home stewart is on a different tape and there are at least two tape drives available the restore for home stewart can begin at the same time as the restore for home monnet
235. escription 239 detail 240 dfsbackupmntpnt dfsinclexcl 137 dirme 138 dirsonly 241 domain 60 139 domain image 142 domain nas 143 editor 145 enablelanfree 146 encryptkey 148 errorlogname 150 errorlogretention 151 exclude exclude archive 30 152 exclude backup 30 152 exclude compression 30 152 exclude dir 30 152 exclude encrypt 152 exclude file 30 152 exclude file backup 30 152 exclude fs 30 152 exclude fsnas 152 exclude image 30 152 wildcard characters 33 34 exclude fs 336 filelist 242 filesonly 244 followsymbolic 156 format summary 116 fromdate 245 fromnode 246 136 337 options continued fromowner 247 fromtime 248 groups 157 guitreeviewafterbackup 158 httpport 159 httpsport 160 ifmewer 249 imagetype 161 inactive 250 inclexcl 162 include 163 management class specifying 102 wildcard characters 33 34 include archive 163 include backup 163 include compression 163 include encrypt 163 include file 163 include fs nas 163 include image 163 incrbydate 251 incremental 252 lanfreecommmethod 167 lanfreeshmport 169 lanfreetcpport 170 largecommbuffers 171 latest 253 localbackupset 172 location 254 mailprog 173 managedservices 174 maxcmdretries 176 memoryefficientbackup 177 mode 255 monitor 256 nasnodename_ 178 nfstimeout 179 nodename 180 noprompt 257 numberformat 182 optfile 258 overriding the client options file 231 password 184 passwordaccess 185 passworddir 187 pick 259 pitdate 260 pittim
236. esses exclude fs exclude dir and other include exclude statements first Tivoli Storage Manager then considers any exclude compression statements For example consider the following include exclude list exclude home jones projl exclude compression home jones projl file txt include home jones projl file txt Tivoli Storage Manager examines the statements reading from bottom to top and determines that home jones projl file txt is a candidate for back up 152 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Storage Manager then examines the exclude compression home jones projl file txt statement and determines that it is not a candidate for compression processing e Include exclude compression processing is valid for backup and archive processing only Processing NAS File Systems Use the exclude fs nas option to exclude file systems from Network Attached Storage NAS image backup processing A NAS file system specification uses the following conventions e NAS nodes represent a new node type The NAS node name uniquely identifies a NAS file server and its data to Tivoli Storage Manager You can prefix the NAS node name to the file specification to specify the file server to which the exclude statement applies If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system you specify applies to all NAS file servers e Regardless of the client platform NAS file system specifications use
237. essing Options continued Option Description Page errorlogretention Specifies the number of days to keep log file il entries in the error log and whether to save pruned entries Transaction Processing Options These options control how Tivoli Storage Manager processes transactions between the client and server Table 28 Transaction Processing Options Option Description Page commrestartduration Specifies the maximum number of minutes you T want the client to try to reconnect to a Tivoli Storage Manager server after a communication error occurs commrestartinterval Specifies the number of seconds you want the ibd client to wait between attempts to reconnect to a Tivoli Storage Manager server after a communication error occurs largecommbuffers Specifies whether the client will use increased izil buffers to transfer large amounts of data between the client and the server nfstimeout Specifies the amount of time in seconds Tivoli izd Storage Manager waits for an NFS system call response before timing out resourceutilization Specifies a threshold between 1 and 10 for the maximum number of sessions opened between the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client during processing txnbytelimit Specifies the number of kilobytes Tivoli Storage bod Manager can buffer together in a transaction before sending data to the server Web Client Options The following are options for the Tivoli Storage Ma
238. estore be aware that backup sets can contain data for multiple file spaces If you specify a destination other than the original location data from all file spaces is restored to the location you specify To restore a backup set perform the following steps e Click Restore from the main window The Restore window appears e Locate the Backup Sets directory tree object and expand it To restore the backup set from a local device expand the Local object and the Specify backup set location dialog is displayed On the dialog select File name or Tape name from the dropdown list and then enter the tape or file name location To restore an entire backup set from the server expand the Server object and select the checkbox next to the desired backupset name e Click Restore The Restore Destination window appears Enter the appropriate information Note If the object you want to restore is part of a backup set generated on a node and the node name is changed on the server any backup set objects that were generated prior to the name change will not match the new node name Ensure that the node name is the same as the node for which the backup set was generated e Click on Restore The Task List window displays the restore processing status Note To enable the GUI client to restore a backup set on an attached device on a UNIX standalone workstation without requiring a server connection use the localbackupset option See a for more
239. estore or retrieve data At the prompt you can wait for the appropriate tape to be mounted always wait for a tape to be mounted skip a particular object skip all objects on a single tape skip all objects on all tapes or cancel the entire operation Examples Options file tapeprompt yes Command line tapep yes This option is valid on the initial command line and in interactive mode 212 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tcpbuffsize Authorized User The tcpbuffsize option specifies the size of the internal TCP IP communication buffer Although it uses more memory a larger buffer can improve communication performance Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TCPBuffsize Ze pa Parameters size Specifies the size in kilobytes that you want to use for the internal TCP IP communication buffer The range of values is 1 through 512 the default is 31 Depending on the operating system communication settings your system might not accept all values in the range of 1 through 512 Examples Options file tcpb 2 Command line tcpbuffsize 31 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 213 Tcpclientad
240. estore starts a session for each tape up to the number your administrator configures See 95 for more information Consistent Client Return Codes Reliable consistent and documented return codes have been added to the command line client and the scheduler This facilitates automation of client operations via user written scripts By using the QUERY EVENT command with the FORMAT DETAILED option administrators can now distinguish between scheduled backups that completed successfully with no skipped files and scheduled backups that completed successfully with one or more skipped files Also if you use the processing optionpreschedulecmd to run a command and that command returns a non zero return code the scheduled event will not run This ensures that scheduled events_will not run if prerequisite commands do not complete successfully See Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager The Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive client helps you protect information on your workstation Using Tivoli Storage Manager you can maintain backup versions of your workstation files that you can restore if the original files are damaged or lost You can also archive workstation files that you do not currently need preserve them in their current state and retrieve them when necessary You can access Tivoli Storage Manager backup and archive features e Locall
241. excl statements are permitted However you must specify this option for each include exclude file Ensure that you store your include exclude options file in a directory to which all users have read access Ensure that your include exclude options file is stored in a directory such as etc When processing occurs the include exclude statements within the include exclude file are placed in the list position occupied by the inclexcl option in the same order and processed accordingly If you have the HSM client installed on your workstation you can use an include exclude options file to exclude files from backup and space management from backup only or from space management only For more information about creating an include exclude options file see Creating Q Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax INCLExcl filespec Parameters filespec Specifies the path and file name of one include exclude options file Examples Options file inclexcl usr dsm backup excl inclexcl etc inclexcl def Command line Does not apply 162 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Include Options Authorized User The include options specify one of the following e Objects within a broad group of excluded objects that yo
242. exclude statements within the include exclude file are placed at the position occupied by the inclexcl option in dsm sys in the same order and processed accordingly See Inclexcl on page 164 for detailed information about specifying an include exclude file using the inclexcl option You can use one of the following methods to create an include exclude list or specify an include exclude file 1 From the client GUI open the Edit menu and select Preferences Then in the Preferences dialog click the Include Exclude category 2 From the client GUI open the Utilities menu and select Setup Wizard You can create an include exclude list by performing the following steps 1 Determine your include and exclude requirements Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager 29 2 Locate the server stanza in your client system options file dsm sys Note Each server stanza must have its own include exclude list 3 Enter your include and exclude statements using the appropriate include exclude options as described in g Because Tivoli Storage Manager processes your include exclude list from the bottom of the list up it is important to enter all your include exclude statements in the proper order For example in the following include exclude list the includefile txt file is not backed up include home usr includefile txt exclude home usr However in the following include exclude list the includefile txt file is backe
243. f all our publications from the IBM Direct Publications Catalog Web site at the following Web page http www elink ibmlink ibm com pb1 pb xvi Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Summary of Changes for Tivoli Storage Manager This section summarizes changes made to the Tivoli Storage Manager product and this publication Technical Changes for Version 5 1 April 2002 Following is a summary of changes since Tivoli Storage Manager Version 4 2 Support for Cyclical Redundancy Checking CRC Tivoli Storage Manager supports cyclical redundancy checking CRC to verify that data is not being corrupted in transfer during a backup or restore session Support for Processing Network Attached Storage NAS File System Images Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup and restore of network attached storage NAS file system images to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to NAS file servers Data Protection for NDMP enables backup and restore support on the Tivoli Storage Manager Windows NT 2000 XP and Windows NET AIX and Solaris servers for NAS file servers from Network Appliance Data Protection for NDMP is available only with IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition See Data Protection for NDME up and restore NAS file system images using the Web client and command line client Support for Logical Volume Backup as a Single Object Image Backup on Linux86 Clien
244. f objects updated These are files whose attributes such as file owner or file permissions have changed e Total number of objects rebound See g I for more information e Total number of objects deleted This is a count of the objects deleted from the client workstation after being successfully backed up to the server The count is zero for all backup commands e Total number of objects expired See for more information e Total number of objects failed Objects can fail for several reasons Check the dsmerror log for details e Data transfer time The total time to transfer data across the network Transfer statistics may not match the file statistics if the operation was retried due to a communications failure or session loss The transfer statistics display the bytes attempted to be transferred across all command attempts Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 61 Network data transfer rate The average rate at which the network transfers data between the client and the server This is calculated by dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the time to transfer the data over the network The time it takes to process objects is not included in the network transfer rate Therefore the network transfer rate is higher than the aggregate transfer rate Aggregate data transfer rate The average rate at which Tivoli Storage Manager and the network transfer data between the client and the server This is calculated by
245. f the client scheduler has not yet backed up a file never connected to the server or failed before backing up a file Use this option only when the scheduler is running Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Your administrator can also set this option If your administrator specifies a value for this option that value overrides what you specify in the client options file after your client node successfully contacts the server Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt MAXCMDRetries maxcmdretries gt lt Parameters maxcmdretries Specifies the number of times the client scheduler can attempt to process a scheduled command that fails The range of values is zero through 9999 the default is 2 Examples Options file maxcmdr 4 Command line maxcmdretries 3 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 176 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Memoryefficientbackup The memoryefficientbackup option specifies a memory conserving algorithm for processing incremental backups that backs up one directory at a time using less memory Use this option with the incremental command when your workstation is memory constrained Note The server can also define this option
246. fer time could be longer or shorter than the estimate due to factors like network traffic system load on your workstation or system load on the server Since the Estimated Transfer Time is based on previous backup transfer rates you must run at least one backup operation first Note that the estimate function does not take into account whether or not files are excluded from backup The assumption made by the estimation algorithm is that all the files selected will be sent to the server The Estimated Transfer Time field reads N A if no files are sent to or from the current server Note During installation Tivoli Storage Manager creates the adsmrc file to record statistics from the backup archive client estimate function The adsmrc file resides in the directory named in the HOME environment variable Backing Up Data Using the GUI You can back up specific files a group of files with similar names or entire directories You can locate the files you want to back up by searching or filtering Filtering displays only the files matching the filter criteria for your backup 1 Click Backup files and directories from the main window The Backup window appears 2 Expand the directory tree Click on the selection boxes next to the object or objects you want to back up To search or filter files click the Search icon on the tool bar To search a Enter your search criteria in the Find Files Backup window b Click the Search butto
247. file or group of files from archive services fsa include These options are equivalent Use these options to include haa include archive files or assign management classes for archive processing Image Processing Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager 31 Table 7 Options for Controlling Backup Archive and Image Processing continued Option Description Page exclude image exclude fs nas Excludes mounted file systems and raw logical volumes that match the pattern from image processing This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Solaris and Linux86 Excludes file systems on the NAS filer from an image backup when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified applies to all NAS filers The backup nas command ignores all other exclude statements including exclude fs and exclude dir statements This option is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only include image Includes a file space or logical volume assigns a management class or allows you to assign one of several image backup processing options to a specific logical volume when used with the backup image command The backup image command ignores all other include options This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Solaris and Linux86 only include fs nas Assigns a management class when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identifi
248. file systems belonging to a Network Attached Storage NAS file server If you specify monitor yes Tivoli Storage Manager monitors the current NAS image backup or restore operation and displays processing information on your screen This is the default If you specify monitor no Tivoli Storage Manager does not monitor the current NAS image backup or restore operation and is available to process the next command Use this option with the backup nas and restore nas commands Supported Clients This option is valid for the AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only clients Syntax Yes gt gt MONi tor gt lt LNo _ Parameters Yes Specifies that you want to monitor the current NAS image backup or restore operation and display processing information on your screen This is the default No Specifies that you do not want to monitor the current NAS image backup or restore operation Examples Command line backup nas mode full nasnodename nasl monitor yes vol vol0 vol voll 256 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Noprompt The noprompt option suppresses the confirmation prompt that normally appears before you delete an archived file or when performing an image restore operation Using this option can speed up the delete procedure However it also increases the danger of accidentally deleting an archived file that you want to save Use this option with caut
249. files If you also lose the file system that contains the operating system and communication software you must recover them before you can connect to the server 82 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide To protect yourself against these kinds of losses you need to put together a set of installation media that you can use to restore your system to a state that lets you contact the server and begin recovering data The installation media should contain 1 A bootable operating system that lets you perform basic functions 2 Acorrectly configured communication program that lets you establish communications with the server 3 A client with appropriate customized options files You can use the command line client to complete this task The communication package you use determines what files you need Consult your operating system and communication software manuals to set up your installation media If you also have the Tivoli Space Manager installed on your workstation your installation media should include the space manager command line client For information about restoring migrated files see Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients GC32 0794 Note Your administrator can schedule restore operations which can be very useful when you need to restore a large number of files Deleting File Spaces Authorized User If your Tivoli Storage Manager a
250. following in your client options file domain home usr datasave and the following on the command line dsmc incremental domain fsl fs2 Tivoli Storage Manager performs an incremental backup for your home usr datasave fs1 and fs2 file systems If you use both a file specification and the domain option with the incremental command Tivoli Storage Manager ignores the domain option and processes only those file systems that you specify in the file specification For example if you enter dsmc incremental fs1 fs2 domain fs3 fs4 Tivoli Storage Manager performs an incremental backup for the fs1 and fs2 file systems only Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 139 Attention If you are running GPFS for AIX in a multi node cluster and all nodes share a mounted GPFS file system Tivoli Storage Manager processes this file system as a local file system Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the file system on each node during an incremental backup To avoid this you can do one of the following e Explicitly configure the domain statement in the client system options file to list the file systems you want that node to back up e Set the exclude fs option in the client system options file to exclude the GPFS file system from backup services Automounted File Systems When performing a backup with the domain option set to all local files handled by automounter and loopback file systems are not backed up When performing
251. for a file name type certreq txt Press x from the Key Menu to return to the Key Ring Menu Receiving the Certificate into the Key Ring To receive the certificate into the key ring 1 7 Press r from the Key Ring Menu Enter certreq txt which is the filename of the certificate If you receive a warning about the certificate being self signed enter yes to add it to the key file Press w to work with the certificate Press to list and select the certificate Press n to navigate down the list until you find TSM Web Client and press s to select it Press f to make the certificate the default certificate Press y when prompted are you sure you want to make this key the default Press x to return to the Key Ring Menu Press s to save the Key Ring You may be prompted if the file already exists it is OK to overwrite this file Press x to exit MKKFE Configuring Web Client for SSL After the certificate is created and received into the key ring file copy the key ring file certkey kyr to the client installation directory Before bringing up the TSM Client Acceptor set the httpsport option The httpsport option specifies the TCP IP port address that is used by the HTTPS secure socket layer SSL interface to communicate with the Web client See 60 for more information Set the NLSPATH environment variable as follows For AIX AIX 5L Export NLSPATH from the shell or add to your profile for example export
252. for the location of the dsm sys smp file for your UNIX client The client system options file dsm sys file is used to specify one or more servers to contact for services and communications options for each server It can also include authorization options backup and archive processing options scheduling options and HSM space management options If you are a root user or authorized user copy the dsm sys smp file to dsm sys It is assumed that the dsm sys file is controlled by the system administrator Attention If you are reinstalling and you want to keep your existing dsm sys file intact do not copy the dsm sys smp file to dsm sys Edit dsm sys to include the server or servers to which you want to connect The following is an example of a client system options file stanza which contains the required options for a server you want users to contact You can specify options for more than one server Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 25 Servername server_a COMMmethod TCPip TCPPort 1500 TCPServeraddress almvmd almaden ibm com Note If you are installing the Web client you must also specify the passwordaccess generate option See information Required options for each server stanza are servername Specify the name you want to assign to a server to contact for services for example server_a See commmethod Specifies the communication method you use to provide connectivity for client server communication If you do not speci
253. form an incremental backup these backup versions are expired If you exclude a directory that was previously included Tivoli Storage Manager marks existing backup versions of the files and directories beneath it inactive during the next incremental backup Use this option to exclude a portion of your data in which no underlying files need to be backed up The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Controlling Backup Archive and Image Processing After Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates all exclude fs and exclude dir statements the following options are evaluated against the remaining list of objects available for processing If you exclude an object that was previously included Tivoli Storage Manager marks existing backup versions inactive during the next incremental backup Table 7 Options for Controlling Backup Archive and Image Processing Option Description Page Backup Processing exclude These options are equivalent Use these options to exclude 52 exclude backup a file or group of files from backup services and space exclude file management services if the HSM client is installed exclude file backup The exclude backup option only excludes files from normal backup but not from HSM include These options are equivalent Use these options to include heal include backup files or assign management classes for backup include file processing Archive Processing exclude archive Excludes a
254. formation Technology Vocabulary developed by Subcommittee 1 Joint Technical Committee 1 of the International Organization for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission ISO IEC JTC2 SC1 A absolute A copy group mode value that indicates a file is considered for incremental backup even though the file has not changed since the last time it was backed up See mode Contrast with modified access control list ACL 1 In computer security a collection of all access rights for one object 2 In computer security a list associated with an object that identifies all the subjects that can access the object and their access rights for example a list associated with a file that identifies users who can access the file and identifies their access rights to that file ACL access control list active policy set The policy set within a policy domain that contains the most recently activated policy All client nodes assigned to the current policy domain use this policy set See policy set active version The most recent backup copy of a file stored in Tivoli Storage Manager storage for a file that currently exists on a file server or workstation An active version remains active and exempt from deletion until e Replaced by a new backup version e Tivoli Storage Manager detects during an incremental backup that the user has deleted the original file from a file server or workstation administrative client A progra
255. from Earlier Versions Upgrade Path for Clients and Servers As part of a migration plan from Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 to Tivoli Storage Manager version 5 1 Tivoli Storage Manager clients and servers may be upgraded at different times To help ensure that you can continue your backup and archive activities during the migration note the following e A Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 client can perform backup restore archive and retrieve functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager version 5 1 server e A Tivoli Storage Manager version 5 1 client can perform backup restore archive retrieve and query functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 server Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 1 e A Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 HSM client can perform migrate and recall functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5 1 server e A Tivoli Storage Manager version 5 1 HSM client can perform migrate and recall functions to a Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 server e Data that has been backed up archived or migrated from a Tivoli Storage Manager version 5 1 client to any Tivoli Storage Manager server cannot be restored retrieved or recalled using a Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 1 or lower level client e All command line administrative clients can administer Tivoli Storage Manager version 4 2 and version 5 1 servers e Storage agents and servers must be at the same level of code When the server is upgraded the sto
256. from the CD ROM e Create client images to install e Transfer installable files from the CD ROM to a target workstation Online Startup Information You can display online startup information product manuals and readmes On a Web browser 1 Click File and then click Open File 2 Select the CD ROM drive 3 Select the START HTM file Installing the Backup Archive Client This chapter provides instructions to install and set up Tivoli Storage Manager UNIX clients Note A root user must install Tivoli Storage Manager on a UNIX workstation After installation completes see Cha for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Clore Manager able 4 lists the supported UNIX clients and the location of the installation instructions for each client Table 4 UNIX Client Installation Reference Installation Instructions Page E E E SI E For information on Installing the OS 390 UNIX System Services Client see the following publications e Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 Edition Backup Archive Client 5698 TSM order number GI10 4541 Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 Backup Archive Client 5697 TS9 order number GI10 4542 Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 API 5698 TSM order number GI10 4539 Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 API 5697 TS9 order number GI10 4540 EJ Chapter
257. fy commmethod it defaults to TCP IP See 85 for more tcpport Specifies a TCP IP port address for a server You can obtain this address from your administrator If you do not specify tepport it default to 1500 See Meppart an page 217 for more information tcpserveraddress Specifies the TCP IP address for a server You can obtain this address from your administrator See amp for more information Your client system options file dsm sys can also include options to control backup and archive processing authorization of stored files and scheduling of tasks See 2 ag for options that are supported on your platform their possible values and the syntactic rules for using them 3 09 for communication protocols As the default your client node contacts the first server identified in the client system options file dsm sys You can specify a different server to contact by entering the servername option in your own client user options file dsm opt or by entering that option with a command You can also specify a default server and a migration server if you have the Tivoli Space Manager client installed on your workstation in your client system options file dsm sys For more information see Defa Creating a Default Client User Options File Optional Root User or Authorized User Task The product installer placels a sample client user options file called dsm opt smp into the default installation
258. g command and include the package name For example to install the backup archive client enter pkgadd d cdrom tsmcli solaris TIVsmCapi pkg TIVsmCapi pkgadd d cdrom tsmcli solaris TIVsmCba pkg TIVsmCba Note The Backup archive client needs the API for Raw Logical Volume backup so the API must be installed before the client 3 If you want to install the documentation enter pkgadd d cdrom tsmcli solaris TIVsmCdoc pkg TIVsmCdoc 4 Answer Yes y to all questions during installation Note To display the Tivoli Storage Manager help browser menus in your locale language ensure the NLSPATH environment variable in the etc profile file contains the following path usr dt 1ib n1s msg L N cat During installation e The Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive and Web client files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client ba bin directory e The TSM administrative client command line is installed in the opt tivoli tsm client admin bin directory e The Tivoli Storage Manager API files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client api bin directory Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 21 e The TSM documentation files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client books directory After installation completes see Chapte for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Storage Manager 22 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide The Tivoli Storage Man
259. g in prompted mode across a firewall Use the client scheduler in polling mode across a firewall After you start the client scheduler it continues to run and to start scheduled events until you press Ctrl C stop the scheduler process with the UNIX kill command start the workstation again or turn off the workstation to end it Note You cannot enter this command in interactive mode Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt SCHedule gt lt L spi Parameters options You can use these common options maxcmdretries password queryschedperiod retryperiod schedlogname schedmode and tcpclientport See g g ge 107 for more information Examples Task For AIX AIX 5L Start the scheduler at system bootup time by entering this command in the etc inittab file Ensure the passwordaccess option is set to generate Command tsm once usr Ipp adsm bin dsmc sched gt dev null 2 gt amp 1 TSM Scheduler Task Interactively start the scheduler and keep it running in the background Command nohup dsmc sched 2 gt dev null amp Chapter 11 Using Commands 327 When you run the schedule command all messages regarding scheduled work are sent to a file called dsmsched 1og or to an alternate file you specify with the schedlogname option in your client user options file dsm opt If you do not specify a directory path with the file name in the schedlogname option the dsmsched 1og file wil
260. ges from the Web browser the first time you connect to the client machine This is because the certificate that you created is not trusted by the browser Each browser handles the matter differently Netscape permits you to receive the certificate as a Web site certificate The received certificate is then compared with the certificate sent by the client every time you connect to the server After setup completes you are not prompted for more information if you click the Always accept bullet in the wizard Internet Explorer prompts you if the received certificate is not trusted You will receive this message every time you connect to the client unless you turn the warning message off Appendix D Web Client Secure Socket Layer 355 356 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Notices This information was developed for products and services offered in the U S A IBM may not offer the products services or features discussed in this document in other countries Consult your local IBM representative for information on the products and services currently available in your area Notices References in this publication to Tivoli Systems or IBM products programs or services do not imply that they will be available in all countries in which Tivoli Systems or IBM operates Any reference to these products programs or services is not intended to imply that only Tivoli Systems or IBM products programs or s
261. he hard linked files was on your workstation when you restore both files they will be hard linked together The one exception to this procedure occurs if you back up two files that are hard linked together and then break the connection between them on your workstation The two files then contain separate data files If you restore the two files from the server Tivoli Storage Manager will respect the current file system and not restore the hard link Problems can occur if you back up only one file of a set of hard linked files For example files texta and textb are hard linked to each other You back up texta then edit textb and make some changes If you restore texta the changes you made to textb will be lost To ensure that hard linked files remain synchronized always back up all hard links at the same time and restore those same files together Understanding How NFS Hard and Soft Mounts are Handled When Tivoli Storage Manager connects a backup archive client to an NFS file system you can use either a hard mount or a soft mount Tivoli Storage Manager uses the nfstimeout option setting to determine how long to wait for an NFS system call to respond before timing out this applies to hard and soft mounts The default is 10 seconds You should be aware of the consequences of hard and soft mounts if the mount becomes stale for example if the server for the file system is not available Hard mount If the NFS file system
262. he symbolic link For more information on eas symbolic links are handled during an archive operation see 68 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Incremental backup When you run an incremental backup Tivoli Storage Manager backs up only the path information to a file or directory to which a symbolic link points The contents of the file or the contents of files in the directory are not backed up Selective backup When you run a selective backup on a symbolic link that points to a file Tivoli Storage Manager backs up only the path information to that file The contents of the file are not backed up Restore When you restore a symbolic link that originally pointed to a file the symbolic link is restored whether or not the file it points to still exists If you restore a symbolic link that originally pointed to a directory e Without the files in the directory for example home gillis symdir and the symbolic link does not exist on your file system nothing is returned e Along with the files in the directory for example home gillis symdir and the symbolic link does not exist on your file system Tivoli Storage Manager builds the directory on your workstation and puts the files in that directory If the subdir option is set to yes Tivoli Storage Manager recursively restores all subdirectories of the directory e And the symbolic link already exists on your work
263. he client node of the user to whom you are giving access Use wildcards to give access to more than one node with similar node names Use an asterisk to give access to all nodes user This is an optional parameter that restricts access to the named user at the specified node options See IChapte ng Pro g age 107 for information about common options that you can use with this command Examples Task Give the user at node_2 authority to restore the budget file from the home user directory Command set access backup home user budget node_2 Task Give node_3 authority to retrieve all files in the home devel proja directory whose file names end with c Command set access archive home devel proja c node 3 Task Give node_3 the authority to retrieve all files in the home devel proja directory Command set ac archive home devel proja node 3 Task Give all nodes whose names end with bldgb the authority to restore all backup versions from directories with a file space name of project Command set ac b project bldgb Task Give user serena at node_5 authority to restore all images of the file space mounted on directory home devel proja Command set acc backup home devel proja node_5 serena 332 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Set Password Authorized User The set password command changes the Tivoli Storage Manager password for your wor
264. he client to receive the quoted object name In loop mode surround such objects in either single quotes or double quotes You can enter the entire option name or its abbreviation For information about how to read the syntax diagrams see Reading Entering Options with a Command Follow these general rules to enter options with a command e Enter options before or after command parameters For example you can enter the subdir option before or after a file specification dsmc selective subdir yes home devel projl dsmc selective home devel projl subdir yes e When entering several options on a command separate each with a blank space e Enclose the value in quotes if the option value that you enter contains a blank space For example dsmc archive description Project A home devel projl e Any option that you enter on the command line with the exception of domain overrides the value set in the client options file When you use the domain 120 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide option with the incremental command it adds to the domain specified in your client options file rather than overriding the current value The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum combined length of the file name and path name is 1024 characters Client Options Reference The following sections contain detailed information abou
265. he server volinformation Backs up or restores volume archive Red restrictions such as volume or disk incremental space restrictions and trustee directory selective assignments for the root directory of a volume Command Line Options Reference The following sections contain detailed information about each of the Tivoli Storage Manager command line options These options are arranged in alphabetical order Information for each option includes e A description of the option e A syntax diagram of the option The option name is shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase characters The uppercase characters indicate the minimum abbreviation you can use for the option name See for an explanation of these diagrams 234 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide e Detailed descriptions of the option parameters If the parameter is a constant a value that does not change the minimum abbreviation is shown in uppercase letters e Examples of using the option on the command line Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 235 Archmc The archmc option specifies the available management class for your policy domain to which you want to bind your archived files Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt ARCHMc managementclass gt lt Parameters
266. hedmode option or when the schedule command is running Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TCPCLIENTPort client_port_address gt lt Parameters client_port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address you want the server to use to contact your client node The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1501 Examples Options file tcpclientp 1502 Command line tcpclientport 1492 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 215 Tcpnodelay Authorized User Note This option is for AIX and AIX 5L clients only All other UNIX clients buffer small transactions before sending them to the server The tcpnodelay specifies whether to send small transactions to the server without buffering them first A small transaction is smaller than the byte limit set with the txnbytelimit option Specifying tcpnodelay yes might improve performance in higher speed networks Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX and AIX 5L clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax No gt gt TCPNodelay A gt lt LYes Parameters No Do not send small transactions without buffering
267. his option Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt AUTOMount filespacename gt lt Parameters filespacename Specifies one or more automounted file systems that are mounted and added into the domain Examples Options file automount fsl fs2 Command line Does not apply 124 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Changingretries Authorized User The changingretries option specifies how many additional times you want the client to attempt to back up or archive a file that is in use Use this option with the archive incremental and selective commands Use this option only when serialization an attribute in a management class copy group is shared static or shared dynamic With shared static serialization if a file is open during an operation the operation repeats the number of times that you specify If the file is open during each attempt the operation does not complete With shared dynamic serialization if a file is open during an operation the operation repeats the number of times that you specify The backup or archive occurs during the last attempt whether the file is open or not Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option
268. hive or migrated copies system drive or partition On Windows NT the drive or partition on which Windows NT is installed 7 TCA Trusted Communications Agent TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol 366 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide timeout A time event involving e An event that happens at the end of a predetermined period of time that began at the happening of another specified event A time interval allotted for certain operations to happen For example response to polling or addressing before system operation is interrupted and must be restarted e A terminal feature that logs off a user if an entry is not made within a specified period of time Tivoli Storage Manager A client server licensed program product that provides storage management and data access services to customers in a multivendor computer environment Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP A standard set of communication protocols that supports peer to peer connectivity of functions for both local and wide area networks Trusted Communications Agent TCA UNIX A program that can handle the sign on password protocol when password access is generated The main process for example dsm dsmc makes a run time decision based on the password access option setting the user ID and the executables access privileges to run this program The file that contains this prog
269. hive Clients Installation and User s Guide Appendix C Backing Up NAS File Systems Using NDMP Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup and restore of network attached storage NAS file system images to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to NAS file servers Data Protection for NDMP enables backup and restore support on the Tivoli Storage Manager Windows NT 2000 XP and Windows NET AIX and Solaris servers for NAS file servers from Network Appliance Data Protection for NDMP is available only with IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition For information on how to configure Data Protection for NDMP on the Tivoli Storage Manager server see the following publications e Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Administrator s Guide GC32 0768 e Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Administrator s Guide GC32 0778 e Tivoli Storage Manager for Windows Administrator s Guide GC32 0782 NDM SSUES for lien and server ee and citar eee After configuring Data Protection for NDMP the server connects to the NAS device and uses NDMP to initiate control and monitor each backup and restore operation The NAS device performs outboard data transfer to and from the NAS file system to a locally attached tape drive or library It is not necessary for a client node to mount a NAS file system to perform backup or restore operations on that file system The benefits of performing backups using Data Protection for NDMP include the
270. i Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys or the client user options file dsm opt Use this option with dsmafs and dsmcafs Syntax Yes gt gt AFSBackupmntpnt gt lt LNo Parameters Yes Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager views all AFS mount points as mount points and backs up only the mount point information for any mount point it encounters during a backup operation This is the default No Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager views all AFS mount points as directories and backs up the contents of files and subdirectories of any mount point it encounters during a backup operation Examples Options file afsbackupmntpnt no 122 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Archsymlinkasfile The archsymlinkasfile option specifies whether Tivoli Storage Manager follows a symbolic link and archives the file or directory it points to or archives the symbolic link only Use this option with the archive command Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients The server can also define this option Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt Syntax Yes gt gt ARCHSYMLinkasfile 7 LNo _ Parameters Yes Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager follows a symbolic link and archives the associated file or directo
271. i bin lang where lang is the language identifier Note The AIX 5L client does not support the AFS DFS backup archive client This installation procedure is designed to install directly from the CD ROM from a local or remote mounted CD ROM drive If you are installing from a Tivoli Storage Manager image run the following command from the directory to which you copied the Tivoli Storage Manager image usr sbin inutoc usr sys inst images A toc file is created in that directory 12 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Attention Do not put any user created files into usr tivoli tsm client ba bin the base directory into which the product is installed Any and all files in this directory might be deleted during installation processing Include exclude files dsm opt and dsm sys files should not reside in this directory When upgrading from ADSM version 3 1 to a later client version you should consider the following e The dsmsched log and dsmerror log files are not moved or copied from the old installation directory to the new installation directory e The ADSM version 3 1 installation directory usr 1pp adsm bin is not removed e The ADSM version 3 1 publications are not removed e ADSM version 3 1 filesets such as adsm client aix42 admin lpp are not removed To install Tivoli Storage Manager from the CD ROM 1 Log in as the root user insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM dri
272. ice backup Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only Syntax For non NAS objects Selective gt gt MODE gt lt _Incremental For NAS File Systems differential gt gt MODE gt lt full Parameters selective Specifies that you want to perform a full selective image backup This is the default incremental Specifies that you want to back up only new and changed files after the last full image backup Deleted files are not inactivated on the server full Specifies that you want to perform a NAS image backup of an entire file system differential Specifies that you want to perform a NAS image backup of files that changed since the last full image backup If an eligible full image backup does not exist a full image backup occurs This is the default Examples Task Perform the NAS image backup of the entire file system Command dsmc backup nas mode full nasnodename nasl vol vold vol voll Task Back up the home test file space using an image incremental backup that backs up only new and changed files after the last full image backup Command dsmc backup image home test mode incremental Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 255 Monitor The monitor option specifies whether you want to monitor an image backup or restore of one or more
273. ices A root user is always authorized to request services Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax v p gt _GRoups groupname gt lt Parameters groupname Specifies the name of a group you want to authorize to request Tivoli Storage Manager services Examples Options file groups dsmcdev groupl testl test2 designl groups endicott almaden qadev qadevl tools23 Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 157 Guitreeviewafterbackup The guitreeviewafterbackup option specifies whether the client returns to the Backup Restore Archive or Retrieve window after a successful operation completes Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt or the client system options file dsm sys Syntax No gt gt GUITREEViewafterbackup gt lt _Yes Parameters No Returns you to the Tivoli Storage Manager main window after a successful operation completes This is the default Yes Returns you to the Backup Restore Archive or Retrieve window after a successful operation completes Examples Options file guitreeviewafterbackup yes Command line Does not apply 158 Tivoli Storage Ma
274. ich file information is returned When you use pitdate and pittime with the restore command the date and time values you specify establish the point in time for which files are returned If you specify pitdate without a pittime value pittime defaults to 23 59 59 If you specify pittime without a pitdate value it is ignored Restoring an Image You can use the following procedure to restore an image of your file system or raw logical volume 1 Click Restore from the main window The Restore window appears 2 Expand the directory tree 3 Locate the object in the tree named Image and expand it Click the selection box next to the image you want to restore 4 To modify specific restore options click the Options button located to the right of the Estimate button Any options you change are effective during the current session only 5 Click Restore The Restore Destination window appears The image can be restored to the volume with the drive letter or mount point from which it was originally backed up Alternatively a different volume can be chosen for the restore location 6 Click the Restore button to begin the restore The Task List window appears showing the progress of the restore The Restore Report window displays a detailed status report When performing an image restore consider the following e Restoring the image of a volume will restore the volume to the same state that it was in when you performed your last image ba
275. ide a firewall 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax POLling gt gt SCHEDMODe gt lt PRompted Parameters POlling The client scheduler queries the server for scheduled work at prescribed time intervals This is the default You can set the time intervals using the queryschedperiod option PRompted The client scheduler waits for the server to contact your client node when scheduled work needs to be done 202 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file schedmode prompted Command line schedmod po This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 203 Scrolllines The scrolllines option specifies the number of lines of information that display on your screen at one time Use this option when you set the scrollprompt option to Yes and you use commands Use the scrollprompt option with all query commands except the following e query mgmtclass e query schedule e query session e query inclexcl Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File
276. ieving Files 85 Archiving Files 85 Estimating Backup Processing Time 85 Performing a GUI Archive 85 Performing a Command Line Archive 86 Deleting Archived Files 86 Archive Advanced Considerations 87 Retrieving Archives 88 Performing a GUI Retrieve 88 Performing a Command Line Retiave 89 Understanding How Your Archives are Managed 89 Chapter 7 Automating Tasks 91 Specifying Scheduling Options 91 Return Codes from the Command Line Interface 91 Managing the Client Scheduler Using the Client Acceptor Daemon 93 Configuring the CAD to Manage the Scheduler 93 Starting the Client Scheduler v a 93 Displaying Information about Scheduled Work 94 Displaying Information about Completed Work 95 Scheduling Options for Commands 96 Enabling Disabling Scheduled Commands 96 Chapter 8 Understanding iol Management Policies 97 Using Policy Domains and Policy Sets 97 Using Management Classes and Copy Groups 97 Displaying Information about Management Classes and Copy Groups 99 Copy Group Name 99 Copy Type 99 Copy Frequency 99 Versions Data Exists 100 Versions Data Deleted 100 Retain Extra Versions 100 Retain Only Version 100 Copy Serialization 100 Copy Mode s c s s sos a a 101 Copy Destination 101 Retain Versions ee 4 O02 Selecting a Managem
277. ile 2 If the Tivoli Storage Manager server name changes or Tivoli Storage Manager clients are directed to a different Tivoli Storage Manager server all clients will need to have a new password initialized for the new server name Supported Clients This option is for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in both the client options file dsm opt and the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt SErvername servername gt lt Parameters servername In your client system options file dsm sys specify the name you want to assign to a particular server In your client user options file dsm opt or on the 206 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide command line specify the name of the server you want to contact for backup archive services A server name is not case sensitive it can have up to 64 characters Examples Options file servername server_a Command line se server_b This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 207 Shmport Authorized User UNIX requires access authority The shmport option specifies the TCP IP port address that the server is listening on to establish a shared memory connection To use shared memory TCP IP must be installed on your workstation Note The value specified for the shmport option in the client system options file
278. ile you boo monitor process query access Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 specify Displays a list of current NAS backup and restore processes You can then select one process to monitor Displays a list of current authorization rules El 3 271 Table 33 Commands continued Command Description query archive Displays a list of archived files query backup Displays a list of backup versions query backupset Queries a backup set from the server or a local file A backup set can also be queried from a tape device BJ ggg query filespace Displays a list of file spaces in Tivoli Storage Manager storage a query image Displays information regarding backed up images query inclexcl query mgmtclass Displays a list of include exclude statements in the order in which they are processed during backup and archive operations Displays information about available management classes g query node Displays all the nodes for which a particular administrative user ID has authority to perform operations The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web El El query restore Displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database query schedule Displays information about scheduled even
279. iles and Directories 69 Table 13 Symbolic Link Management Table for Backup and Restore continued Function Action Taken Restore a symbolic link that points to a file The symbolic link is restored regardless of whether the file the symbolic link points to still exists Restore a symbolic link that points to a directory The symbolic link is restored regardless of whether the directory the symbolic link points to still exists Restore a symbolic link that points to a directory with subdir yes the directory still exists The symbolic link and files in the directory and subdirectories are restored Restore a symbolic link that points to a directory with subdir yes the directory and symbolic link no longer exist A directory is created in the directory in which the symbolic link resides and all files and subdirectories are restored to that directory the symbolic link name is used as the new directory name Understanding How Hard Links are Handled When you back up a file that is hard linked to another file Tivoli Storage Manager stores both the link information and the data file on the server If you back up two files that are hard linked to each other Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the link information and only one copy of the data file When you restore a hard linked file Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to reestablish the links For example if you had a hard linked pair of files and only one of t
280. in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt CHAngingretries numberretries gt lt Parameters numberretries Specifies the number of times a backup or archive operation is attempted if the file is in use The range of values is zero through 4 the default is 4 Examples Options file changingretries 3 Command line cha 0 Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 125 Clusternode The clusternode option specifies whether Tivoli Storage Manager participates in a High Availability Cluster Multi Processing HACMP environment For information on how to confi x Dackiup Archive Supported Clients This option is valid for the AIX 4 3 3 or later client only Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt CLUSTERnode A gt lt Yes Parameters Yes Specifies that you want to back up cluster resources and participate in cluster failover for high availability No Specifies that you do not want the Tivoli Storage Manager client to participate in cluster failover Examples Options file cluster no Command line cluster yes This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 126 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Commmethod Authorized User The commmethod option specifies the communication method you use to provide connectivity for c
281. incrbydate option If you specify a file system specify the file system without a trailing slash Examples Task Run an incremental backup of the default client domain specified in your client user options file dsm opt Command Incremental Task Run an incremental backup for the home usr and proj file systems 296 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Task Task Task Task Task Task Command Incremental home usr proj Run an incremental backup for the proj test directory Command Incremental proj test Run an incremental by date backup for the home file system Command Incremental incrbydate home Run an incremental backup of all files in the fs dir1 directory that begin with the string abc Command Incremental subdir yes fs dirl abc Run an incremental backup of the abc file in the fs dirl directory Command Incremental subdir yes fs dirl abc Run an incremental backup of the directory object fs dir1 but not any of the files in the fs dir1 directory Command Incremental fs dirl Run an incremental backup of the directory object fs dirl and all of the files in the fs dirl1 directory Command Incremental subdir yes fs dirl Chapter 11 Using Commands 297 Loop The loop command starts an interactive command line session that is maintained until you enter quit In an interactive command line session it is unnecessary t
282. incremental file system backups will invalidate an image that you made e To modify specific backup options click the Options button located to the right of the Estimate button The options you select are effective during the current session only e If you want to estimate the amount of time it takes to process your files and directories click the Estimate button The Estimated Transfer Time field reads N A if no files are sent to or from the current server Image Backup Example The following is an example of how you can use image and incremental backups together Client Server Monday Files 1 2 and 3 reside here An image backup is performed Assume a full incremental was also performed Tuesday File 4 is created Daily incremental is performed including incremental for file 4 Wednesday File 2 is deleted file 3 is changed Daily incremental is performed including incremental for file 3 Thursday File 1 is deleted Daily incremental is performed Suppose you want to use the image created on Monday to restore your file system as it appeared just after Thursday s incremental backup You would enter the following command restore image filespace incremental deletefiles Tivoli Storage Manager would then use the following process 1 The server sends the image backup to the client This image replaces the current content of the target file space The file system now contains files 1 2 and 3 File 4 has been
283. inds no match 2 Rule 2 is checked and finds no match 3 Rule 1 is checked and finds no match 4 Because a match is not found file home widg copyit bat is implicitly included and backed up Example 3 Assume that home is defined as the domain and that you defined the following statements for the include and exclude options exclude 0 include home foo o exclude home foo junk o The current file being processed is home 1ib objs printf o Processing follows these steps Rule 3 is checked and finds no match Rule 2 is checked and finds no match Rule 1 is checked and a match is found Processing stops the option is checked and it is exclude File home 1ib objs printf o is not backed up aorwonN gt Setting Environment Variables Setting Language Environment Variables The Tivoli Storage Manager client automatically detects the language of the system locale and displays Tivoli Storage Manager for that language For example a supported operating system displays Tivoli Storage Manager in French by default If Tivoli Storage Manager cannot load the French message catalog it will default to the American English language pack For example if the client is running on an unsupported locale language combination such as French Canada or Spanish Mexico Tivoli Storage Manager defaults to American English You can use the LANG environment variable to specify the language for the AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux
284. information The restore backupset commana supports restore of local backup sets from local media without using the localbackupset option Also certain local devices such as tape devices require device drivers to be setup prior to performing a restore See 80 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide the device manual for assistance with this task You will also need to know the device address in order to perform the restore Restore Additional Considerations This section discusses some advanced considerations for restoring data You do not need to understand this information to use Tivoli Storage Manager for basic work Authorizing Another User to Restore Retrieve Your Files You can authorize another user on the same workstation or a different workstation to restore backup versions or retrieve archive copies of your files This permits you to share files with other people or with other workstations that you use with a different node name To authorize a user on another workstation to restore or retrieve your files the other workstation must be running one of the UNIX clients To authorize another user to restore or retrieve your files 1 Click on Utilities from the main window Click on User Access List The User Access List window appears 2 Enter the name of the node and user you want to authorize and the directory and file name for the file to which you want the user to have access
285. ing dates ka numberformat Specifies the format for displaying numbers fsa timeformat Specifies the format for displaying time b2d Command Processing Options The following options apply when you use Tivoli Storage Manager commands Table 25 Command Processing Options Option Description Page editor Specifies if the command line interface editor and La command retrieve capability is turned on or off guitreeviewafterbackup Specifies whether the client is returned to the 158 Backup Restore Archive or Retrieve window after a successful operation completes quiet Specifies that processing information does not koq display on your screen This option can be overidden by the server 116 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Table 25 Command Processing Options continued Option Description Page scrolllines Specifies the number of lines to display at one time when displaying a list of items Use this option only when scrollprompt is set to yes scrollprompt Specifies whether Tivoli Storage Manager stops after displaying the number of lines specified by scrolllines or it scrolls to the end of the list verbose Specifies that processing information should display on your screen The alternative is quiet This option can be overridden by the server Authorization Options These options control access to a Tivoli Storage Man
286. ing files For more information see Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt RETrieve sourcefilespec 7 apeiens sourcefilespec desi nion ea Parameters options You can use these command line options with the retrieve command description dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromowner romtime ifnewer pick preservepath todate totime For more information see sourcefilespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to retrieve Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory See destinationfilespec Specifies the path and file name where you want to retrieve the files to If you do not specify a destination Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path Examples Task Retrieve a single file named budget Command retrieve home devel projecta budget Task Retrieve all files with an extension of c from the home devel projecta directory Command retrieve home devel projecta c Task Retrieve all files in the home directory Command retrieve home Task Retrieve all files with a file extension of c from the home devel projecta Chapter 11 Using Commands 325 directory to the home newdevel projectn projecta directory If the projectn or the projectn projecta directory does not exist it is created Command retrieve home devel projecta c
287. installation directory is usr tivoli tsm client ba bin lang where lang is the language identifier tivoli tsm client api aix43 32bit Installs the 32 bit API into the usr tivoli tsm client api bin directory tivoli tsm client api aix43 64bit Installs the 64 bit API into the usr tivoli tsm client api bin64 directory tivoli tsm client api msg lang Installs the NL messages for API Where lang is the language identifier for example Ja_JP for Japanese American English messages are already included in the API client code The default installation directory is usr tivoli tsm client api bin lang where lang is the language identifier tivoli tsm client afs aix43 32bit Installs the AFS backup archive client files command line and GUI into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client dfs aix43 32bit Installs the DFS backup archive client files command line and GUI into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory This installation procedure is designed to install directly from the CD ROM from a local or remote mounted CD ROM drive If you are installing from a Tivoli Storage Manager image run the following command from the directory to which you copied the Tivoli Storage Manager image usr sbin inutoc usr sys inst images 10 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide A toc file is created in that directory Note Do not put any user created files into usr tivoli tsm clie
288. ion Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt NOPrompt gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc delete archive noprompt home project Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 257 Optfile The optfile option specifies the client user options file you want to use when you start a Tivoli Storage Manager session Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt OPTFILE file_name gt lt Parameters file_name Specifies an alternate client options file if you use the fully qualified path name If you specify only the file name Tivoli Storage Manager assumes you want the current directory The default is dsm opt Examples Command line dsmc query session optfile myopts opt This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 258 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Pick The pick option creates a list of backup versions images or archive copies that match the file specification you enter From the list you can select the versions to process Include the inactive option to view both active and inactive objects For images if you do not specify a source file space and destination file space the pick list
289. ion Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path Examples Task Restore a single file named budget Command restore home devel projecta budget Task Restore a single file named budget which resides in the current directory Command restore file budget Task Restore all files with a file extension of c from the home devel projecta directory Command restore home devel projecta c Task Restore files in the user project directory Use the pick and inactive options to select active and inactive backup versions Command restore user project pick inactive Task Restore all files from the home devel projecta directory that end with the character c to the home newdevel projectn projecta directory If the projectn or the projectn projecta directory does not exist it is created Command restore home devel projecta c home newdevel projectn Task Restore all files in the home mydir directory to their state as of 1 00 PM on August 17 2002 Command res pitd 8 17 2002 pitt 13 00 00 home mydir Task Restore all objects in the home myid directory Since this restore is fully wildcarded if the restore process is interrupted a restartable restore session is created Use the restart restore command to restart a restartable restore session Use the cancel restore command to cancel a restartable restore session Command res home myid 316 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archi
290. ion and User s Guide Fromowner The fromowner option specifies an alternate owner from which to restore files or images The owner must give access to another to use the files or images For example to restore files from the home devel proja directory belonging to usermike on system puma and place the restored files in a directory you own named home id proja you would enter dsmc restore fromowner usermike fromnode puma home devel proja home id proja Non root users can specify fromowner root to access files owned by the root user if the root user has granted them access Note If you specify the fromowner option without the fromnode option the active user must be on the same node as the fromowner user Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt FROMOwner owner gt lt Parameters owner Name of an alternate owner Examples Command line dsmc query archive home id proja fromowner mark Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 247 Fromtime Use the fromtime option with the fromdate option to specify a beginning time from which you want to search for backed up or archived files Tivoli Storage Manager ignores this option if you do not specify the fromdate option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt FROMTime time Parameters time Spe
291. ion and User s Guide Understanding How Files are Stored When you back up and archive files Tivoli Storage Manager stores the backups and archives in a file space in storage that has the same name as the file system or virtual mount point from which the files originated For example if you have a file system named home and you back up a file named docl in the home monnett directory Tivoli Storage Manager stores the file in a file space named home If an Authorized User later defines home monnett as a virtual mount point any files you back up from the home monnett directory such as doc2 are stored in a file space named home monnett If you enter this command dsmc query backup home monnett Tivoli Storage Manager looks for files in the home monnett file space It always looks for a file in the file space with the longest name that matches the file specification you include in a command It locates the file named doc2 that was backed up after the virtual mount point was defined However it does not locate the file named doc1 because that file was backed up before the virtual mount point was defined and the backup was stored in the home file space To list or restore the doc1 file using a command you must explicitly specify the file space name by enclosing it in braces For example dsmc query backup home monnett dsmc restore home monnett docl If the Authorized User subsequently removes the home monnett virtua
292. ions click the Options button located to the right of the Estimate button Any options you change are effective during the current session only To estimate the transfer time for your archive selections click the Estimate button 5 Click on Archive The Archive Task List window displays the archive processing status Performing a Command Line Archive You can use wildcards to archive more than one file at a time You can archive all the files in a directory and you can use the subdir yes option to include files in all subdirectories under that directory Use the deletefiles option if you want to delete the files from your local workstation after they are archived and committed to storage For example to archive the files in the home jones proj directory and the files in its subdirectories enter dsmc archive home jones proj subdir yes deletefiles You can use more than one file specification on the archive command For example to archive the home jones h1 doc and home jones test doc files use dsmc archive home jones hl doc home jones test doc Use the description option to assign a description to the archive dsmc archive home jones hl doc description Chapter 1 first version When the archive command completes Tivoli Storage Manager displays archive processing statistics These statistics are also recorded in the schedule log for scheduled commands See Archive on page 279 for more information Deleting Archiv
293. ions file dfsinclexcl usr lpp adsm bin backup excl dfs Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 137 Dirmc Authorized User The dirmc option specifies the management class you want to use for directories If you do not specify this option to associate a management class with directories the client program uses the management class in the active policy set of your policy domain with the longest retention period Select a management class for individual directories that retains directories at least as long as it retains the files associated with them If you specify a management class with this option all directories specified in a backup operation are bound to that management class The dirmc option specifies the management class of directories you back up and does not effect archived directories Archived directories are always bound to the default management class The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax gt gt DIRMc mgmtclassname gt lt Parameters mgmtclassname Specifies the name of the management class you want to associate with directories The client uses the management class name that you specify for all directories that you back up If you do not specify this option the client associates the management class with the longest retention
294. ions of files If necessary your administrator can change these defaults later Creating an Include Exclude List Optional Authorized User This is an optional task but an important one If you do not create an include exclude list Tivoli Storage Manager considers all files for backup services and uses the default management class for backup and archive services For information on management classes and policy domains see You can create an include exclude list to exclude a specific file or groups of files from backup services and to assign specific management classes to files Tivoli Storage Manager backs up any file that is not explicitly excluded You should exclude Tivoli Storage Manager client directories from backup services You can use the query inclexcl command to generate a list of the files that are currently being excluded from backup Specify the include exclude list in your client system options file dsm sys If you define more than one server in your dsm sys file each server must have its own include exclude list This list can also contain include exclude statements obtained from the include exclude files you specify with the inclexcl option Note For the AIX DFS client Specify an include exclude file with the dfsinclexcl option and then specify the include exclude list in that file only See Zi for more information Dfsinclex on page When the client processes include exclude statements the include
295. iously a feature of ADSM known as Hierarchical Storage Manager HSM Tivoli Space Manager automatically migrates eligible files to storage to maintain specific levels of free space on local file systems and automatically recalls migrated files when they are accessed It also permits users to migrate and recall specific files This client program runs only on AIX and Solaris operating systems For specific software requirements see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients for more information The terms hierarchical storage management and space management have the same meaning throughout this publication This book explains how to install the Tivoli Storage Manager clients and how to perform initial setup tasks For information about installation and levels of operating systems that are supported refer to the installation chapter for your client For information about environment variables refer to the environment variables section for your client Tivoli Storage Manager tasks that can only be performed by authorized users_and root users are identified by the phrases Authorized User and root user See ask a for more information about these tasks An Auband User is any user running with a real user ID of 0 root or a user who owns theTivoli Storage Manager executable and whose owner execution permission bit is set to s In the following e
296. ired and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Sa Manager 20 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Installing the Solaris Clients Attention For current installation and configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning Tivoli Storage Manager supported platforms and documentation refer to the Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_megr tivolimain html The following installation packages in Solaris packaging format are available on the CD tsmcli solaris TIVsmCba pkg Contains the backup archive client command line and GUI the administrative client command line and the Web client tsmcli solaris TIVsmCapi pkg Contains the API shared libraries and samples tsmcli solaris TivsmCdoc pkg Contains the documentation To remove previous versions of Tivoli Storage Manager log in as root and enter pkgrm TIVsmCba TIVsmCapi TIVsmCdoc TIVsmChsm Note TIVsmCapi cannot be uninstalled until the TIVsmCba is removed because the backup archive client needs the API for Raw Logical Volume backup For older ADSM versions enter pkgrm IBMadsm w IBMadsm c IBMadsm a IBMadsm h Use the following procedure to install the Tivoli Storage Manager clients 1 Log in as the root user and mount the CD ROM to cdrom 2 Enter the followin
297. is a current web client restriction for the client node and the authentication on must be specified at the server You are always prompted for a user ID and password To display NAS nodes and perform NAS functions you must enter an authorized administrative user ID and password The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web To back up NAS file systems using the Web client GUI 1 Click Backup files and directories from the main window The Backup window displays 2 Expand the directory tree if necessary Notes a The root node called Nodes is not selectable This node only appears if Data Protection for NDMP is enabled on the server b NAS nodes display on the same level as the client workstation node Only nodes for which the administrator has authority will display c NAS nodes are expandable to reveal file spaces but no further expansion is available no file names 3 Click the selection boxes next to the nodes or file systems you want to back up 4 Click the type of backup you want to perform in the backup type pull down menu The NAS backup type list is active only when you first select NAS backup objects 5 Click Backup The NAS Backup Task List window displays the backup processing status and progress bar The number next to the progress bar indicates the estimated size of the
298. istrative user can select one process to cancel delete filespace Use the delete filespace with the class option to display a Psd list of file spaces belonging to a NAS node so that you may choose one to delete Regardless of client platform NAS file system specifications use the forward slash separator as in this example vol vol0 Note When you initiate a NAS restore operation using the command line client the server starts a process to initiate control and monitor the operation It may take several moments before you notice progress at the command line client interface because the server must perform mount and other necessary tasks before data movement occurs Tivoli Storage Manager may display an Interrupted message when the mount occurs You can gnore this message Appendix C Backing Up NAS File Systems Using NDMP 351 352 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Appendix D Web Client Secure Socket Layer When administrators sign onto the backup server using the administrative Web interface client they provide a user ID and password The backup server generates a security token for this user ID and this token is used to verify the administrative Web interface each time it issues a command to the server The security token is encrypted and expires after a certain period of time When the administrator after signing onto the backup server hyperlinks to the Web b
299. ith the incremental command are restored individually e If you perform a backup image before performing an incremental files deleted from the original image are not deleted from the final restored file system Using the Mode Option Two types of backup apply to logical volumes mode selective the default and mode incremental The mode selective option creates and sends a full backup copy of the logical volume to the server The mode incremental option sends only those files that were added or changed since the last full image backup to the server Tivoli Storage Manager ignores the deletefiles option when the image image incremental technique of backing up has been used If you use the backup image command first with mode selective followed by one or more executions with mode incremental use the incremental option with the restore image command to apply any changes made after the original image backup The restore may include files that were later deleted plus the latest versions of files added or changed after the original image backup If logical volumes are running at or near capacity an out of space condition could result during the restore For more information see a The deletefiles option is allowed on the restore image command but the alent ignores it because the server is not aware of any deleted files The following restrictions apply e The file system can have no previous full incremental backups produced by the incremen
300. iving data on a TCP IP connection To improve backup or archive performance increase the tcpwindowsize on the server To improve restore or retrieve performance increase the tcpwindowsize on the client Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt TCPWindowsize window_size gt lt Parameters window_size Specifies the size in kilobytes to use for your client node TCP IP sliding window The range of values is 1 through 2048 For Solaris the maximum value is 1024 The default is 32 Note Depending on the operating system communication settings your system might not accept all values in the range of values Examples Options file tcpwindowsize 1 Command line tcpw 24 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 219 Timeformat The timeformat option specifies the format in which you want to display system time The AIX AIX 5L Solaris and HP UX clients support locales other than English that describe every user interface that varies with location or language Solaris and HP UX clients only support English Simplified Chinese and Japanese locale information The default directories for system supplied locales are as follows e usr lib nls loc for AIX and AIX 5L e usr 1lib locale for Solaris e usr lib n
301. king and authorizing a user s password before permitting user access to the Tivoli Storage Manager server An administrator with system privilege can enable or disable authentication authorization rule A specification permitting another user to either restore or retrieve a user s files from Tivoli Storage Manager storage Authorized User A user who has administrative authority for the Tivoli Storage Manager client on a workstation This user changes passwords performs open registrations and deletes file spaces An Authorized User is any user running with a real user ID of 0 root or a user who owns an executable whose owner execution permission bit is set to s In the following example the user tivoli is an Authorized User while running dsmc since the dsmc owner execution permission bit is set to s rwsr xr x 1 tivoli dsmdev 2880479 Nov 5 13 42 dsmc automounted file system AutoFS A file system managed by an automounter daemon The automounter daemon monitors a specified directory path and automatically mounts the file system to access data B backup A function permitting users to copy one or more files to a storage pool to protect against data loss Contrast with restore backup archive client A program that runs on a file server PC or workstation and provides a means for users to back up archive restore and retrieve files Contrast with administrative client backup copy group A policy object that contains attributes c
302. kipped during restore 73 soft mounts NFS 70 software requirements AIX client 4 HP UX client 4 5 software requirements continued linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 Solaris client client components 8 communication methods 8 hardware requirements 8 installing 21 operating system requirements 8 software requirements 8 sorting files 49 space manager excluding files from services 55 special file systems 68 294 standard management class copy destination 101 copy frequency 99 copy group name 99 copy mode absolute 101 modified 101 copy serialization 100 copy type 99 default values 99 retain extra versions 100 retain only version 100 retain versions 102 versions data deleted active versions 100 inactive versions 100 versions data exists 100 standard policy domain 97 stanza server options placed before 121 starting a GUI session 42 automatically 48 overview 23 Web client 44 starting a session batch mode 43 interactive mode 43 static serialization 100 static shared serialization 100 storage displaying files 302 303 displaying restartable restore sessions 311 Storage Agent using for LAN Free data movement 66 146 storage area network restoring backup sets using 146 318 using for LAN Free data movement 66 146 storage management policies 97 assigning management classes to files 68 copy groups 97 default manage
303. kstation If you omit the old and new passwords when you enter the set password command you are prompted once for the old password and twice for the new password A password is not case sensitive and it can be as many as 63 characters Valid characters are a z Any letter a through z upper or lower case 0 9 Any number 0 through 9 Plus Period Underscore Hyphen amp Ampersand Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax SET Password oldpw P E aprins Parameters oldpw Specifies the current password for your workstation newpw Specifies the new password for your workstation options Select any valid common option For more information see Chapter 9 Setting Examples The following is an example of using the set password command Task Change your password from osecret to nsecret Command set password osecret nsecret Chapter 11 Using Commands 333 334 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Appendix A The AFS and DFS File Backup Clients There are three pair of AIX file backup clients for the GUI and the command line Runtime requirements for the AFS DFS file backup clients include conditions for the following e Presence of the AFS or DFS kernel extension e Product licensing The AFS and DFS file backup GUI and command line clients back up restore archive and retrieve e AFS DFS files
304. kup 152 exclude compression 152 exclude dir 152 exclude encrypt 152 exclude file 152 exclude file backup 152 exclude fs 152 exclude fs nas 152 exclude image 152 exclude encrypt 152 exclude fs setting the 336 exclude fs nas option 152 exclude image option 30 152 excluding files system files 32 using wildcard characters 34 wildcard characters 33 executable files dsm and dsme 335 executables return codes from 91 expire command 291 extended permissions archive 87 backup 58 F file space delete 83 289 performing an image backup 280 file specification number permitted on commands 275 file specification syntax maximum file specifications in command 274 specifying 274 file systems ACL support for 294 adding 60 GPFS multi node cluster environment 139 296 image backup of 62 OFS restrictions 295 supported 294 filelist option 242 files archive using commands 87 archived overriding management class 103 archives how manage 89 archiving 85 279 assigning management classes 68 authorizing another user to restore or retrieve 81 back up using command line 60 backing up hard linked 70 backing up new and changed 55 backing up opened 71 binding management classes to 104 definition of changed 56 encryption 55 excluding groups 33 34 how stored 66 including groups 33 34 maximum file size for operations 275 files continued performing large restore operations 76 processing include exclude 34 restore p
305. l mount point and you then back up additional files in the home monnett directory the backups are once again stored in the home file space For example if you now back up a file named doc3 in the home monnett directory it is stored in the home file space It is not stored in the existing home monnett file space However because the home monnett file space already exists when you try to query or restore the doc3 file Tivoli Storage Manager looks for the file in the home monnett file space unless you specify the correct file space name For example dsmc query backup home monnett dsmc restore home monnett doc2 Note You must explicitly specify the file space name only when there can be more than one resolution to the file specification For example if the following file spaces exist in storage home home monnett home monnett projectl home monnett project1 planning then enter dsmc query backup home monnett project1 planning Tivoli Storage Manager looks for files only in the home monnett project1 planning file space even if one or more of the other file spaces contains a path with the same name But when you enter one of the following dsmc query backup home monnett project1 planning dsmc query backup home monnett project1 planning dsmc query backup home monnett project1 planning Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 67 Tivoli Storage Manager looks for files only in
306. l reside in the default installation directory 328 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Selective The selective command backs up files that you specify If these files become damaged or lost you can replace them with backup versions from the server When you run a selective backup all the files are candidates for back up unless they are excluded from backup in your include exclude list or they do not meet management class requirements for serialization During a selective backup copies of the files are sent to the server even if they did not change since the last backup This might result in more than one copy of the same file on the server If this occurs you might not have as many different down level versions of the file on the server as you intended Your version limit might consist of identical files To avoid this use the incremental command to back up only new and changed files You can selectively back up single files or directories You can also use wildcard characters to back up groups of related files If you set the subdir option to yes when backing up a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively backs up all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories During a selective backup a directory path may be backed up even if the specific file that was targeted for backup is not found Fo
307. l voll nasMgmtClass 9 for more information Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place these options in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt lt gt gt options pattern E 7 mgmtclassname include include backup include file These options are equivalent Use these options to include files or assign management classes for backup processing include archive Includes files or assigns management classes for archive processing include compression Includes files for compression processing if you set the compression option to yes This option applies to backups and archives include encrypt Includes the specified files for encryption processing By default Tivoli Storage Manager does not perform encryption processing include fs nas Assigns a management class when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified applies to all NAS file servers The backup nas command ignores all other include statements This option is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only include image Includes a file space or logical volume or assigns a management class when used with the backup image command The backup image command ignores all other include options This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Solaris and Linux86 only The include image option will accept the following values imagetype snapshot Specifies that
308. le must be placed on the shared disk volumes to maintain a single continuous error log file Configuring the Backup Archive Client To Process Local Nodes You can edit your dsm opt file on each local node to process local disk drives using the following options clusternode Do not specity this option when processing local drives See for more information nodename If no value_is specified Tivoli Storage Manager uses the local machine domain If no value is specified Tivoli Storage Manager processes all local drives that are not owned by the cluster See Doma information You can also configure the Tivoli Storage Manager Backup Archive Scheduler Service to back up the local cluster nodes Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager Backup Archive Client To Process Cluster Disk Resources Ensure that Tivoli Storage Manager manages each cluster group that contains physical disk resources as a unique node This ensures that Tivoli Storage Manager correctly manages all disk resources regardless of which cluster node owns the resource at the time of back up Step 1 Register the Client to a Server A Tivoli Storage Manager client in an HACMP cluster must be registered to a Tivoli Storage Manager server with an assigned node name Consider the following conditions when registering your node name e If local volumes that are not defined as cluster resources will be backed up separate node names and separate client instances mu
309. le x fs h1 m1 11 file y This command dsmc res fs h1 m1 u ann preser complete 262 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Restores these directories and files u ann hl ml1 file a u ann hl m1 file b This command dsmc res fs h1 m1 u ann preser nobase Restores these directories and files u ann file a u ann file b This command dsmc res backupset fs hl m1 u ann su yes preser nobase loc file Restores these directories and files u ann file a u ann file b u ann file x u ann file y This command dsmc res fs hl m1 u ann preser subtree Restores these directories and files u ann ml file a u ann ml file b This command dsmc res fs h1 m1 u ann preser none Restores these directories and files u ann file a u ann file b This command dsmc res fs hl ml u ann su yes preser complete Restores these directories and files u ann h1 m1 file a u ann h1 m1 file b u ann h1 m1 11 file x u ann h1 m1 11 file y This command dsmc res fs h1 m1 u ann su yes preser nobase Restores these directories and files u ann file a u ann file b u ann 11 file x u ann 11 file y This command dsmc res fs h1 m1 u ann su yes preser subtree Restores these directories and files Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 263 u ann ml file a u ann ml file b u ann m1 11 file x u ann m1 11 file y This command
310. lecmd command is not tracked and does not influence the return code of the scheduled event 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 3 The server can also define the preschedulecmd option and the prenschedulecmd option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax ee a cmdstring gt lt PRENSchedul ecmd Parameters cmdstring Specifies the command to process Use only one preschedulecmd option You can enter a command to be executed before a schedule using this option Use a blank or null string for cmdstring if you want to prevent any commands from running that the administrator uses for postschedulecmd and preschedulecmd If you specify a blank or null string on either option it prevents the administrator from using a command on both options If your administrator uses a blank or null string on the preschedulecmd option you cannot run a pre schedule command If the command string contains blanks enclose the command string in double quotes If you placed double quotes within the command string then enclose the entire command string in single quotes 190 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file preschedulecmd lt insert your database product s quiesce command here gt database The command string is
311. les is similar to backing up and restoring files Many of the windows and concepts are similar In this chapter we cover the main archive and retrieve tasks but where windows and concepts are the same as for backup and restore see L j All client archive and retrieve procedures in this chapter also apply to the Web client except the following e Estimate e View Policy Information e Access Another User e Searching and Filtering e User Access List e Preferences Editor Archiving Files To archive files you need to specifically select the files to archive You can select the files by using a file specification or by selecting them from a directory tree Your administrator might have set up schedules to archive certain files on your workstation automatically See Chapte g information on checking and running the schedules available to yai The following sections cover how to archive files without using a schedule Estimating Backup Processing Time You can use the estimate function to estimate the amount of time it takes to process your files and directories The estimated time is a rough calculation of the time it takes Tivoli Storage Manager to transfer your data and is based on previous transfers of data between your workstation and the current server The actual transfer time could be longer or shorter than the estimate due to factors like network traffic system load on your workstation or system load
312. lespec gt gt lt destinorionrilewpee Parameters options You can use these command line options with the restore image command deletefiles fromnode fromowner inactive incremental noprompt pick pitdate and pittime For detailed information about these options see sourcefilespec Specifies the name of a source image file system to be restored Only a single source image may be specified you cannot use wildcard characters destinationfilespec Specifies the name of an existing mounted file system to which the source file system will be restored The default is the original location of the file system The restore image command does not define or mount the destination file space The destination volume must exist must be large enough to hold the source and if it contains a file system must be mounted The destination volume must be mapped to a drive letter or mount point If an image backup contains a file system and you restore them to a different location be aware of the following points e If the destination volume is smaller than the source volume the operation will fail e If the destination volume is larger than the source after the restore operation you will lose the difference between the sizes The lost space can be recovered by increasing the size of the volume This will also increase the size of the restored volume Examples Task Restore the home test directory over which the logical volume is m
313. lib nls loc locales for HP UX The backup archive and administrative clients obtain format information from the locale definition in effect at the time the client is called Consult the documentation on your local system for details about setting up your locale definition Note This numberformat option does not affect the Web client The Web client uses the number format for the locale that the browser is running in If the browser is not running in a supported locale the Web client uses the number format for American English Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt NUMberformat number gt lt Parameters number Displays numbers using any one of the following formats Specify the number 1 6 that corresponds to the number format you want to use 1 1 000 00 This is the default 2 1 000 00 3 1 000 00 4 1 000 00 5 1 000 00 6 1000 00 For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris To define number formats modify the following lines in the source file of your locale Whatever format you select applies both to output and to input decimal_point The character that separates the whole number from its fractional part thousands_sep The character that separates the hundreds from the thousands from the millions 182 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide grouping The numb
314. lied warranties in certain transactions therefore this statement may not apply to you This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors Changes are periodically made to the information herein these changes will be incorporated in new editions of the publication IBM may make improvements and or changes in the product s and or the program s described in this publication at any time without notice Any references in this information to non IBM Web sites are provided for convenience only and do not in any manner serve as an endorsement of those Web sites The materials at those Web sites are not part of the materials for this IBM product and use of those Web sites is at your own risk Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 357 IBM may use or distribute any of the information you supply in any way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose of enabling i the exchange of information between independently created programs and other programs including this one and ii the mutual use of the information which has been exchanged should contact IBM Corporation Information Enabling Requests Dept M13 5600 Cottle Road San Jose CA 95193 0001 U S A Such information may be available subject to appropriate terms and conditions including in some cases payment of a fee The licensed program described in this
315. lient server communication Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt COMMMethod TCPip gt lt SHAREdmem Parameters TCPip The Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol TCP IP communication method SHAREdmem Use the Shared Memory communication method when the client and server are running on the same system This provides better performance over the TCP IP protocol When specifying this communications method on AIX you must be log in as root or have the same user ID as the process running the server Examples Options file commm tcp Command line commmethod tcp This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 127 Commrestartduration Authorized User The commrestartduration option specifies the maximum number of minutes you want the client to attempt to reconnect with a server after a communication error occurs Note A scheduled event will continue if the client reconnects with the server before the commrestartduration value elapses even if the event s startup window has elapsed You can use the commrestartduration option and the commrestartinterval in busy or unstable network environments to decrease connection failures Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients
316. line virtualn banshee This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 228 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Webports The webports option enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI Values for both the Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service are required If you do not specify this option the default value zero 0 is used for both ports This causes TCP IP to randomly assign a free port number for the Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service The ports you specify with the webports and httpport options must be opened in the firewall To enable the backup archive client Command Line Admin client and the Scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the server option tcpport default 1500 must be opened in the firewall Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall To enable the administrative Web interface to run outside a firewall the port specified by server option httpport default is 1580 must be opened in the firewall pport on page 217 for more information on page 47 for further considerations ecards Tivoli e
317. list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database Further backups of the file system cannot be performed unless the restartable restore completes using the restart restore command or is cancelled using the cancel restore command Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax FILE gt gt REStore 7 sourcefilespec 7 gt options sourcefilespec gt lt destinationfi ral Parameters file This parameter specifies that the source file specification is an explicit filename Chapter 11 Using Commands 315 This parameter is required when you restore a file name from the current path when you do not specify a relative or absolute path and when the file name conflicts with one of the reserved restore command keywords such as restore backupset See Ma maximum file size for restore processing options You can use these command line options with the restore command dirsonly filelist filesonly fromdate fromnode fromowner fromtime ifnewer inactive latest pick pitdate pittime preservepath todate totime For more common options sourcefilespec Specifies the path and file name in storage that you want to restore Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory destinationfilespec Specifies the path and file name where you want to place the retrieved files If you do not specify a destinat
318. loop on the command line to start a client command session in interactive mode Loop is the default command for dsme If a password is required Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you when you enter the first command Type your user ID and password and press Enter You can also enter your password using the password option with the loop command but your password is displayed For example if your password is secret you would enter dsmc loop password secret To end an interactive session enter quit at the prompt Chapter 11 Using Commands 273 Entering Client Commands A client command can include one or more of these components e Command name e Options e Parameters The sections that follow describe each of these components Command Name The first part of a command is the command name The command name consists of a single word such as help or schedule or an action word and an object for that action such as query archive Enter the full command name or its minimum abbreviation For example you can enter any of the following versions of the query schedule command query schedule q sc q sched query sc Options There are two groups of options that you can use with commands e Client options The group of options that are set in your client options file dsm opt To override an option in the client options file enter the option with a command For detailed information about client options see Chapter 9 Setti
319. ls loc locales for HP UX The backup archive and administrative clients obtain format information from the locale definition in effect at the time the client is called Consult the documentation on your local system for details about setting up your locale definition Note This timeformat option does not affect the Web client The Web client uses the time format for the locale that the browser is running in If the browser is not running in a locale that Tivoli Storage Manager supports the Web client uses the time format for American English Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client user options file dsm opt Syntax gt gt TIMEformat format_number gt lt Parameters format_number Displays time in one of the formats listed below Select the format number that corresponds to the format you want to use 0 Use the locale defined time format For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris This is the default if the locale specified format consists of digits separator characters and if applicable the AM or PM string 1 23 00 00 This is the default For AIX AIX 5L HP UX SGI and Solaris This is the default if the locale specified format does not consist of digits separator characters and if applicable the AM or PM string 23 00 00 3 23 00 00 4 12 00 00 A P N 220 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User
320. lt is the installation directory with a file name of dsmsched 1og The dsmsched 1log file cannot be a symbolic link Examples Options file schedlogname home mydir schedlog jan Command line schedlogname home mydir schedlog jan This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 200 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Schedlogretention Authorized User The schedlogretention option specifies the number of days to keep entries in the schedule log and whether to save the pruned entries The schedule log is pruned after a scheduled event completes Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax ol D gt gt SCHEDLOGRetention al gt lt days S Parameters N or days Specifies how long to wait before pruning the schedule log N Do not prune the log This permits the log to grow indefinitely This is the default days Specifies the number of days to keep log file entries before pruning The range of values is zero through 9999 Dors Specifies whether to save the pruned entries Use a space or comma to separate this parameter from the previous one D Discards the log entries when pruning the log This is the default S Saves the log entries when pruning the log Pruned entries are copied to the dsmsched pru
321. lusion rules or assigns a management class to a file or a group of files for backup or archive services The include exclude list is defined in one or more include exclude files or in the client system options file The include exclude list may contain entries from any or all of the following sources the client options file Windows the client system options file Unix separate include exclude files or the Tivoli Storage Manager server See options file incremental backup A function that permits user to back up new or changed files or directories from a client domain or from specified file systems directories or files These file systems directories or files are not excluded in the include exclude list and meet the requirements for frequency mode and serialization as defined by a backup copy group of the management class assigned to each file Contrast with selective backup inode A data structure that describes the individual files in an operating system There is one inode for each file The number of inodes in a file system and therefore the maximum number of files a file system can contain is set when the file system is created Hardlinked files share the same inode inode number A number that specifies a particular inode in a file system IPL Initial Program Load See boot and reboot L LAN Local area network LAN free data transfer The movement of client data between the client and a storage device over a SAN bypassi
322. m 2 Enter the following directory path where the installation packages reside on the CD cdrom tsmcli 1inux86 3 Enter the following command to install the backup archive client command line and GUI the administrative client command line and the Web client rpm i TIVsm BA i1386 rpm Note To circumvent the dependence check use the nodeps option You must check the dependencies manually 4 Enter the following command to install the API rpm i TIVsm AP1 i386 rpm Note To circumvent the dependence check use the nodeps option You must check the dependencies manually During installation e The Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive client and Web client files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client ba bin directory e The TSM administrative client command line is installed in the opt tivoli tsm client admin bin directory e The Tivoli Storage Manager API files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client api bin directory 16 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide The TSM documentation files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client books html and opt tivoli tsm client books pdf directories After installation completes see Cha for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Slorase Manager Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 17 Installing the Linux390 Client Attention For current installation and configurati
323. m that runs on a file server workstation or mainframe This program lets administrators monitor and control Tivoli Storage Manager servers using administrator commands Contrast with backup archive client administrator A user who is registered to the server as an administrator Administrators may possess one or more privilege classes Administrators can use the administrative client to enter Tivoli Storage Manager server commands and queries according to their privileges aggregate data transfer rate Dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the elapsed processing time calculates the data transfer rate archive A function permitting users to copy one or more files to a long term storage device Archive copies can e Carry associated descriptive information e Be compressed to minimize storage requirements e Be retrieved by archive date file name or description Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 359 Contrast with retrieve archive copy A file or group of files residing in an archive storage pool in Tivoli Storage Manager storage archive copy group A policy object containing attributes that control the generation destination and expiration of archived files The archive copy group belongs to a management class archive retention grace period The number of days Tivoli Storage Manager retains an archived copy when the server is unable to rebind the file to an appropriate management class authentication The process of chec
324. m the View menu bar You can also click the appropriate column heading in the File List box The Show active inactive files menu option controls whether to display both active and inactive backup versions of files An active file is the most recent backup version of a file that existed on your workstation when you ran your last backup All other backup versions of that file are called inactive Only active backup versions of files display during a session unless you select the Show active inactive files menu option If you delete the file from your workstation the active version becomes inactive the next time you run an incremental backup On the command line client you can use the inactive and pick options_with q E e on and restore commands to display both active and inactive objects See Ina age 25d and Eick on page 25d for more information Chapter 3 Getting Started 49 Displaying Online Help You can display online help in any of the following ways e Place the cursor on an option or field of interest and press F1 e Open the Help menu e Click the Help button in the current window e On the Command Line enter the dsmc help command Ending a Session You can end a Tivoli Storage Manager client session in any one of the following ways e Open the File menu and select Exit e Double click the System menu the button in the upper left corner on the title bar e Open the System menu and select Close e On the
325. m the main window 2 Click Access Another User The Access Another User window appears 3 Type the node name of the user s host machine in the Node name field Type the user name in the User name field 4 Click the Set button If you are using commands use the fromnode and fromowner options to indicate the node name and the name of the user who owns the files Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories 81 For example to restore files to one of your own file systems that were backed up from a workstation named Nodel and owned by a user named Ann enter dsmc restore fromn nodel fromo ann home proj home gillis Use the query filespace command to get a list of file spaces see For example to get a list of file spaces owned by Ann on Nodel enter dsmc query filespace fromn nodel fromo ann See 44 for more information about the fromnode option See Restore on page 31 for more information about using the fromnode and fromowner options with the restore command Also see Re more information about the retrieve command for Restore or Retrieve Files to Another Workstation From a different workstation you can restore or retrieve files you have already backed up from your own workstation You must know the Tivoli Storage Manager password assigned to your node To restore or retrieve files to another workstation use the virtualnodename option to specify the node name of the workstation from which
326. mage if they were deleted after the image was created Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt DELete f i 1 es_A SP iA AAA Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc archive home foo c deletefiles dsmc restore image local data incremental deletefiles 238 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Description The description option assigns or specifies a description for files when performing archive delete retrieve or query archive operations For example if you want to archive a file named budget jan and assign to it the description 2002 Budget for Proj 1 you would enter dsmc archive des 2002 Budget for Proj 1 home plan projl budget jan You can also use this option to specify the description of a backup set that you want to query Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt DEScription description gt lt Parameters description Assigns a description to the file you are archiving If you do not specify a description the default is archive date x where x is the current system date If you use the archive command to archive more than one file the description you enter applies to
327. mand or the node name you specified with the nodename option e The initial password you want to use if required e Contact information such as your name user ID and phone number In addition to possibly defining certain options in your options file your administrator defines the following for you e The policy domain to which your client node belongs A policy domain contains policy sets and management classes defined by your administrator that control how Tivoli Storage Manager manages the files you back up and archive e Whether you can compress files before sending them to the server e Whether you can delete backup and archive data from server storage Using Open Registration With open registration you can register your workstation as a client node with the server 28 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide The first time you start a session Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for information necessary to register your workstation with the server identified in your client options file You need to supply your node name a password and contact information When you use open registration e Your client node is assigned to a policy domain named standard e You can define whether or not to compress files before sending them to the server See for more information about the compression option e You can delete archived copies of files from server storage but not backup vers
328. me generation date retention and description You can use this command to query backup sets on a tape device with AIX AIX 5L Solaris and HP clients only Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Query BACKUPSET gt lt options backupsetname filename Parameters options You can use these command line options with the query backupset command for information about these common options backupsetname Specifies the name of the backup set on the server you want to query when location server is in effect You can use wildcards to specify the backup set name If you do not specify a backup set name all backup sets display filename Specifies the file name on your local workstation that contains the backup set you want to query when location file is in effect Examples Task Query a backup set on the server called mybackupsetname on the server Command query backupset mybackupsetname loc server Task Query the backup set in the backupsetfile name file in the budget directory Command dsmc query backupset home budget backupsetfile name loc file Task Query the backup set on the dev rmt0 tape device Command dsmc query backupset dev rmt0 loc tape Chapter 11 Using Commands 305 Query Filespace The query filespace command displays a list of file spaces for a node stored on the server A file space is a logical space on the serv
329. ment class 97 include exclude list 98 management classes 97 377 Index storage management policies continued policy domains default 97 standard 97 policy sets active policy set 97 subdir option 210 summary of changes for version 5 1 xvii supported language locales 36 Swing enabled browser necessary to run Web client 44 symbolic links archiving and retrieving 87 backing up and restoring 68 restoring 156 UNIX restrictions 69 315 7 tapeprompt option 212 tasks assigning management classes to directories 103 Authorized User 1 client scheduler starting 48 closed registration 28 display management classes 99 GUI override management class 103 open registration 28 password change 48 root user 1 sessions ending 48 setting Bourne and Korn shell environment variables 39 setting C shell environment variables 40 TCP IP communication method options 109 tcpbuffsize option 213 tcpclientaddress option 214 tcpclientport option 215 tcpnodelay option 216 tcpport option 217 tcpserveraddress option 218 tcpwindowsize option 219 timeformat option 220 Tivoli Storage Manager client components linux86 client 5 considerations when upgrading from ADSM AIX 3 1 2 password 43 todate option 265 totime option 266 transaction processing 222 summary of options 118 TSM considerations when upgrading from ADSM AIX 3 1 11 13 txnbytelimit option 222 type option 267 U UNIX file systems ACL support 294 UNIX continued restric
330. mma Equal Sign Hyphen 0 Parentheses Period Space Variables gt gt KEYWOrd var_name gt lt Italicized lowercase items var_name denote variables In this example you can specify a var_name when you enter the KEYWORD command Repetition An arrow returning to the left means you can repeat the item 7 A character or space within the arrow means you must separate repeated items with that repeat a character or space v A footnote by the arrow references the pe repeat za number of times you can repeat the item 1 repeat gt lt Notes 1 Specify repeat as many as 5 times About This Book xiii Syntax Diagram Description Example Required Choices gt gt A gt lt When two or more items are in a stack and B one of them is on the line you must specify Lc one item In this example you must choose A B or C Optional Choice gt gt gt lt When an item is below the line that item is ra optional In the first example you can choose A or nothing at all When two or more items are in a stack below A f the line all of them are optional In the B second example you can choose A B C or Ea nothing at all Defaults A Defaults are above the line The default is S gt lt selected unless you override it You can B override the default by including an option Lc
331. mount the volume We recommend that you do not include system files in an image backup because file systems being actively used cannot be unmounted e You can assign a management class to manage the volume image If you do not assign a management class the default management class is used for the image To assign a management class use the include image option See for more information See Chapter 8 ndersta on page 97 for more information about e Online image backup also requires a Version 5 1 Tivoli Storage Manager server Volume Device Type Support for an Image Backup The following table lists devices supported by the backup image command A raw device might be a disk slice a partition or a logical volume Table 12 Volume Device Type Support for an Image Backup Logical Volume Raw Device Types Sample Device Name Backup Image Manager Command Support AIX Logical Volume Mgr Logical Volumes dev 1lv00 AIX AIX 5L Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 63 Table 12 Volume Device Type Support for an Image Backup continued Logical Volume Raw Device Types Sample Device Name Backup Image Manager Command Support Sun Solstice Volume Mgr Meta Devices dev md dsk dl Solaris Veritas Volume Mgr Logical Volumes dev vx dsk rootdg HP UX Solaris vol01 Raw Disk Partitions dev hda1 Linux86 dev sda3 Linux Logical Volume Logical Volumes dev myvolgroup Linux86 Mgr myvolume Raw Disk Disk Slices dev dsk
332. mpt option 205 secure socket layer Web client 353 selective backup description 58 selective backup continued performing 59 requirements 68 symbolic links 68 selective command 60 329 serialization copy serialization dynamic 100 shared static 100 static 100 server communicating with Windows Me NT 2000 NET clients 28 establishing communications through firewall 47 establishing communications with 25 specifying TCP IP port address for 217 stanza options placed before 121 server and node options summary 110 server free backup using backup image command 280 servername option 206 service and technical support 50 session information displaying 313 set access command 331 restore retrieve authorization 81 set password command 333 setting environment variables API UNIX DSMI_CONFIG 40 DSMI_DIR 40 DSMI_LOG 40 setting language locale 36 setting processing options AFS DFS 339 setting the ACLs and DCE login 339 setting the ACLs and kerberos login 339 setting up required root user tasks 25 setup wizard using to install and configure LVSA 62 shared dynamic serialization 100 125 Shared Memory communication method 167 options 110 shared static serialization 100 125 shell scripts return codes from 91 using commands in 91 shmport option 208 Silicon Graphics IRIX client client components 7 communication method 7 hardware requirements 7 installing 20 operating system requirements 7 software requirements 7 socket files s
333. n Examples Task Display your file spaces Command query filespace Task Display your file spaces Use the dateformat and timeformat options to reformat the dates and times Command query filespace date 5 time 4 Task Query a file space from the nas2 NAS file server Command query filespace nasnodename nas2 class nas 306 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Query Image The query image command displays information about images backed up by a client The options are used to determine the content and detail of the information Note The Tivoli Storage Manager API must be installed to use the query image command Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only Syntax gt gt Query Image logicalvolumename gt lt options filespocentme Parameters options You can use these command line options with the inactive fromnode fromowner See Cha g for information about these command line options You can also use the scrolllines and scrollprompt common options with the query image command For more information about these common options logicalvolumename The name of a logical volume you want to query You must specify the exact name of the image You cannot use wildcards The default is all active images unless restricted by one or more options filespacename Specifies th
334. n The Matching Files Backup window appears c Click the selection boxes next to the files you want to back up and close the Matching Files Backup window To filter 1 Enter your filter criteria in the Find Files Backup window 2 Click the Filter button The Backup window displays the filtered files 3 Click the selection boxes next to the filtered files or directories you want to back up 3 Select one of the following backup types from the pull down menu e To run an incremental backup click Incremental complete e To run an incremental by date backup click Incremental date only e To run a selective backup click Always backup Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 59 4 To modify specific backup options click the Options button located to the right of the Backup button The options you select are effective during the current session only 5 Click Backup The Backup Task List window displays the backup processing status To perform an automatic incremental backup of your default domain select Actions gt Backup Domain Your default domain is set with the domain option in your client user options file see Dama j If you do not have the domain option set the default domain is all Jacal file systems Backing up Data Using the Command Line You can use the selective or incremental command to perform a backup When the incremental and selective commands complete Tivoli Storage Manager displays processi
335. n in the client options file dsm opt or the client system options file dsm sys Syntax None gt gt REVOKEremoteaccess gt lt _Access Parameters None Does not revoke access to administrators who have client access authority for the client This is the default Access Revokes access to administrators who have client access authority for the client Examples Options file revokeremoteaccess none Command line Does not apply 198 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Schedcmddisabled Authorized User The schedcmddisabled option specifies whether to disable the scheduling of commands by the server action command option on the define schedule server command This option does not disable the preschedulecmd and postschedulecmd commands However you can specify preschedulecmd or postschedulecmd with a blank or a null string to disable the scheduling of these commands Commands scheduled by the server using the action command option on the define schedule server command may also be disabled in the same way Use the query schedule command to query the schedules defined by your administrator See Que for more information Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the cli
336. n tcpport default 1500 must be opened by the firewall administrator Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall In prompted mode the Tivoli Storage Manager server needs to contact the client In order to do this some software must be installed on the Tivoli Storage Manager server to route the request through the firewall This software routes the server request through a sock port on the firewall This is typically called socksifing a system Proxies are not supported since they only route a few types of communication protocols HTTP FTP GOPHER and Tivoli Storage Manager is not one of these communication protocols that are routed It is important to note that the client creates a new connection to the Tivoli Storage Manager server when prompted This means that the firewall configuration discussed above must be in place e The server cannot log events to a Tivoli Enterprise Console server across a firewall Starting the Client Scheduler Automatically Root User You can start the client scheduler automatically when you start your workstation If the administrator has defined schedules for your node starting the client scheduler permits you to automatically back up your workstation or perform other scheduled actions See Cha information about the client scheduler scheduler See naging for more information Changing Your Password Your administrator can requir
337. n to save you are only prompted the first time you perform an operation Thereafter Tivoli Storage Manager does not prompt for the password Note The Web client saves the encryption key password in the TSM PWD file If you do not save the encryption key password you are prompted for the initial encryption key password when you begin encryption processing fable 30 shows how both Authorized Users and non Authorized Users can encrypt or decrypt data during a backup or restore operation depending on the value you specify for the passwordaccess option The TSM PWD file must exist to perform the following Authorized User and non Authorized User operations The Authorized User creates the TSM PWD file and sets the encryptkey option tosave and the passwordaccess option to generate Table 30 Encrypting or Decrypting Data Operation Passwordaccess Encryptkey Result Option Option Authorized User generate save data encrypted Backup generate prompt data encrypted prompt prompt data encrypted prompt save data not encrypted Authorized User prompt save prompted for encryptkey Restore password and data decrypted Non Authorized generate prompt data not encrypted User Backup generate save data encrypted prompt prompt data not encrypted prompt save data not encrypted Non Authorized generate prompt menu to skip or proceed User Restore generate save data decrypted prompt prompt menu to skip or proceed prompt save menu to skip or proceed
338. n use the postschedulecmd option to restart the application that uses the file after the backup completes If you are not using a schedule for the backup ensure that you close the application that uses the file before you start the backup Tivoli Storage Manager can back up the file even if it is open and gets changed during the backup This is only useful if the file will be usable even if it changes during backup To back up these files assign the files a management class with the Using Wildcard Characters You can use the operating system s wildcard characters in file specifications with Tivoli Storage Manager These characters let you select groups of files that have similar names In a command wildcard characters can only be used in the file name or extension They cannot be used to specify destination files file systems or directories When using wildcard characters in non loop mode as in dsmc sel home ledger enclose the parameter containing the asterisk in quotes to ensure the system does not interpret the wildcard character and produce unexpected results Wildcard character information is covered in the following table Asterisk Zero or more characters that match all files cpp With an exe extension hm Starting with hm regardless of extension hm Starting with hm whether an extension exists or not Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 71 Asterisk Zero or more characters that m
339. nager Web Client Table 29 Web Client Options Option Description Page httpport Specifies a TCP IP port address for the Web d client httpsport Specifies a TCP IP Secure Socket Layer SSL port address for the Web client This option is valid for the AIX and AIX 5L clients only managedservices Specifies whether the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon manages the Web client the scheduler or both El El El revokeremoteaccess Restricts administrator access on a client workstation through the Web client 118 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Table 29 Web Client Options continued Option Description Page webports Enables the use of the Web client outside a R29 firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI Setting Options in a File This section describes how to set options in your client system options file dsm sys or client user options file dsm opt and how to use options with commands To view or modify an options file click Edit gt Preferences from the Tivoli Storage Manager client GUI The preferences editor updates the client configuration options file if any options have changed You can also edit an options file with your favorite text editor To set an option in these files enter the option name and on
340. nager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Httpport Authorized User The httpport option specifies a TCP IP port address for the Web client Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Tivoli Storage Manager Firewall Support The webports option enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI The ports you specify with the webports option and the client option httpport must be opened in the firewall To enable the backup archive client Command Line Admin client and the Scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the server option tcpport default 1500 must be opened in the firewall Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt HTTPport port_address gt lt Parameters port_address Specifies the TCP IP port address that is used to communicate with the Web client The range of values is 1000 through 32767 the default is 1581 Examples Options file httpport 1502 Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 159
341. nclude the file is backed up If the option is exclude the file is not backed up 3 Ifa match is not found files listed are implicitly included and backed up 4 If policy administration is in effect files are backed up according to the default management class or the management class you specify on a matching include option The following examples demonstrate bottom up processing Example 1 Assume that home is defined as the domain and you defined the following statements for the include and exclude options exclude 0 include home foo 0 exclude home foo junk o The file being processed is home foo dev test o Processing follows these steps Chapter 2 Configuring Tivoli Storage Manager 35 1 Rule 3 the last include or exclude statement defined is checked first because of bottom up processing The file home foo junk o does not match the file name that is being processed 2 Processing moves to Rule 2 and checks This time file home foo 0 matches the file name that is being processed Processing stops the option is checked and it is include 3 File home foo dev test o is backed up Example 2 Assume that home is defined as the domain and you defined the following statements for the include and exclude options exclude obj include home foo 0 exclude home foo junk o The file being processed is home widg copyit Processing follows these steps 1 Rule 3 is checked and f
342. nclude image option or in your dsm sys file to specify the percent value of the volume that is utilized to create an online image backup This option is valid for Linux86 client only subdir Specifies whether to include subdirectories of a named directory El tapeprompt Specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to wait for a tape required for a backup or archive to be mounted or whether to prompt you for your choice EI virtualmountpoint Specifies a directory to serve as a virtual mount point for a file system This provides a direct path to the files you want Tivoli Storage Manager to consider for backup saving processing time 114 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Restore and Retrieve Processing Options The following options relate to restore and retrieve processing Table 22 Restore and Retrieve Processing Options Option Description Page followsymbolic Specifies that you want to restore files to 156 symbolic links and permit a symbolic link to be used as a virtual mount point guitreeviewafterbackup Specifies whether the client is returned to the IE Backup Restore Archive or Retrieve window after a successful operation completes localbackupset Specifies whether the Tivoli Storage Manager Ez GUI bypasses initial logon with the server to restore a local backup set on a UNIX standalone workstation replace Specifies wheth
343. ncremental by date backup on only part of a file system the server does not update the date of the last full incremental In that case the next incremental by date backup will back up these files again Full Incremental versus Partial Incremental Incremental by date Backups Full incremental partial incremental and incremental by date all back up new and changed files An incremental by date takes less time to process than a full incremental and requires less memory A full incremental and an Chapter 4 Backing Up Files and Directories 57 incremental by date backup may not place exactly the same backup files into server storage because the incremental by date backup e Does not expire backup versions of files that you delete from the workstation e Does not rebind backup versions to a new management class if you change the management class e Does not back up files with attributes that change unless the modification dates and times also change e Ignores the copy group frequency attribute of management classes Journal based backups also ignore this attribute Selective Backup Use a selective backup when you want to back up specific files or directories regardless of whether a current copy of those files exists on the server Incremental backups are generally part of an automated system to back up entire file systems In contrast selective backups allow you to manually select a set of files to backup regardless of whether they h
344. nd how to enter commands It also provides detailed information about each command related to entering commands Table 32 Entering Commands Task shows a list of tasks Page able 34 provides an alphabetical list of the commands a brief description and where to locate more information Table 33 Commands Command Description bzal bzal bzd bzi archive Archives files from a workstation to Tivoli Storage Manager storage g D ga oO backup image Creates an image backup of one or more file systems or logical volumes that you specify S DO D backup nas Creates an image backup of one or more file systems belonging to an NAS file server cancel process Displays a list of current NAS backup and restore processes and permits you to select one process to cancel cancel restore delete access Displays a list of restartable restore sessions and permits you to select one to cancel Revokes authorization for a user to restore or retrieve files Bl BO El El delete archive Deletes archived files from Tivoli Storage Manager storage delete filespace Deletes file spaces in Tivoli Storage Manager storage ksd expire Inactivates backup objects you specify boil help Displays online command help boa incremental Backs up new and changed files bo3 loop Starts an interactive command session bos macro Executes commands within a macro f
345. nd parameters If the parameter is a constant a value that does not change the minimum abbreviation is shown in uppercase letters e Examples of using the command 278 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Archive The archive command archives a single file selected files or all files in a directory and its subdirectories on a server Archive files that you want to preserve in their current condition To release storage space on your workstation delete files as you archive them using the deletefiles option Retrieve the archived files to your workstation whenever you need them again Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax y A ARchive filespec Pa ea Filespec Parameters options You can use these command line options with the archive command archmc deletefiles description dirsonly filelist and volinformation For more information about command line options see K You can use the changingretries and subdir common options with the archive command See Cha g information about these common options filespec Specifies path and name of the file you want to archive You can use wildcards to specify groups of files or all the files in a directory You can also enter up to 20 file specifications in a command See Maximum e e bo pase 274 for the maximum file size for archive processing
346. ne if you specify the proper query with a wildcard character for the directory Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt EXPire 7 filespec gt lt options Parameters options You can use these command line options with the expire command pick and ilelist For more information about command line options see Chapter 10 Note If the user specifies filelist then pick is ignored filespec Specifies a path and a filename that you want to expire You can enter only one file specification on this command However you can use wildcards to select a group of files or all the files in a directory If you specify the filelist option the filespec designation is ignored Examples Task Inactivate the letter1 txt file in the home directory Command expire u home letter1 txt Task Inactivate all files in the admin mydir directory Command expire u admin mydir Chapter 11 Using Commands 291 Help The help command displays a Table of Contents of help topics for the command line client Enter the number of the topic that you want to view If there is more than one screen of topics scroll backward or forward through the list To exit type q and press Enter Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Help gt lt aptin Parameters options For information about common options that you can use with this command Examples T
347. nect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP TCP IP Standard with Linux AIX HP UX VM z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT OS 390 UNIX System Services Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the OS 390 UNIX System Services platform 6 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Client Components e Backup archive client command line e Administrative client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API e Web backup archive client Hardware Requirements e Any System 390 e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media Software Requirements OS 390 V2R8 V2R9 or V2R10 with SMP E Communication Methods To use this To connect to these communication Tivoli Storage method Install this software Manager servers TCP IP IBM TCP IP AIX HP UX VM z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT Silicon Graphics IRIX Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the Silicon Graphics IRIX platform Client Components e Backup archive client command line and GUI e Administrative client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API e Web backup archive client Hardware Requirm
348. need BACKDEL authority if the file space you want to delete contains backup versions or ARCHDEL authority if the file space contains archive copies If the file space contains both backup versions and archive copies you need both types of authority Deleting NAS File Spaces You can use the delete filespace command to interactively delete NAS file spaces from server storage Use the nasnodename option to identify the NAS file server When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID Place the nasnodename option in your client system options file dsm sys The value in the client system options file is the default but this value can be overridden on the command line If the nasnodename option is not specified in the client system options file you must specify this option on Au command line when processing NAS file systems See for more information Use the class option to specify the class of the file space to delete To display a list of file spaces belonging to a NAS node so that you may choose one to delete use the class nas option Using the default class client will not change the current delete filespace behavior See for more information Attention When you delete a file space you delete all backup versions and archive copies within that file space When you delete a file space you cannot restore the files or images Verify that the files
349. nes a virtual mount point for a file system if you want backup beginning with a specific directory within that file system 340 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Appendix B Configuring the Backup Archive Client in an HACMP Takeover Environment High Availability Cluster Multi Processing HACMP allows scheduled Tivoli Storage Manager client operations to continue processing during a failover situation For example a scheduled incremental backup of a clustered volume is running on machine a A situation causes the CAD to failover to machine b machine b then reconnects to the server If the reconnection occurs within the start window for that event the scheduled command is restarted This scheduled incremental backup will reexamine files sent to the server before the failover The backup will then catch up to where it terminated before the failover situation If a failover occurs during a user initiated client session the Tivoli Storage Manager client acceptor daemon CAD starts on the node that is handling the takeover This allows it to process scheduled events and provide Web client access You can install Tivoli Storage Manager locally on each node of an HACMP environment You can also install and configure the Tivoli Storage Manager Scheduler Service for each cluster node to manage all local disks and each cluster group containing physical disk resources The clusternode opti
350. ng e Client command options Use this group of options with specific commands on the command line only For detailed information about client command options Parameters Commands can have required parameters optional parameters or no parameters at all Required parameters provide information to perform a task The most commonly required parameter is a file specification For example if you want to archive a file named budget fin from the project directory you would enter dsmc archive project budget fin Some commands have optional parameters If you do not enter a value for an optional parameter Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default value For example the restore command includes a required parameter sourcefilespec that specifies the path and file name in storage that you want to restore The optional parameter destinationfilespec specifies the path and file name where you want to place the restored files If you do not specify the destinationfilespec by default Tivoli Storage Manager restores the files to the original source path If you want to restore the files to a different directory enter a value for destinationfilespec For example to restore project budget fin to newproj newbudg fin you would enter dsmc restore project budget fin newproj newbudg fin Enter parameters in the order indicated in the command syntax diagram File Specification Syntax Use the following syntax rules when entering file
351. ng the LAN Local Area Network LAN A variable sized communications network placed in one location LAN connects servers PCs workstations a network operating system access methods and communications software and links logical unit number LUN A logical unit number LUN is a unique identifier used on a SCSI bus that enables it to differentiate between up to eight separate devices each of which is a logical unit Each LUN is a unique number that identifies a specific logical unit which may be a hard disk tape drive or other device which understands the SCSI protocol logical volume backup A back up of a file system or logical volume as a single object Loopback Virtual File System LOFS A file system created by mounting a directory over another local directory also known as mount over mount A LOFS can also be generated using an automounter management class A policy object that is a named collection of copy groups A management class is associated with a file to specify how the server should manage backup versions or archive copies of workstation files See binding and copy group mode A copy group attribute that specifies whether a backup file should be created for a file that was not modified since the last time the file was backed up See absolute and modified Glossary 363 modified A backup copy group attribute indicating a file is considered for backup only if the file has been changed since the last backup A file i
352. ng path and file name of 162 to manage archives 89 Unicode enabled file spaces 162 include exclude options list creating 29 incrbydate option 251 incremental backup description 56 GPFS multi node cluster environment 139 296 new and changed files 56 of directories restrictions 56 performing 59 requirements 68 symbolic links 68 incremental command 293 incremental option 252 incremental by date comparing performance with incremental 57 description 57 image backup restrictions 64 of directories restrictions 57 performing 59 using command line 60 when to use 57 installation requirements AIX client 3 client 3 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 6 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 Installation requirements AIX client considerations when upgrading from ADSM AIX 3 1 2 installing AIX 5L client 12 AIX client 10 HP UX client 14 linux390 client 18 linux86 client 16 overview 23 installing continued Silicon Graphics IRIX client 20 Solaris client 21 installing from server CD ROM 8 installing Tivoli Storage Manager CD ROM installing from 8 installing TSM HACMFP takeover environment 341 interactive mode 273 interactive session ending 298 starting 43 298 using 298 K kerberos login setting 339 L LAN Free Data Movement enabling 66 146 enabling communications for 167 169 170 options 66 prerequisites 66 lanfreecommmethod option 1
353. ng statistics similar to those shown in the GUI Backup Report window These statistics also display in the schedule log for scheduled commands See on page 329 for more information Selective The selective command backs up specific files Use wildcards to back up more than one file at a time If you back up a directory you can use the subdir yes option to include all the subdirectories under that directory in the backup For example to back up all files in the home monnett proj directory and its subdirectories enter dsmc selective home monnett proj subdir yes If you specify subdir yes when backing up a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively backs up all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories If a subdirectory is a mounted file system Tivoli Storage Manager does not back up the files in that subdirectory when you use the subdir yes option You can use more than one file specification on the selective command For example to back up the home monnett hl doc and home monnett test doc files enter dsmc selective home monnett hl doc home monnett test doc Incremental You can run an incremental backup from the command line using the incremental command For example to back up the home file system enter dsmc incremental home If you do not select the file systems to back up Tivoli Storage Manager uses your default domain
354. nly fromdate fromnode fromowner romtime todate totime For more information see scrolllines scrollprompt subdir See Cha for more information filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to query Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all the files in a directory If you use wildcard characters enclose the file specification in double quotation marks Specify an asterisk to query all archived files in the current directory Examples Task Display a list of all your archived files in the current working directory Command g archive Task Display a list of all your archived files in the devel directory and all of its subdirectories Command query archive devel subdir yes Task Display a list of all your archived files in the current directory Use the dateformat and timeformat options to reformat the dates and times Command q ar date 5 time 1 Task Display a list of archived files in the home proj directory whose first four characters of the file name begin with proj Use the dateformat and timeformat options Command q ar date 1 time 4 home proj proj 302 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Query Backup The query backup command displays a list of backup versions of your files File information includes the file specification size backup date whether the file is active or inactive and the manag
355. nsmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol communication protocol A set of defined interfaces that permits computers to communicate with each other copy group A policy object that contains attributes that control backup and archive file e Generation e Destination e Expiration Backup and archive copy groups belong to management classes See frequency destination mode retention serialization and version D default management class A management class assigned to a policy set This class is used to govern backed up or archived files when a user does not explicitly associate a file with a specific management class through the include exclude list destination A copy group attribute that specifies the storage pool in which to back up or archive a file At installation Tivoli Storage Manager provides two storage destinations named backuppool and archivepool domain See policy domain or client domain drag Move the mouse while holding down the mouse button thus moving the selected object drag and drop Move drag an object on top of another object and release the mouse button thus relocating the object dsm opt file See options file See also client user options file Also called client options file dsm sys file See options file or client system options file dynamic A copy group serialization value that specifies Tivoli Storage Manager accept the first attempt to back up or archive an object regardless of any change
356. nt ba bin the base directory into which the product is installed Any and all files in this directory might be deleted during installation processing Include exclude files dsm opt and dsm sys files should not reside in this directory When upgrading from ADSM version 3 1 to a later client version you should consider the following e The dsmsched log and dsmerror log files are not moved or copied from the old installation directory to the new installation directory e The ADSM version 3 1 installation directory usr 1pp adsm bin is not removed e The ADSM version 3 1 publications are not removed e ADSM version 3 1 filesets such as adsm client aix42 admin lpp are not removed To install Tivoli Storage Manager from the CD ROM 1 Log in as the root user insert the CD ROM into the CD ROM drive device and mount the CD ROM drive From the AIX command line type smitty install and press Enter Select Install and Update Software and press Enter Select Install and Update From ALL Available Software and press Enter arf won At the INPUT device directory for software prompt press the F4 key and select the CD ROM device containing the installation CD ROM or specify the directory containing the installation images and press Enter 6 At the SOFTWARE to install prompt press the F4 key Select the Tivoli Storage Manager filesets you want to install and press Enter 7 Select the options you want and press Enter to begin the installa
357. nt interface is enhanced to support a JRE 1 3 1 Swing enabled browser The Web client facilitates the use of assistive devices for users with disabilities and contains improved keyboard navigation The native look and feel of the platform running the browser is preserved See Support for the z OS file system on the OS 390 Client Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup and restore of the z OS file system on the OS 390 Client See a a information Support for the Sun Quick File System QFS 3 5 0 on the the Solaris Client Tivoli Storage Manager supports backup restore archive and retrieve of the QFS file system on the Solaris client QFS is a high performance file system that enables file sharing in a SAN It eliminates performance bottlenecks resulting from applications using very large file sizes See 9J for more information Support for High Availability Cluster Multi Processing HACMP on AIX Client Tivoli Storage Manager supports HACMP failover on AIX This allows the client to continue operating in the event of an HACMP node failover and fallback Multiple Session No Query Restore The backup archive clients can now utilize multiple restore sessions for no query restore operations increasing the speed of restores This is similar to the multiple backup session support It exploits the mount point available on the server If data is backed up on multiple tapes and if the server has multiple mount points available then the r
358. ntains attributes that are used during the backup process to determine e Whether a file that has changed since the last backup is backed up again e How many days must elapse before a file is backed up again e How a file is processed during a backup if it is in use It also contains attributes to manage the backup versions of your files on the server These attributes control e Where the server stores backup versions of your files and directories e How many backup versions the server keeps of your files and directories e How long the server keeps backup versions of your files and directories An archive copy group contains attributes that control e Whether a file is archived if it is in use e Where the server stores archived copies of your files e How long the server keeps archived copies of your files When the server is unable to rebind a file to an appropriate management class the server uses one of two values to determine the number of days to retain the file If it is a backup version the server uses backup grace period retention If it is an archive copy the server uses archive grace period retention For more information about grace periods see 98 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Displaying Information about Management Classes and Copy Groups Before you select the management classes you want to use click View policy information from the Utilities menu The P
359. nts only exclude image Excludes mounted file systems and raw logical volumes that match the pattern from image processing This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only Parameters pattern Specifies the file or group of files that you want to exclude End the pattern with a file specification Note For NAS file systems You must prefix the NAS node name to the file specification to specify the file server to which the exclude statement applies If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified refers to the NAS nodename specified in the client system options file dsm sys or on the command line If the pattern begins with a single or double quote or contains any embedded blanks or equal signs you must surround the value in either single or double quotation marks The opening and closing quotation marks must be the same type of quotation marks For the exclude image option the pattern is the name of a mounted file system or raw logical volume 154 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file exclude unix exclude core exclude home jones projl exclude archive core exclude backup home jones projl devplan exclude dir home jones tmp exclude backup users homel filel exclude image usr exclude encrypt users home2 filel exclude compression home gordon projl exclude fs nas netappsj
360. o precede each command name with dsmc and your password if one is required After you start an interactive session most of the options you enter with other commands are in effect throughout the session unless you enter them again using a different setting You can enter all valid commands in interactive mode except the schedule and loop commands There are some options that you cannot use in the interactive session created by the loop command and are identified in the option description by this statement This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode g 07 for options that you cannot use in interactive mode Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt LOOP gt lt pitons Parameters options For information about command line and common options that you can use Examples Task Start an interactive command line session Command dsmc At the tsm gt prompt enter a command 298 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Macro The macro command executes a series of commands that you specify in a macro file By including the macro command within a macro file you can nest as many as ten levels of commands Comment lines are not supported within the macro file that you specify for the macro command Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt
361. o use a maximum of two sessions one to query the server and one to send file data The client can use only one server session if you specify a resourceutilization setting of 1 The client is also restricted to a single session if a user who is not authorized invokes a UNIX client with passwordaccess generate specified A client can use more than the default number of sessions when connecting to a server that is Version 3 7 or higher For example resourceutilization 10 permits up to eight sessions with the server Multiple sessions may be used for querying the server and sending file data Multiple query sessions are used when you specify multiple file specifications with a backup or archive command For example if you enter inc filespaceA filespaceB and you specify resourceutilization 5 the client may start a second session to query files on file space B Whether or not the second session starts depends on how long it takes to query the server about files backed up on file space A The client may also try to read data from the file system and send it to the server on multiple sessions Regulating Restore Sessions When you request a restore the default is to use a maximum of one session based on how many tapes the requested data is stored on how many tape drives are available and the maximum number of mount points allowed for the node Notes 1 If all of the files are on disk only one session is used There is no multi session f
362. ocesses on your workstation e By default if you do not specify the managedservices option the CAD manages the Web client to provide backward compatibility Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt MANAGEDServices gt lt Y mode Parameters mode Specifies whether the CAD manages the scheduler the Web client or both 174 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide webclient Specifies that the CAD manages the Web client This is the default schedule Specifies that the CAD manages the scheduler Examples Options file The following are examples of how you might specify the managedservices option in your options file Task Specify that the CAD manages the Web client only managedservices webclient Task Specify that the CAD manages the scheduler only managedservices schedule Task Specify that the CAD manages both the Web client and the scheduler managedservices schedule webclient Note The order in which these values are specified is not important Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 175 Maxcmdretries Authorized User The maxcmdretries option specifies the maximum number of times the client scheduler on your workstation attempts to process a scheduled command that fails The command retry starts only i
363. og file cannot be a symbolic link In addition you cannot specify the root directory for DSM_LOG The error log file contains information about any errors that occur during processing The client creates the error log to help the Tivoli Storage Manager technical support team diagnose severe errors If you define DSM_LOG Tivoli Storage Manager writes messages to dsmerror log dsmwebcl log and dsmsched 1og files in the directory you specify If you define DSM_DIR but not DSM_LOG Tivoli Storage Manager writes messages to dsmerror 1log dsmwebcl 1log and dsmsched 1og in the directory specified by DSM_DIR If you do not define DSM_LOG or DSM_DIR Tivoli Storage Manager writes messages to dsmerror 1log dsmwebcl 1log and dsmsched 1og files in the current directory If you use the errorlogname option to specify the fully qualified path where you want to store the dsmerror 1log file this value overrides the definitions in the DSM_LOG or DSM_DIR environment variables The dsmwebcl log and dsmsched 1log files will be created in the same directory as dsmerror log When Tivoli Storage Manager cannot write to the log file it issues a warning message Setting Bourne and Korn Shell Variables For the Bourne or Korn shell enter the environment variables in the profile file in your HOME directory For example DSM_DIR home davehi1 DSM_CONFIG home davehil dsm opt DSM_LOG home davehi1 export DSM DIR DSM_CONFIG DSM_LOG Chapter 2 C
364. ogretention Schedmode Scrolllines Scrollprompt Servername Shmport Snapshotcachesize Subdir Tapeprompt Tepbuffsize Tepclientaddress Tepclientport Tepnodelay Tcepport Tepserveraddress Tcepwindowsize Timeformat Txnbytelimit Users Verbose Virtualmountpoint Virtualnodename 146 148 150 151 lt 152 156 297 158 159 160 161 162 163 167 169 170 171 2172 z 173 174 176 177 178 179 180 182 184 185 187 188 190 192 193 194 195 197 198 199 200 201 202 204 205 206 208 209 210 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 222 223 224 225 227 Webports Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands Entering Options with a Sere N Command Line Options Reference Archme Class Deletefiles Description Detail Dirsonly Filelist Filesonly Fromdate Fromnode Fromowner Fromtime Ifnewer Inactive Incrbydate Incremental Latest Location Mode Monitor Noprompt Optfile Pick Pitdate Pittime Preservepath Todate Totime Type V2archive Volinformation Chapter 11 Using Commands Starting and Ending a Client Command Session Process Commands in Batch Mode Process Commands in Interactive Mode Entering Client Commands Command Name Options Parameters File Specification Syntax Maximum File Size for Operations
365. oint in time 77 restore using commands 81 restore retrieve to another workstation 82 restoring 73 75 restoring another user s 81 restoring hard linked 70 retrieve archived 88 retrieve using commands 89 sorting list 49 filesonly option 244 firewall establishing communications through 47 159 217 specifying TCP IP ports for the Web client 229 using Web client through 229 followsymbolic option 156 font defaults setting in Xdefaults file 38 format summary of options 116 fromdate option 245 fromnode option 246 restoring retrieving another user s files 81 fromowner option 247 restoring retrieving another user s files 81 fromtime option 248 full incremental comparing performance with incremental by date 57 description 56 when to use 57 fuzzy backup 101 G GPFS file system multi node cluster environment 139 296 graphical user interface changing password 48 displaying online help 50 displaying processing status 61 enabling for local backup set restore 172 enabling local backup set 79 ending a session 50 performing image backup 64 starting a session 42 groups option 157 GUI overriding managment class during archive 103 performing point in time restore 77 guitreeviewafterbackup option 158 H HACMP takeover environment installing TSM 341 hard links archive and retrieve 88 backing up 70 restoring 70 hard mounts NFS 70 hardware requirements AIX client 4 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6
366. oint it encounters during a backup operation Examples Options file dfsbackupmntpnt no 136 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Dfsinclexcl Root User If you use a DFS include exclude options file the dfsinclexcl option specifies the path and file name You can use a DFS include exclude options file to exclude DFS files or directories from backup You can use a DFS include exclude options file to assign different management classes to specific files or groups of files A DFS include exclude options file pointed to by the dfsinclexcl option is used only when DFS files are examined for backup For more information about setting DFS processing options see 9 in the Appendix Attention A separate DFS include exclude options file is required because the prefix means the global root in DFS In a DFS include exclude options file the l prefix is interpreted as the global root of DFS while a non DFS include exclude option uses the prefix to match zero or more directories Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX cients The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt DFSInclexcl filespec gt lt Parameters filespec The filespec parameter specifies the path and file name of your DFS include exclude options file Examples Opt
367. olaris AIX HP UX VM z OS OS 390 Solaris Windows NT Shared Memory TCP IP Standard with Solaris Solaris Additional Software Requirements The backup archive client GUI requires e X Window System X11R6 e Motif 2 0 e CDE online help facility libraries libDtHelp sl and libDtSvc sl typically located in usr dt lib Pre Installation Information The client images except the OS 390 UNIX client are contained on Tivoli Storage Manager product CD ROMs for the UNIX clients and the desktop clients The images reside in the tsmcli platform directory structure where platform is one of the following platform designations hp11 linux86 linux390 sgi solaris The AIX and AIX 5L client images are in the usr sys inst images directory See the following publications for information about available OS 390 UNIX client installation media e Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 Edition Backup Archive Client 5698 TSM order number GI10 4541 e Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 Backup Archive Client 5697 TS9 order number GI10 4542 e Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 API 5698 TSM order number GI10 4539 e Program Directory for Tivoli Storage Manager S 390 API 5697 TS9 order number GI10 4540 You can install the clients using any of the following methods 8 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide e Install directly
368. oli Storage Manager processes all mounted volumes on the NAS file server Note The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax er gt gt DOMAIN Nas gt lt domai n Parameters domain Defines the volumes you want to process all nas Processes all mounted volumes on the NAS file server except those you exclude with the exclude fs nas option This is the default Examples Options file Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 143 domain nas nas1 vol vol nas1 vol voll domain nas all nas Command line Does not apply 144 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Editor The editor option turns the command line interface CLI editor and retrieve capability on or off If the editor and command retrieve functions are not working on a specific workstation setting we recommend that you turn off this function Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX except OS 390 UNIX System Services clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys or the client options file dsm opt Syntax Yes gt gt Editor gt lt LNo Parameters Yes Turns on the CLI editor and command retrieve capability This is the default No Turns off
369. olicy Information window is displayed You can then determine which management classes are available You can also use the detail option on the query mgmtclass command to view the available management classes fa Display policy information window provides the following information The name of the default management class e The name of the policy domain to which the management class belongs e The policy set that is currently active e The date and time that this policy set became active e The number of days to retain an backed up version or archived copy e The management class name and a description fable 1 shows the default values for the backup and archive copy groups in the standard management class Each attribute is discussed in more detail immediately following the table Table 17 Default Values in the Standard Management Class Attribute Backup Default Archive Default Copy group name Standard Standard Copy type Backup Archive Copy frequency 0 days CMD Command Versions data exists Two versions Does not apply Versions data deleted One version Does not apply Retain extra versions 30 days Does not apply Retain only version 60 days Does not apply Copy serialization Shared static Shared static Copy mode Modified Absolute Copy destination Backuppool Archivepool Retain versions Does not apply 365 days Copy Group Name The name of the copy group The default value for both backup and archive i
370. on AIX Sun Solaris and HP UX e Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5 1 client on Sun Solaris 32 bit and 64 bit and AIX 32 bit and 64 bit e Network Appliance NAS file server For supported models and operating systems refer to www tivoli com storage e Tape drive and tape library For supported combinations refer to www tivoli com storage further londa ot including how to ba up and restore NAS file i images using the Web client and command line client 2 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Processing Virtual Mount Points Use the AFS DFS versions of the backup client executables to process virtual mount points for AFS DFS file systems Version 3 and higher backup archive clients do not process virtual mount points specified for AFS DFS file systems See gt J for more E E Additional Migration Information When you install the Web client you must install the backup archive client for the language you want to use A command line administrative client is available on all client platforms The primary intended interface to the server is the Web administrative interface and requires a Web browser The Web administrative interface is packaged and installed with the server Client Environment Requirements This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the UNIX clients lists
371. on determines if you want the Tivoli Storage Manager client to back_up cluster resources and participate in cluster failover for high availability 6 for more information The following software is required e HACMP for AIX Version 4 4 or later or HACMP ES for AIX Version 4 4 or later e AIX 4 3 3 or later The HACMP Cluster Information Daemon must also be running Installing the Backup Archive Client Install the Tivoli Storage Manager Backup Archive client software on a local disk on each node in the cluster you want to participate in an HACMP takeover The following client configuration files must be stored locally e The client executables and related files should reside in the same location on each node in the cluster e The API executable and configuration files should reside in the default API installation directory usr tivoli tsm client api bin e The system options file dsm sys should reside in the default client installation directory usr tivoli tsm client ba bin The following client configuration files must be stored externally in a shared disk subsystem so they can be defined as a cluster resource and be available to the takeover node during a failover Each resource group must have the following configuration e The client option file dsm opt include exclude file and password file must be placed in a directory on the shared disk Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 341 e The client error log fi
372. on information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning Tivoli Storage Manager supported platforms and documentation refer to the Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html The following installation options are available in uncompressed packages on the CD tsmcli 1inux390 TIVsm BA Installs the backup archive client command line and GUI administrative client command line and the Web client tsmcli 1inux390 TIVsm API Installs the API If there is a previous unsupported Linux client installed you must uninstall the unsupported Linux client To delete previously installed client packages log in as root and enter rpm e TIVsm BA and for the API rpm e TIVsm API Note The package version number is not needed for uninstall Use this installation procedure to install directly from the CD ROM from a local or remote mounted CD ROM drive 1 Log in as the root user and mount the CD ROM to cdrom 2 Enter the following directory path where the installation packages reside on the CD cdrom tsmcli 1inux390 3 Enter the following command to install the backup archive client command line the administrative client command line and the Web client rpm i TIVsm BA s390 rpm Note If all required libs are not installed with rpm please enter the following command rpm i
373. on the server Performing a GUI Archive You can archive a file or a group of files using file names or you can select files that match your search criteria using a directory tree Perform archives using the following procedure 1 Click Archive files and directories into long term storage from the main window The Archive window appears Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 85 2 Expand the directory tree by clicking the plus sign or the folder icon next to an object in the tree To search or filter files click the Search icon from the tool bar To search a Enter your search criteria in the Find Files Archive window b Click the Search button The Matching Files Archive window appears c Click the selection boxes next to the files you want to archive and close the Matching Files Archive window To filter 1 Enter your filter criteria in the Find Files Archive window 2 Click the Filter button The Archive window displays the filtered files 3 Click the selection boxes next to the filtered files or directories you want to archive 3 Enter the description accept the default description or select an existing description for your archive package in the Description box When an existing archive description is used the files or directories selected are added to the archive package All archived packages with the same description are grouped for retrieves queries and deletions 4 To modify specific archive opt
374. onfiguring Tivoli Storage Manager 39 40 where home davehil dsm opt is the path and file name for your client user options file and home davehil is the directory where you want to store the dsmerror log file executable file resource files and dsm sys file Setting C Shell Variables For the C shell add the DSM_CONFIG DSM_LOG and DSM_DIR variables to cshre in your HOME directory For example if home davehil dsm opt is the path and file name of your client user options file and home davehil is the directory in which you want to store the dsmerror log file setenv DSM_CONFIG home davehil dsm opt setenv DSM_LOG home davehil Setting API Environmental Variables If you have installed the Tivoli Storage Manager client API set the following environment variables DSMI_DIR Points to your installation directory The files dsmtca dsm sys and the language files must reside in the directory pointed to by DSMI_DIR This environment variable must be present DSMI_CONFIG Full path name of your own client user options file dsm opt DSMI_LOG Path for dsmerror log cannot be a symbolic link Note End users of applications developed with the API should consult the installation directions for that application for special path names or guidelines for options Ensure that directories in the environment variables are specified in the path statement The location of the API library is especially important Tivoli Storage Manager
375. only tcpport Specifies the TCP IP port address for a Tivoli bid Storage Manager server tcpserveraddress Specifies the TCP IP address for a Tivoli Storage bial Manager server tcpwindowsize Specifies the size in kilobytes of the TCP IP bid sliding window for your client node webports Enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall bod by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI Shared Memory Options You must install TCP IP on your workstation to use the shared memory communication method Table 19 Shared Memory Communication Options Option Description Page shmport Specifies the TCP IP port address on which the 208 server listens to establish a shared memory connection lanfreeshmport Specifies the Shared Memory port number where feo the Tivoli Storage Manager storage agent is listening Use this option when you specify lanfreecommmethod SHAREdmem for communication between the Tivoli Storage Manager client and storage agent when processing between the client and the SAN attached storage device Server and Node Options Authorized User Use the following options to specify the server to contact for backup archive services and the client node for which to request backup archive services 110 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Server Options Use the se
376. only restart one restartable restore session at a time Run the restart restore command again to restart additional restores The restarted restore uses the same options you used in the failed restore The restarted restore continues from the point at which the restore previously failed To cancel restartable restore sessions use the cancel restore command Use the restart restore command when e Restartable restore sessions lock the file space at the server so that files cannot be moved off the server s sequential volumes e You cannot back up files affected by the restartable restore Options from the failed session supersede new or changed options for the restarted session Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt RESTArt Restore gt lt pilus Parameters options For information about common options you can use with the restart restore command see K Examples Task Restart a restore Command restart restore 314 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Restore The restore command obtains copies of backup versions of your files from a server To restore files specify the directories or selected files or select the files from a list Restore files to the directory from which you backed them up or to a different directory Tivoli Storage Manager uses the preservepath option with the subtree value as the default f
377. ontrolling the generation destination and expiration of backup files The backup copy group belongs to a management class backup retention grace period The number of days Tivoli Storage Manager retains a backup version when the server is unable to rebind the file to an appropriate management class backup version A backed up file directory or file space that resides in a backup storage pool in Tivoli Storage Manager storage The active version is the most recent backup version See active version and inactive version binding The process of associating a file with a management class name boot To prepare a computer system for operation by loading an operating system C central scheduling A function permitting an administrator to schedule backup and archive operations from a central location Schedule operations on a periodic basis or on an explicit date client A program running on a file server PC workstation or terminal that requests services of another program called the server There are two types of Tivoli Storage Manager clients administrative and backup archive See administrative client and backup archive client client domain The set of drives file systems or volumes selected by a user for processing during a backup or archive operation client node A file server or workstation registered with the server on which the backup archive client program is installed 360 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive
378. option the password option is ignored Set the passwordaccess option to generate in the following situations e When using the HSM client e When using the Web client e When performing NAS operations Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax prompt p gt gt PASSWORDAccess i generate Parameters prompt You are prompted for your workstation password each time a client connects to the server This is the default To keep your client node password secure enter commands without the password and wait for Tivoli Storage Manager to prompt you for the password Each user must know the Tivoli Storage Manager password for your client node Any user who knows the password for your client node can gain access to all backups and archives that originate from your client node For example Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 185 e If the user enters the node name and password for your client node from a different client node the user becomes a virtual root user If you change the name of your client node using the nodename option in the dsm sys file and you specify the same node name in the dsm opt file a user who enters the correct password becomes a virtual root user The same is true if a user specifies the same node name using the nodename option with a command and enters the corre
379. or a pure disk storage pool restore However if you are performing a restore in which the files reside on 4 tapes and some on disk you could use up to 5 sessions during the restore 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager server can set the maximum number of mount points a node can use on the server using the MAXNUMMP parameter For example if the data you want to restore is on 5 different tape volumes the maximum number of mount points is 5 for your node and resourceutilization is set to 3 then 3 sessions will be used for the restore If you increase the resourceutilization setting to 5 then 5 sessions will be used for the restore There is a 1 to 1 relationship to the number of restore sessions allowed and the resourceutilization setting Multiple restore sessions are only allowed for no query restore operations Considerations The following factors can affect the throughput of multiple sessions e The server s ability to handle multiple client sessions Is there sufficient memory multiple storage volumes and CPU cycles to increase backup throughput e The client s ability to drive multiple sessions sufficient CPU memory etc Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 195 e The configuration of the client storage subsystem File systems that are striped across multiple disks using either software striping or RAID 5 can better handle an increase in random read requests than a single drive file system Additionally a single drive file sys
380. or a schedule using the options parameters Options entered locally in the options file Options received from the server with client options not enforced by the server The client can override the value 6 Default option values akon For a complete list of client command options their descriptions the commands with which you can use them and the location in this book for more information see For a complete list of common options see Entering Options with a Command Follow these general rules when you enter options with a command e Enter a command a dash the option name an equal sign and the option value or parameter There should be no spaces on either side of the sign For example dsmc archive description year end 1999 home e For options that do not include parameters enter a command a dash and the option name For example dsmc incremental quiet e Enter either the option name or an abbreviation for the option name For example to enter the latest option enter either lat or latest The capital letters in the syntax of each option indicate the minimum abbreviation for that option name To understand how to read the syntax diagrams see Syntax Diagrams on page xii e Enter options in any order before or after command parameters For example you can enter the subdir option before or after a file specification dsmc selective subdir yes devel projl dsmc selective de
381. or images are obsolete before you delete them Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Delete a a a a options Chapter 11 Using Commands 289 Parameters options You can use these common options with the delete filespace command scrollprompt and scrolllines For more information see Chapter 9 Setting You can use the class nasnodename and detail command line options with the delete filespace command For more information see Clase on page 23d Examples Task Delete a file space Command delete filespace Task Delete NAS file spaces from the dagordon NAS file server stored on the server Command delete filespace nasnodename dagordon class nas 290 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Expire The expire command inactivates the backup objects you specify in the file specification or with the filelist option When working in interactive mode a prompt notifies you before files are expired The expire command does not remove workstation files If you expire a file or directory that still exists on your workstation the file or directory is backed up again during the next incremental backup unless the object is excluded by include exclude processing If you expire a directory that contains active files those files will not appear in a subsequent query from the GUI However these files will display on the command li
382. or restoring files For more information see Note On UNIX systems when a symbolic link is created its modification time is set to the current system time and cannot be changed So when restoring a symbolic link its modification date and time is set to the date and time of the restore not to the date and time the link had when it was backed up As a result Tivoli Storage Manager will back up the symbolic link during the next incremental backup because its modification time changed since the last backup If you set the subdir option to yes when restoring a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively restores all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories When you restore an entire directory or directory tree and you do not specify the inactive latest pick todate and fromdate options on the restore command Tivoli Storage Manager tracks which objects are restored If the restore process is interrupted for any reason you can restart the restore at the point of interruption by entering the restart restore command It is possible to create more than one restartable restore session Restores are only restartable if the filespec is fully wildcarded For example for a restore which is restartable enter dsmc rest home sub yes For a restore which is not restartable enter dsmc rest home file c sub yes Use the query restore command to display a
383. orage Manager server and clients can work across a firewall The ports that the client and server need to communicate must be opened in the firewall by the firewall administrator Because every firewall is different the firewall administrator may need to consult the instructions for the firewall software or hardware in use The ports that the firewall needs to define are those ports that are needed for the client to connect to the Tivoli Storage Manager server If the server is listening on port 1500 then the firewall software needs to forward the port to the Tivoli Storage Manager server machine To allow clients to communicate with a server across a firewall you must open the TCP IP port for the server using the tcpport option in the server options file The default TCP IP port is 1500 To allow the Web client to communicate with remote workstations across a firewall you must open the HTTP port for the remote workstation using the httpport option in the remote workstation s client option file The default HTTP port is 1581 You must open the two TCP IP ports for the remote workstation client using the webports option in the remote workstation s option file Values for the webports are required If you do not specify the values for the webports option the default zero 0 causes TCP IP to randomly assign two free port numbers See EET for more information about the webports option To use the administrative Web interface for a server ac
384. ore files to your local machine With client access authority you do not have physical access to the data If you want access to the Web Client for your own use but wish to prevent administrators with client access authority from accessing your machine remotely specify the revokeremoteaccess option in your options file See for more information Client access authority is not sufficient to access the backup archive client command line client and native GUI You must possess at least client owner authority Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 41 You can use the virtualnodename option to temporarily access your node s data from another machine This option differs from the nodename option in that if passwordaccess generate is specified along with the virtualnodename option the password is not stored on the local machine If you_specify the nodename option the password is stored on the local machine See for more information about the virtualnodename option Starting a GUI Session check to see if a session is already started look on your workstation desktop for the Tivoli Storage Manager icon The Tivoli Storage Manager GUI must be run from the X Window System If you see the Tivoli Storage Manager icon on your desktop Tivoli Storage Manager is already running Double click the icon to open the Tivoli Storage Manager window If the Tivoli Storage Manager icon does not display on your desktop you should start Tivoli Storage
385. orward slash separator as in this example vol vol0 Note When you initiate a NAS backup operation using the command line client the server starts a process to initiate control and monitor the operation It may take several moments before you notice progress at the command line client interface because the server must perform mount and other necessary tasks before data movement occurs Appendix C Backing Up NAS File Systems Using NDMP 349 Restoring NAS File Systems You can restore full or differential NAS file system images that were backed up previously If you restore a differential image Tivoli Storage Manager automatically restores the full backup image first followed by the differential image It is not necessary for a client node to mount a NAS file system to perform backup or restore operations on that file system For information on how to install and configure the Web client see Installing andl To restore NAS file systems using the Web client GUI 1 Click the Restore files and directories to your system from the main window The Restore window appears e To restore to earlier backup versions of NAS filesystem images select View Display active inactive files from the main window e To restore NAS file system images to the state that existed at a specific date and time click the Point In Time button on the Restore window and enter the appropriate information 2 Expand the directory tree if necessary To e
386. ot on the client This situation can arise in at least two instances 1 A drive is removed from a client workstation 2 A file space is renamed on the server Stabilized file spaces remain on the server until deleted by the user or administrator Files and directories can be restored and retrieved from a stabilized file space However it is not possible to back up or archive data to a stabilized file space stanza In the AIX OS a stanza is a group of lines in a file that together have a common function or define a part of the system The Tivoli Storage Manager Client System Options file dsm sys contains a stanza for each server to which the client can connect Each stanza begins with the servername option and ends at the next servername option or the end of file whichever comes first Each stanza must include communications options static A copy group serialization value specifying that a file must not be modified during a backup or archive operation If the file is in use during the first attempt Tivoli Storage Manager will not back up or archive the file See serialization Contrast with dynamic shared dynamic and shared static storage area network SAN A high speed communications network optimized for storage storage agent A program that enables Tivoli Storage Manager to back up and restore client data directly to and from SAN attached storage storage pool A named set of storage volumes used as the destination of backup arc
387. ot users can only use the TCP IP communication method Solaris root and non root users can only use the TCP IP communication method SHAREdmem Use the Shared Memory communication method when the client and server are running on the same system Shared Memory provides better performance than the TCP IP protocol This is the default communication method for AIX AIX 5L and HP UX root users When specifying this communications method on AIX the backup archive client user must be logged in as root or have the same user ID as the process running the Storage Agent AIX AIX 5L and HP UX non root users must use the default TCP IP communication method_and cannot use the Shared Memory communication method See logon restrictions when using this communication method Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 167 Examples Options file lanfreec tcp Command line lanfreec tcp This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode 168 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Lanfreeshmport Authorized User The lanfreeshmport option specifies the Shared Memory port number where the Tivoli Storage Manager Storage Agent is listening This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients only Attention The lanfreeshmport option is not valid if HSM is installed See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients
388. ounted to its original location Command dsmc rest image home test Chapter 11 Using Commands 321 Task Restore the home proj directory over which the logical volume is mounted to its original location and apply the changes from the last incremental backup of the original image recorded at the server The changes include deletion of files Command dsmc restore image home proj incremental deletefiles 322 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Restore NAS The restore nas command restores the image of a file system belonging to a Network Attached Storage NAS file server The NAS file server performs the outboard data movement A server process performs the restore Use the nasnodename option to specify the node name for the NAS file server When using an interactive command line session with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID The NAS node name identifies the NAS file server to the Tivoli Storage Manager server You must register the NAS node name at the server Place the nasnodename option in your client system options file dsm sys The value in the client system options file is the default but this value can be overridden on the command line See for more information You can use the pick option to display a list of NAS images owned by the NAS node you specify From this list you can select one or more images to restore If
389. p archive client GUI requires e X Window System X11R6 e Motif 2 0 e Common Desktop Environment CDE e CDE online help facility libraries libDtHelp sl and libDtSvc sl typically located in usr dt lib Linux for X86 Client Environment This section contains client environment information Tivoli Storage Manager client components and hardware and software requirements for the Linux for X86 Linux86 platform Client Components e Backup archive client command line and GUI e Administrative client command line e Tivoli Storage Manager API e Web backup archive client Hardware Requirements e X86 based PC architecture for example Pentium or higher e Disk space see the README file that is shipped on the product installation media e Memory 64 MB Software Requirements The backup archive client requires the following software to run e Linux kernel 2 4 0 or higher e glibc 2 2 or higher e libstdc 2 9 0 or higher e X Window System X11R6 for end user GUI only e RPM 3 0 0 or higher 4 0 The following Linux distributions meet these requirements e SUSE 7 0 7 1 7 2 and 7 3 e Red Hat 7 1 7 2 e Turbo Linux 7 0 Notes 1 The client was certified by Tivoli for these distributions Please verify for other distributions that the software requirements listed above are fulfilled 2 Please note that X Windows System X11R6 is a requirement to install the client If it is not installed and you do not plan to use the end
390. p archive client files command line and GUI administrative client command line into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client ba aix51 64bit common Installs the Tivoli Storage Manager common files into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client ba aix51 64bit image Installs the image backup component into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client ba aix51 64bit web Installs the Web client into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client ba aix51 64bit nas Installs the NAS backup component into the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory tivoli tsm client books Installs the PDF and HTML book files into the usr tivoli tsm client books directory tivoli tsm client ba msg lang Installs NL messages for the Backup Archive client Where lang is the language identifier for example Ja_JP for Japanese American English messages are already included in the backup archive client code The default installation directory is usr tivoli tsm client ba bin lang where lang is the language identifier tivoli tsm client ba aix51 64bit api Installs the 64 bit API into the usr tivoli tsm client api bin64 directory tivoli tsm client api msg lang Installs the NL messages for API Where lang is the language identifier for example Ja_JP for Japanese American English messages are already included in the API client code The default installation directory is usr tivoli tsm client ap
391. part of the file space name or anywhere in the destinationfilespec The one exception to this rule is the set access command where wildcards are permitted in the two lowest levels of the file spec For example use the following command to grant access to all files in and below the fs dirl directory dsmc set access fs dirl Do not use wildcards for the directory path name for example home j asler filel c e The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum number of characters for a path name is 1024 characters e The maximum number of file specifications per command The Query commands can accept only one file specification The restore and retrieve commands can accept a sourcefilespec and a destinationfilespec The archive delete archive incremental and selective commands will accept up to 20 file specifications Separate file specifications with a blank space Note You can overcome these limitations by using the filelist option to process a list of files The Tivoli Storage Manager client opens the file you specify with this option and processes the list of files within according to the specific ona TE P Maximum File Size for Operations fable 34 on page 27d specifies the maximum file sizes for backup restore archive and retrieve operations Chapter 11 Using Commands 275 Table 34 Maximum File Size for Backup Restore Archive and Retrieve Platform Max File
392. period with directories Examples Options file dirm managdir Command line Does not apply 138 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Domain The domain option specifies the file systems that you want to include for incremental backup in your client domain Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Use the domain option in your client system options file to define your default client domain Tivoli Storage Manager uses your default client domain in the following situations to determine which file systems to process during an incremental backup e When you run an incremental backup using the incremental command and you do not specify which file systems to process e When your administrator defines a schedule to run an incremental backup for you but does not specify which file systems to process If you do not use the domain option to specify file systems in your client options file Tivoli Storage Manager uses the all local parameter as the default Note You can include a virtual mount point in your client domain For information about defining a virtual mount point see Virtualmountpoint When you use the domain option with the incremental command Tivoli Storage Manager adds file systems that you specify to the file system defined in your client options file For example if you enter the
393. pitdate 08 01 2002 pittime 06 00 00 260 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Pittime Use the pittime option with the pitdate option to establish a point in time for which you want to display or restore the latest version of your backups Files or images that were backed up on or before the date and time you specify and which were not deleted before the date and time you specify are processed Backup versions that you create after this date and time are ignored This option is ignored if you do not specify pitdate option Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax Parameters time Specifies a time on a specified date If you do not specify a time the time defaults to 23 59 59 Specify the time in the format you selected with the timeformat option When you include the timeformat option in a command it must precede the fromtime pittime and totime options Examples Command line dsmc q b fs1 pitt 06 00 00 pitd 08 01 2002 Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 261 Preservepath The preservepath option specifies how much of the source path to reproduce as part of the target directory path when you restore or retrieve files to a new location Use the subdir yes option to include the entire subtree of the source directory directories and files below the lowest le
394. ptions e Transaction processing option e Web client options e Image snapshot If you are a root user you can create a default client user options file for all users on your workstation If you want to use different options than those specified in the default client user options file you can create your own client user options file To create and modify a default client user options file or client user options file follow these steps 1 Open the Utilities menu and select Setup Wizard 2 Select Create a new options file 3 Follow the instructions on the screen You can also create and modify a client user options file by performing the following steps Change to the directory containing the sample file If necessary contact the root user on your workstation to determine the location 2 Copy dsm opt smp to dsm opt or to a new file name of your choice e For the default client user options file You can store your default client user options file in the same directory as dsm sys smp or in any directory for which you have write access e For the client user options file You can rename your client user options file and store it in any directory to which you have write access Set the DSM_CONFIG environment variable to point to your new client user options file For the Bourne or Korn shell enter the DSM_CONFIG variable in the profile file in your HOME directory For example DSM_CONFIG home monnett dsm opt export DSM_CON
395. r SUBDIR YES ARCHIVE E TSM510C SUBDIR YES If the first command completes with return code 0 the second command completes with return code 8 and the third command completes with return code 4 the return code for the macro will be 8 92 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Managing the Client Scheduler Using the Client Acceptor Daemon The Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon can manage the scheduler reducing the number of background processes on your workstation This also resolves memory retention problems that may occur when using manual methods of running the scheduler Use the managedservices option in your client system options file to specify whether the Client Acceptor daemon manages the scheduler See Configuring the CAD to Manage the Scheduler Perform the following steps to configure the CAD to manage the client scheduler 1 Install the Web client See more information 2 Install the Scheduler See Starting the Client Scheduler for more information 3 From the Tivoli Storage Manager GUI open the Edit menu and select Preferences Then select the Web Client tab Check the Schedule option in the Managed Services options section If you wish to run the Web client also check the Web Client option Otherwise uncheck the Web Client option so the Web client cannot be used 4 Start the Client Acceptor See for more information Sta
396. r all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax Prompt gt gt REPlace gt lt All Yes No Parameters Prompt You are prompted whether to overwrite a file that already exists on your workstation If the existing file is read only you are prompted whether to overwrite it This is the default All All existing files are overwritten including read only files If access to a file is denied you are prompted to skip or overwrite the file No action is taken on the file until there is a response to the prompt Yes Any existing files are overwritten except read only files If a file is read only you are prompted to overwrite the file or skip it No action is taken on the file until there is a response to the prompt If access to a file is denied the file is skipped No Existing files are not overwritten No prompts will display Examples Options file replace all Command line replace no 194 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Resourceutilization Authorized User Use the resourceutilization option in your client system options file dsm sys to regulate the level of resources the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client can use during processing Regulating Backup and Archive Sessions When you request a backup or archive the client can use more than one session to the server The default is t
397. r example selective dirl dir2 bogus txt still backs up dirl and dir2 even if the file bogus txt does not exist If the selective command is retried because of a communication failure or session loss the transfer statistics will display the number of bytes Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to transfer during all command attempts Therefore the statistics for bytes transferred may not match the file statistics such as those for file size Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax p gt gt SELective filespec ms e o filespec Parameters options You can use these command line options with the selective command changingretries dirsonly filesonly volinformation filelist tapeprompt subdir Chapter 11 Using Commands 329 filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to back up Use wildcard characters to select a group of files or all the files in a directory You can enter up to 20 file specifications in a command separating the file specifications with a space When backing up a file system specify the file system with a trailing slash for example home Examples Task Back up the proja file in the home devel directory Command selective home devel proja Task Back up all files in the home devel directory whose file names begin with proj Command selective home devel proj Task Back up all files in the home devel directory whose
398. rage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Passworddir Authorized User The passworddir option forces the directory location in which to store an encrypted password file The default directory location depends upon how the client was installed Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options dsm sys file Syntax gt gt PASSWORDDIR directoryname _ __________ _ gt l Parameters directoryname Specifies the path in which to store the encrypted password file The name of the password file is TSM PWD If any part of the specified path does not exist Tivoli Storage Manager attempts to create it The default directory for AIX and AIX 5L is etc security adsm and for other UNIX platforms it is etc adsm Examples Options file passworddir etc security tsm Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 187 Postschedulecmd Postnschedulecmd Authorized User The postschedulecmd option specifies a command that the client program processes after it runs a schedule The client program waits for the command to complete before it continues with other processing If you do not want to wait specify postnschedulecmd Notes 1 If the postschedulecmd command does not complete with return code 0 the client will report that the scheduled event completed with return
399. rage agents which are using that particular server must be upgraded as well Upgrading from ADSM Version 3 1 to a Later Client Version For AIX When upgrading from an ADSM version 3 1 client to a later Tivoli Storage Manager client version you may want to consider the following e Tivoli Storage Manager does not move or copy the dsmsched log and dsmerror log files from the old installation directory to the new installation directory e The ADSM version 3 1 installation directory usr 1pp adsm bin is not removed e The ADSM version 3 1 publications are not removed e Tivoli Storage Manager does not remove ADSM version 3 1 filesets such as adsm client aix42 admin Ipp ACL Support 94 for a complete list of file systems for which Tivoli Se Manager provides ACL support Data Protection for NDMP Version 5 1 Requirements Enterprise Edition only Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition supports backup and restore of network attached storage NAS file system images to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to NAS file servers Data Protection for NDMP enables backup and restore support on the Tivoli Storage Manager client for Windows NT 2000 XP and Windows NET servers for NAS file servers from Network Appliance Data Protection for NDMP is available only on IBM Tivoli Storage Manager Enterprise Edition Data Protection for NDMP requires the following hardware and software e Tivoli Storage Manager Version 5 1 server
400. ram must have the s bit set in its mode field and the owner must be root V version Storage management policy may allow back level copies of backed up objects to be kept at the server whenever an object is newly backed up The most recent backed up copy is called the active version Earlier copies are inactive versions The following backup copy group attributes define version criteria versions data exists and versions data deleted W wildcard character An asterisk or question mark character used to represent multiple or single characters when searching for various combinations of characters in alphanumeric and symbolic names windowed interface A type of user interface that is either a graphical user interface or a text based interface The text based interface maintains a close affinity to the graphical user interface including action bars and their associated pull down menus and windows See graphical user interface workstation A programmable high level workstation usually on a network with its own processing hardware such as a high performance personal computer In a local area network a personal computer that acts as a single user or client A workstation can also be used as a server world wide name A unique 48 or 64 bit number assigned by a recognized naming authority often via block assignment to a manufacturer that identifies a connection or a set of connections to the network Abbreviated WWN
401. restore the files and the difference between backing up and archiving files All client backup and restore procedures in this chapter also apply to the Web client except the following e Estimate e View Policy Information e Access Another User e Searching and Filtering e User Access List e Preferences Editor on page 44 for information on starting the Web client Note Files backed up or archived by an OS 390 UNIX backup archive client can only be restored or retrieved by an OS 390 UNIX backup archive client The following table identifies tasks described in this chapter Task Page Planning Your Backups If you are a first time user or if you only back up files occasionally you may wish to use as a checklist of preliminary steps to consider before performing a backup Table 11 Preliminary Steps for Backing Up Files Decide whether you want to back up files or archive them See Do You Want tol Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 53 Table 11 Preliminary Steps for Backing Up Files continued Decide what type of backup you want according to your needs See the following unique considerations See information For further backup considerations see bage od Do You Want to Back Up or Archive Files When the backup archive client backs up or archives a file it sends a copy of the file and its associated attributes to the server however backups and archi
402. ribute 102 retention grace period archive 98 105 backup 98 105 376 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide retrieve another user s files 81 archived files using commands 89 authorizing another user 81 estimating processing time 85 files to another workstation 82 hard links 88 maximum file size 275 running 88 sorting file list 49 summary of options 115 symbolic links 87 using the Web client 44 retrieve command 325 retry backup 125 retryperiod option 197 return codes 91 revokeremoteaccess option 198 root user tasks 1 root user tasks creating default client user options file 26 setting up 25 rules 97 S SAN restoring backup sets using 146 318 using for LAN Free data movement 66 146 schedcmddisabled option 199 schedcmduser option server defined only 96 schedlogname option 200 schedlogretention option 201 schedmode option 202 schedule command 327 schedule log pruning 201 scheduled commands enabling disabling 96 scheduled events displaying 312 scheduled services 91 defining schedules for uid other than 0 96 disabling scheduled commands 199 displaying completed work 95 displaying scheduled work 94 managed by client acceptor 93 managed by client acceptor daemon 174 resolving memory retention after scheduled backups 93 174 restrictions for NAS file systems 347 running 93 scheduling options 91 starting 93 scheduling options 91 scrolllines option 204 scrollpro
403. rieve both files they will be hard linked together The one exception to this procedure occurs if you archive two files that are hard linked together and then break the connection between them on your workstation The two files then contain separate data files If you retrieve the two files from the server Tivoli Storage Manager respects the current file system and does not restore the hard link Problems can occur if you back up only one file of a set of hard linked files For example files texta and textb are hard linked to each other You archive texta then edit textb and make some changes If you retrieve texta the changes you made to textb will be lost To ensure that hard linked files remain synchronized always archive all hard links at the same time and restore those same files together Retrieving Archives Retrieve a file when you want to return an archive copy from the server to your workstation Performing a GUI Retrieve To retrieve an archived file Many of the advanced considerations for retrieving files are the same as for O lt on and Restore od Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide 1 Click Retrieve files and directories from long term storage from the client GUI main window The Retrieve window appears 2 Expand the directory tree by clicking the plus sign or the folder icon next to an object you want to expand To search or filt
404. rity 310 monitoring backup or restore operations 256 Querying file system images belonging to 303 restore file systems 323 350 specifying the node name for 178 NFS hard mounts 70 soft mounts 70 nfstimeout option 70 179 NLSPATH environment variable displaying help browser menu in your language locale 37 to display help browser menu in your language locale 36 no query restore 73 node name 25 Node name field 81 nodename option 180 noprompt option 257 numberformat option 182 O offline image backup 62 online help displaying 50 online forum 50 service and technical support 50 online Help forum 50 online image backup 62 online startup information 9 open registration permissions 28 using 28 operating system requirements AIX client 4 operating system requirements continued clients 3 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 optfile option 258 optional parameters 274 options afsbackupmntpnt 122 336 archive summary 112 archmc 236 archsymlinkasfile 123 authorization summary 117 automount 124 backup summary 112 central scheduling summary 115 changingretries 125 class 237 clusternode 126 command processing summary 116 commmethod 127 commrestartduration 128 commrestartinterval 129 communication summary 109 compressalways 130 compression 131 dateformat 133 defaultserver 135 deletefiles 238 d
405. rn code is very common Files are not processed for various reasons The most common reasons are e The file is in an exclude list e The file was in use by another application and could not be accessed by the client e The file changed during the operation to an extent prohibited by the copy serialization attribute See 8 The operation completed with at least one warning message For scheduled events the status will be Completed Review dsmerror log and dsmsched log for scheduled events to determine what warning messages were issued and to assess their impact on the operation 12 The operation completed with at least one error message except for error messages for skipped files For scheduled events the status will be Failed Review dsmerror log and dsmsched log for scheduled events to determine what error messages were issued and to assess their impact on the operation As a general rule this return code means that the error was severe enough to prevent the successful completion of the operation For example an error that prevents an entire file system from being processed yields return code 12 When a file is not found the operation yields return code 12 The return code for a client macro will be the highest return code issued among the individual commands that comprise the macro For example suppose a macro consists of these commands SELECTIVE C MyTools SUBDIR YES INCREMENTAL C MyPrograms TestODBCDrive
406. rocessing stops at each mount point If you want the file backup clients to cross AFS mount points set the afsbackupmntpnt option to no Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the mount point as a directory rather than as a symbolic link to the target volume For more information about the afsbackupmntpnt option see When you use the archive client the directory that is pointed to by the mount point is archived The Dfsbackupmnipnt Option By default Tivoli Storage Manager DFS file backup clients do not cross DFS mount points The DFS mount points and symbolic links require similar backups For example if you define xyz cell fs u foo as a Tivoli Storage Manager virtual mount point and you enter this command incremental xyz cell fs u foo Tivoli Storage Manager performs the following incremental backup for foo 1 Backs up any files under foo that are eligible for backup 2 Backs up directories under foo that are not DFS mount points 3 Backs up mount point information for any DFS mount point under foo Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not process files or subdirectories under any DFS mount point it encounters under foo Processing stops at each mount point If you want the file backup clients to cross DFS mount points set the dfsbackupmntpnt option to no Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the mount point as a directory rather than as a symbolic link to the target fileset For more information about the dfsbackupmntpnt op
407. rom 91 command name 274 command parameters optional 274 required 274 command processing summary of options 116 command rules 277 commands archive 279 backup image 280 backup NAS 283 batch mode 273 cancel process 285 cancel restore 286 delete access 287 delete archive 288 delete filespace 289 dsm 42 dsm afs 335 dsmafs 335 dsmc afs 335 commands continued dsmcafs 335 dsmcdfs 335 dsmdfs 335 expire 291 help 292 incremental 60 293 interactive loop mode 273 loop 298 macro 299 monitor process 300 number of files specifications permitted 275 query access 301 query archive 302 query backup 303 query backupset 305 query filespace 306 query image 307 query inclexcl 308 query mgmtclass 309 query node 310 query restore 311 query schedule 312 query session 313 recall previous 276 restart restore 314 restore 315 restore backupset 318 restore image 321 restore NAS 323 retrieve 325 schedule 327 scheduled enabling or disabling 96 selective 60 329 set access 331 set password 333 using in executables 91 using in shell scripts 91 using options with 120 commmethod option 127 commrestartduration option 128 commrestartinterval option 129 communication methods Shared Memory AIX client 4 HP UX client 5 Solaris client 8 summary 109 TCP IP AIX client 4 HP UX client 5 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 6 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 7 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 communication
408. ross a firewall you must open the port that is the HTTP port for the server using the httpport option in the server options file The default HTTP port is 1580 In an enterprise environment we strongly recommend that you use the Tivoli Storage Manager Secure Web Administrator Proxy for Web administration of the Tivoli Storage Manager server Install the proxy on a Web server that sits on the Chapter 3 Getting Started 47 firewall so that the Web server can access resources on both sides of the firewall this is sometimes called the demilitarized zone When you set up the proxy you can use it to administer any Tivoli Storage Manager server at Version 3 7 or higher For more information on how to install and use the proxy see the appendix about the Web proxy in the Tivoli Storage Manager Quick Start manual You can also increase security in this environment by enabling HTTPS services also called secure socket layer or SSL on the Web server where you install the proxy Check your Web server documentation for information on how to set this up When using Tivoli Storage Manager across a firewall please consider the following e To use the Web client to connect to a client across a firewall the Web client and the backup archive client must be Version 4 1 2 or later e To enable the backup archive client command line admin client and the scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the server optio
409. rting the Client Scheduler To start the client scheduler on your client node and connect to the server schedule change to the Tivoli Storage Manager installation directory and enter the following command dsmc schedule When you start the client scheduler it runs continuously until you close the window end the process or log off your system To run the schedule command in the background and to keep the client scheduler running even if you log off your system enter the following nohup dsmc schedule 2 gt dev null amp If a Tivoli Storage Manager password is required for your workstation and you want to run the schedule command in the background enter the password with the command Root User To start the client scheduler automatically ensure that the passwordaccess option is set to generate in your client system options file dsm sys then follow the procedure below for your operating system e For non OS 390 UNIX add the following entry to the etc inittab file tsm once usr bin dsmc sched gt dev null 2 gt amp 1 TSM scheduler Note You must include the redirection to dev null in the command For OS 390 UNIX 1 Create a shell script called tivoli tsm client ba bin rundsmc which contains the following entries Chapter 7 Automating Tasks 93 cd usr 1pp Tivoli tsm client ba bin sleep 60 dsmc schedule This prevents the creation of two jobs with the same name and enables automatic shutdown You may nee
410. rvername option in your client system options file dsm sys to specify the start of a group of options stanza used to connect to a Tivoli Storage Manager server Multiple stanzas can be set up in the dsm sys file to connect to different servers Each stanza begins with a servername option and must contain all options required to establish communication with a server The stanza can also contain other options for backup archive operations If your client system options file contains only one stanza Your client node contacts the server you specify in that stanza for all services If your client system options file contains more than one stanza You can specify a default server with the defaultserver option If you do not specify a default server by default Tivoli Storage Manager contacts the server you specify in the first stanza of your dsm sys file Place the defaultserver option at the beginning of your dsm sys file before any server stanzas Figure 3 shows a sample client system options file dsm sys ie gt DEFAULTServer server2 SErvername serverl NODename nodel COMMMethod TCPip TCPPort 1500 TCPServeraddress almvmd almaden ibm com PASSWORDAccess generate MAILprog usr bin xsend root GRoups system adsm USERs ashton stewart kaitlin INCLExcl adm adsm backup1 excl SErvername server2 COMMMethod SHAREdmem shmport 1520 PASSWORDAccess prompt GRoups system adsm USERS danielle derek brant INCLExcl adm adsm ba
411. ry This is the default No Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager archives the symbolic link and not the associated file or directory Examples Options file archsymlinkasfile no Command line archsyml no Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 123 Automount Authorized User The automount option adds an automounted file system into the domain by mounting it Use this option with the domain option Use this option to specify all automounted file systems the Tivoli Storage Manager client tries to mount at the following points in time e When Tivoli Storage Manager client starts e When the back up is started e When the Tivoli Storage Manager client has reached an automounted file system during backup It is unnecessary to explicitly specify an automounted file system in the automount statement if you use the keywords all auto nfs or all auto lofs in the domain statement and the file system is already mounted However you should add this file system in the automount statement to ensure the file system has been mounted at all the points in time mentioned above The automounted file systems are remounted if they have gone offline in the meantime during a backup See Domain on page 139 for more information about working with Automounted File Systems and the domain option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX platforms except Linux86 and Linux390 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support t
412. s Attention For current installation and configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager program product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning Tivoli Storage Manager supported platforms and documentation refer to the Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html The following source packages are available on the installation media tsmcli hp11 TIVsmC In this package the software selection name used by swlist for the top level product name is TIVsm The components under TIVsm are TIVsm CLIENT TIVsm CLIENT API and TIVsm CLIENT_DOC TIVsm CLIENT Contains the backup archive client command line and GUI administrative client command line and the Web client TIVsm CLIENT_API Contains the 32 bit API TIVsm CLIENT DOC Contains the documentation tsmcli hp11 TIVsmCapi64 In this package the software selection name used by swlist for the top level product name is TIVsm64 The component under TIVsm64 is TIVsm CLIENT_API TIVsm CLIENT_API Contains the 64 bit API tsmcli hp11 TIVsmCapi In this package the software selection name used by swlist for the top level product name is TIVsm The component under TIVsm is TIVsm CLIENT_API TIVsm CLIENT_API Contains the 32 bit API To remove previous ADSM client versions log in as the root user and enter the following command usr sbin swremove x mount_all_filesystem
413. s directories and files from the list of objects available for processing See d ng T for more raai about the exclude k and exclude die options Note Because directory branches excluded using the exclude dir option do not display in the GUI setting this option prevents you from performing either selective or incremental backups of data in the excluded directories from the GUI However you can still perform selective backups of such data from the command line After evaluating all exclude fs and exclude dir statements Tivoli Storage Manager evaluates the include exclude list from the bottom up and stops when it finds an include or exclude statement that matches the file it is processing The order in which the include and exclude options are entered therefore affects which files are included and excluded See Cha ag for more information about the order in which all options are processed To display a list of all include exclude statements in effect on your client workstation in the actual order they are processed use the query inclexcl command See Qu j for more information The client program processes the include and exclude options as follows 1 Files are checked directories are only checked if the exclude dir option is specified 2 File names are compared to the include exclude list from the bottom up When a match is found the processing stops and checks whether the option is include or exclude If the option is i
414. s Standard Copy Type The type of copy group The value for backup is always Backup and the value for archive is always Archive Copy Frequency Copy frequency is the minimum number of days that must elapse between successive incremental backups Use this attribute during a full incremental backup Copy frequency works with the mode parameter For example if frequency is zero 0 and mode is modified a file or directory is backed up only if it changed since the Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies 99 last incremental backup If frequency is zero 0 and mode is absolute a file is backed up every time you run an incremental backup against it This attribute is not checked for selective backups For archive copy groups copy frequency is always CMD command There is no restriction on how often you archive a file Versions Data Exists The Versions Data Exists attribute specifies the maximum number of different backup versions retained for files and directories currently on your drive If you select a management class that permits more than one backup version the most recent version is called the active version All other versions are called inactive versions If the maximum number of versions permitted is five and you run a backup that creates a sixth version the oldest version is deleted from server storage Versions Data Deleted The Versions Data Deleted attribute specifies the maximum number of different
415. s assigned to the management class mcmonthly 3 Any file with an extension of ice in the home winter december directory is assigned to the management class mcdaily 4 Any other files with an extension of ice in any directory under home winter are assigned to the management class mcweekly 5 Any file with an extension of sno except home winter winter white sno in any directory is excluded from backup To specify your own default management class for files that are not explicitly included specify include mgmt_class_name as the first include or exclude option defined When you archive a file using the graphical user interface you can select a different management class to override the management class assigned to the file Overriding the Management Class for Archived Files When you archive a file you can override the assigned management class using the graphical user interface GUI or by using the archmc option on the archive command To use the GUI press the Archive Options button on the archive tree to override the management class and select a different management class For example to associate the file home jones budget jan with the management class ret2yrs you would enter dsmc archive archmc ret2yrs home jones budget jan Selecting a Management Class for Directories If the management class in your active policy set containing the longest retention period meets your backup requirements for
416. s 176 nasnodename 178 nfstimeout 179 nodename 180 passwordaccess 185 passworddir 187 postnschedulecmd 188 postschedulecmd 188 prenschedulecmd 190 preschedulecmd 190 queryschedperiod 192 resourceutilization 195 retryperiod 197 schedcmddisabled 199 schedlogname 200 schedlogretention 201 schedmode 202 scrolllines 204 servername 206 shmport 208 snapshotcachesize 209 tcpbuffsize 213 tcpclientaddress 214 client system options continued tcepclientport 215 tcpnodelay 216 tcpport 217 tcpserveraddress 218 tcpwindowsize 219 txnbytelimit 222 users 223 virtualmountpoint 225 client system options file copying and modifying 25 creating and modifying 107 example of 25 minimum required statements 25 setting options 119 specifying include exclude options 29 client system options file UNIX options placed before server stanzas 121 client user options file creating and modifying 108 setting options 119 client server communications establishing 25 closed registration permissions 28 using 28 clusternode option 126 command line archiving files 87 displaying processing status 61 ending a session 50 overriding managment class during archive 103 performing image backup 64 performing large restore operations 76 performing point in time restore 78 restrictions for NAS file systems 347 retrieving archived files 89 starting a session 42 using for incremental backup 60 using for selective backup 60 command line interface return codes f
417. s 58 dsmerror log 39 set DSM_LOG to point to 38 DSMI_COMFIG environment variable API UNIX 40 DSMI_DIR environment variable API UNIX 40 DSMI_LOG environment variable API UNIX 40 dsmsched log file 95 dsmtca executable file set DSM_DIR to point to 38 dynamic and shared serialization 100 E editor option 145 enablelanfree option 146 encrypting file data 55 encryption excluding files 152 saving encryption key password 148 encryptkey 55 encryptkey option 148 ending a command line session 50 ending a GUI session 50 entering client commands 274 entering commands 277 environment prerequisites AIX client 3 HP UX client 4 linux for zSeries or S 390 client 6 linux86 client 5 OS 390 UNIX System Services client 6 Silicon Graphics IRIX client 7 Solaris client 8 environment variables API UNIX 40 DSM_CONFIG 38 DSM_DIR 38 DSM_LOG 38 LANG 38 setting Bourne and Korn shell 39 setting C shell 40 error log 38 pruning 151 error processing summary of options 117 errorlogname option 150 errorlogretention option 151 estimate function 59 exclude option exclude archive 30 exclude backup 30 exclude compression 30 exclude dir 30 exclude file 30 exclude file backup 30 exclude fs 30 exclude image 30 processing 34 to exclude system files 32 wildcard characters 33 34 exclude options exclude archive 152 372 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide exclude options continued exclude bac
418. s are available within the install image on the installation media TSM sw base Installs the backup archive client command line and GUI and administrative client command line TSM sw api Installs the API TSM sw web Installs the Web client To remove previous Tivoli Storage Manager client versions use the Software Manager swmer Use the following procedure to install the Tivoli Storage Manager clients 1 Log in as the root user and mount the CD ROM to cdrom 2 Enter the following directory path where the installation packages reside on the CD cdrom tsmcli sgi 3 Log in as the root user insert the CD ROM and enter the following command usr sbin inst A f pwd Note pwd may be replaced with the absolute name of the current directory 4 To selectively install one or more components enter the following command usr sbin inst a f pwd I TSM sw base TSM sw api TSM sw web Notes a You can also use the Software Manager swmgr to install selectively b The Web client uses files of the backup archive client component Ensure that both components are the same level During installation e The Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive files are installed in the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory e The API files are installed in the usr tivoli tsm client api bin directory e The Web client files are installed in the client directory After installation completes see Chapte a a for requ
419. s considered changed if the date size owner or permissions have changed See absolute and mode N NAS node A type of node that is a NAS file server The NAS node name uniquely identifies the NAS file server and its data to Tivoli Storage Manager Through support of Network Data Management Protocol NDMP Tivoli Storage Manager can efficiently back up and restore NAS file systems to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to the NAS file servers NDMP Network Data Management Protocol Network Attached Storage NAS file server A network attached storage NAS device is a specialized file serving box whose operating system is streamlined and optimized for file serving functions Through support of Network Data Management Protocol NDMP Tivoli Storage Manager can efficiently back up and restore NAS file systems to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to the NAS file servers Network Data Management Protocol Open standard network protocol Enables efficient back up and restore of Network Attached Storage NAS file systems to tape drives or libraries that are locally attached to the NAS file servers network data transfer rate The data transfer rate calculated by dividing the total number of bytes transferred by the data transfer time For example the time spent transferring data over the network node See client node node name A unique name used to identify a workstation file server or PC to the server
420. s false v IBMADSM To remove previous Tivoli Storage Manager client versions log in as the root user and enter the following command usr sbin swremove x mount_all_filesystems false v TIVsm CLIENT Note If you also installed the CLIENT_API and CLIENT_DOC filesets execute the following command to remove them usr sbin swremove x mount_all_filesystems false v TIVsm CLIENT API TIVsm CLIENT_DOC To install from the CD ROM Log in as the root user mount the CDROM to cdrom change directory to tsmcli hp11 If you downloaded from ftp go to the directory where the installable image is located Enter the following command swinstall x mount_all_filesystems false v s pwd TIVsmC TIVsm 14 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Note replace pwd with the absolute name of the current directory To install only the API or the documentation omit the last TIVsm from the command above and mark only the fileset for installation in the swinstall user interface you want to install The Client needs the API for Raw Logical Volume backup Therefore if you mark CLIENT for installation the API must also be installed During installation e The Tivoli Storage Manager backup archive and Web client files are installed in the opt tivoli tsm client ba bin directory e The administrative client dsmadmc is installed in opt tivoli tsm client admin bin e The Tivoli Storage Manager API fil
421. s for another user but this should not cause ownership conflicts The backup server will properly record that the file belongs to the original owner The Authorized User does not need to grant the other user access to the backup versions Setting a Virtual Mount Point If you are an Authorized User and you want back up files beginning with a specific directory within a file system you can define that directory as a virtual mount point see 58 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Defining a virtual mount point within a file system provides a direct path to the files you want to back up thus saving processing time It is more efficient than defining the file system with the domain option and then using an exclude option to exclude the files you do not want to back up It also allows you to store backups and archives for specific directories in separate storage file spaces Note The backup archive client does not recognize AFS DFS volume mount points You must install the AFS DFS client For more information about using the Aces es clients see lA x A A a Ba Estimating Backup Processing Time You can use the Estimate function to estimate the amount of time it takes to process files and directories The estimated time is a rough calculation of the time required to transfer your data and is based on previous transfers of data between your workstation and the current server The actual trans
422. s made during backup or archive processing See serialization Contrast with shared dynamic shared static and static E error log A text file written on disk that contains Tivoli Storage Manager processing error messages The Tivoli Storage Manager server detects and saves these errors Glossary 361 exclude To identify files in an include exclude list that you do not want to include in a specific client operation such as backup or archive exabyte EB 1 For processor storage real and virtual storage and channel volume 1 152 921 504 606 846 976 bytes 2 For disk storage capacity and communications volume 1 000 000 000 000 000 000 bytes expiration The process in which files are identified for deletion because their expiration date or retention period is passed Backups or archives are marked for deletion based on the criteria defined in the backup or archive copy group F file server A dedicated computer and its peripheral storage devices connected to a local area network that stores both programs and files shared by users on the network file space A logical space on the Tivoli Storage Manager server that contains a group of files In Tivoli Storage Manager users can restore retrieve or delete file spaces from Tivoli Storage Manager storage A file space for systems e Windows file spaces for removable media are identified by volume label Fixed drive file spaces are identified by Universal Naming Convention UN
423. s option only when the scheduler is running Your administrator can also set this option If your administrator specifies a value for this option that value overrides the value in your client options file after your client node successfully contacts the server Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt RETRYPeriod minutes gt lt Parameters minutes Specifies the number of minutes the client scheduler waits between attempts to contact the server or to process a scheduled command that fails The range of values is 1 through 9999 the default is 20 Examples Options file retryp 10 Command line retryperiod 10 This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 197 Revokeremoteaccess The revokeremoteaccess option restricts an administrator with client access privilege from accessing a client workstation that is running the Web client This option does not restrict administrators with client owner system or policy privilege from accessing your workstation through the Web client Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this optio
424. s sanjose ibm com u bob domain afs sanjose ibm com u charlie You can then schedule a daily incremental backup using the dsmcafs incremental or dsmcdfs incremental command through a crontab job or any other scheduling tool For more information about the virtualmountpoint option see For more information about the domain option Use Another Method to Set These Options You can set the virtualmountpoint and domain options without specifying all the AFS volume mount points or all the DFS fileset mount points For example rather than listing all AFS or DFS user home directories specify their parent directory afs sanjose ibm com u or sanjose ibm com fs u as a virtual mount point See the examples below For AFS virtualmountpoint afs sanjose ibm com u Set the afsbackupmntpnt option to no The client program crosses the AFS volume mount points in the afs sanjose ibm com u directory then backs up all the mounted AFS user volumes For example enter the following line in the client system options file afsbackupmntpnt no Attention Use this AFS setup with caution because it backs up all volumes mounted below afs sanjose ibm com u When you create AFS mount points you expose the backup operation to potential cyclic mount points If you link to the root of a foreign AFS cell you also expose the backup operation to potential mount points For DFS virtualmountpoint sanjose ibm com fs u Set the dfsbackupmntpnt option
425. s to set this variable see section You can then edit your dsm opt file as appropriate for your system or use the GUI preferences editor by opening the Edit menu and selecting Preferences 9J for more information about setting 2 for options that are supported on your ei and detailed ahiomnalion about each option 3 09 for communication protocols supported foe your UNIX dient Registering Your Workstation with a Server Required Authorized User Before you can use Tivoli Storage Manager you must register your client with the server The process of setting up a node name and password is called registration and is performed by your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator There are two types of registration open and closed Your administrator chooses the type of registration for your site If you plan to use a Web client you must have an administrative user ID with system privilege policy privilege client access authority or client owner authority When a new node is registered an administrative user ID is automatically created for the node By default this node has client owner authority Using Closed Registration With closed registration an administrator must register your workstation as a client node with the server If your enterprise uses closed registration you need to provide the following information to your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator e Your node name the value returned by the hostname com
426. scheduling of generic commands specified by your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 115 Table 23 Scheduling Options continued Option Description Page schedcmduser server defined only KI The scheduler executes commands under a uid of 0 however there may be some users who have a different user ID In this case your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator can define schedules and allow these schedules to be executed under a uid other than 0 using this option The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option schedlogname Specifies the name of the file where schedule log information is stored schedlogretention Specifies the number of days to keep log file 201 entries in the schedule log and whether to save pruned entries schedmode Specifies which schedule mode to use polling or baal prompted tcpclientaddress Specifies the TCP IP address of your client node bid Use this option only with the schedule command when you specify prompted as the schedule mode tcpclientport Specifies the TCP IP port number of your client bial node Use this option only with the schedule command when you specify prompted as the schedule mode Format Options You can use the following options to select different formats for date time and numbers Table 24 Format Options Option Description Page dateformat Specifies the format for display
427. scription filelist noprompt pick For more information about command line options see You can use the subdir common option with the delete archive command For filespec Specifies the path and file name that you want to delete from storage Use wildcard characters to specify a group of files or all files in a directory You can also enter up to 20 file specifications in a command Examples Task Delete a file named budget Command del ar user home proj1 budget Task Delete all files archived from the user home projl directory with a file extension of txt Command del arch user home projl txt Task Delete files archived from the user project directory using the pick option Command d ar user project pick 288 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Delete Filespace Authorized User The delete filespace command deletes file spaces from server storage A file space is a logical space on the server that contains files or images you backed up or archived Tivoli Storage Manager assigns a separate file space on the server for each workstation file system from which you back up or archive files The file space name is the same as the file system name When you enter the delete filespace command a list of your file spaces displays From this list select the file space that you want to delete Your administrator must give you authority to delete a file space You
428. se common options with the backup nas command monitor nasnodename quiet verbose For more information see Chapter 11 Using Commands 283 You can use the mode command line option with the backup nas command For more information see Ch filespec Specifies the name of one or more file systems on the NAS file server If you do not specify this parameter Tivoli Storage Manager processes all of the file systems defined by the domain nas option For more information about this option see Doma If you do not specify the filespec or the domain nas option the default all nas value is used for domain nas and all file systems on the NAS file server are backed up Examples Task Perform the NAS image backup of the entire file system Command backup nas mode full nasnodename nas1 vol volO vol vol2 Task Perform the NAS image backup of the entire file server Command backup nas nasnodename nas1 284 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Cancel Process The cancel process command displays a list of current backup and restore processes for all NAS nodes This command only displays those processes for which the administrative user has authority From the list the administrative user can select one process to cancel Client owner privilege over a particular NAS node is sufficient authority to cancel the selected NAS process When using an interactive command line session
429. se one of the following communication protocols e TCP IP all UNIX clients e Shared Memory AIX HP UX and Solaris only Use the commmethod option to specify the communication protocol For more protocol in a SAN environment See information Ask your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator for assistance in setting your communication options TCP IP Options To use the TCP IP communication protocol you must include the tcpserveraddress option in your client system options file dsm sys The other TCP IP options have default values which you can modify only if you want to change the default value Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 109 For UNIX If you plan to back up an NFS system see N Table 18 TCP IP Options Option Description Page httpport Specifies a TCP IP port address for the Tivoli Ld Storage Manager Web client httpsport Specifies a TCP IP port address for the HTTPS fied secure socket layer SSL interface to the Tivoli Storage Manager Web client This option is valid for the AIX and AIX 5L clients only lanfreetcpport Specifies the TCP IP port number where the Tivoli zo Storage Manager storage agent is listening tcpbuffsize Specifies the size in kilobytes of the Tivoli Storage bal Manager internal TCP IP communication buffer tcpnodelay Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager immediately bid sends small transactions to the server This option is for a AIX and AIX 5L clients
430. select the Actions gt Monitor TSM Activities from the main window able 41 on page 351 lists the commands and options you can use to restore NAS file system images from the command line 350 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Table 41 NAS Options and Commands Option or Command Definition Page query node Displays all the nodes for which a particular administrative Bid user ID has authority to perform operations The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web query backup Use the query backup command with the class option to Bod display information about file system images backed up for a NAS file server query filespace Use the query filespace command with the class option to B06 display a list of file spaces belonging to a NAS node restore nas Restores the image of a file system belonging to a Network Bod Attached Storage NAS file server monitor process Displays current backup and restore processes for all NAS BOQ nodes for which an administrative user has authority The administrative user can then select one process to monitor cancel process Displays current back up and restore processes for all NAS bad nodes for which an administrative user has authority From the display the admin
431. slow processor on a fast network connection does not If you set the compressalways option to yes compression continues even if the file size increases To stop compression if the file size grows and resend the file uncompressed set the compressalways option to No If you set the compression option to yes you can control compression processing in the following ways e Use the exclude compression option in your client system options file dsm sys to_exclude specific files or groups of files from compression processing See e Use the include compression option in your client system options file dsm sys to include files within a broad group of excluded files for compression processing See J This option controls compression only if your administrator specifies that your client node can compress files before sending them to the server Use the compression option with the archive incremental and selective commands Note The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax No gt gt COMPRESSIon gt lt LYes Parameters No Files are not compressed before they are sent to the server This is the default For options with a No parameter acceptable alternatives are 0 false and off Yes Files are compressed before they are sent to the server
432. specification parameters such as filespec sourcefilespec and destinationfilespec 274 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide e If a file specification does not begin with a file space name an opening directory delimiter the file specification is assumed to be a subdirectory of the current working directory and Tivoli Storage Manager builds the fully qualified file specification For example if the current working directory is home me then the destinationfilespec would be home me mydir in the following command dsmc restore fs dirl mydir e The only command that accepts a simple file space name is the incremental command The following example is valid dsmc i fs The following example is not valid dsmc sel fs e When entering the sourcefilespec if the directory name ends with then is implied When entering a destinationfilespec if the name ends with then it is considered a directory otherwise it is considered a file The following example illustrates these two rules Even though mydir and yourdir are directories the command will fail because is implied after mydir and yourdir is considered a file restore home mydir away yourdir The following example illustrates the second rule Even though mydir and yourdir are directories the command will fail because mydir and yourdir are considered files restore home mydir away yourdir e Do not use wildcards as
433. ss they already exist on the server A directory that already exists on the server is only backed up again if its permissions or time stamp change Directories count in the number of objects backed up To exclude directories from backup use the exclude dir option For more about exclude dir see 56 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Understanding Which Files are Backed Up When you requst a backup Tivoli Storage Manager backs up a file if all of the follwing requirements are met e You do not exclude the file backup in your include exclude list If you do not have an include exclude list all files will be candidates for backup e The selected management class contains a backup copy group See Chapter 7 A ne Tasks on page 91l for more information on management classes and backup copy groups e The file meets the serialization requirements defined in the backup copy group If serialization is static or shared static and the file is in use during back up the backup does not occur See oups on for more information e The file meets the mode requirements defined in the backup copy group If the mode is modified the file must have changed since the last backup If the mode is absolute the file can be backed up even if it does not change See e The file meets the frequency requirements defined in the backup copy group The specified minimum number of days since the l
434. st be used for both non clustered and clustered volumes e The node name used to back up clustered volumes defaults to the cluster name not the host name We recommend that you choose a node name related to the cluster resource group to be managed by that node e If multiple resource groups are defined in the HACMP environment to failover independently then separate node names must be defined per resource group Step 2 Configure the Client System Options File Each node in the HACMP cluster that runs the Tivoli Storage Manager client must have the following settings defined in each respective dsm sys file e Separate server stanzas to back up non clustered volumes e Separate server stanzas for each cluster resource group to be backed up The server stanzas defined to back up non clustered volumes must have the following special characteristics e The value of the tcpclientaddress option must be the service IP address This is the IP address used for primary traffic to and from the node 342 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide If the client will back up and restore non clustered volumes without being connected to the HACMP cluster the value of the tepclientaddress option must be the boot IP address This is the IP address used to start the machine node before it rejoins the HACMP cluster The server stanzas defined to back up clustered volumes must have the following special charac
435. station the result depends on how the followsymbolic option is set if it is set to Yes The symbolic link is restored and overwrites the directory on your workstation If the followsymbolic option is set to yes a symbolic link can be used as a virtual mount point No Tivoli Storage Manager displays an error message No is the default Note On UNIX systems when a symbolic link is created its modification time is set to current system time and can not be changed When restoring a symbolic link its modification date and time is set to the date and time of the restore not to the date and time of the symbolic link when it was backed up As a result Tivoli Storage Manager will back up the symbolic link again during the next incremental backup because its modification time changed since the last backup The following table shows symbolic link backup and restore functions along with the action taken Table 13 Symbolic Link Management Table for Backup and Restore Function Action Taken Selective backup of a file Backs up the symbolic link only the file is not backed up Selective backup of a directory Backs up the directory only the symbolic link is not backed up Incremental backup with subdir no Backs up the symbolic links only files and directories pointed to are not backed up Incremental backup with subdir yes Backs up the symbolic links and directories and files they point to Chapter 4 Backing Up F
436. stered at the server server Specifies client nodes that are other Tivoli Storage Manager servers client Specifies client nodes that are backup archive clients Examples Command line q node type nas Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 267 V2archive Use the v2archive option with the archive command to archive only files to the server Tivoli Storage Manager will not process directories that exist in the path of the source file specification This option differs from the filesonly option in that the filesonly option archives the directories that exist in the path of the source file specification The v2archive and dirsonly options are mutually exclusive and an error message displays if you use both options in the same archive command This option is not persistent you must explicitly specify this option in each archive command If you use this option you may want to consider the following e You may experience performance problems when retrieving large amounts of data archived with this option e You may want to use this option only if you are concerned about expiration performance on a server that already contains extremely large amounts of archived data Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt V2archive gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples This command
437. string to disable the scheduling of these commands See 99 for more information 96 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Chapter 8 Understanding Storage Management Policies Storage management policies are rules your administrator defines in order to manage your backups and archives on the server You can associate or bind your data to these policies then when the data is backed up or archived it is managed according to policy criteria Policy criteria include a policy domain a policy set a copy group and a management class Policies determine e Whether a file is eligible for backup or archive services e How many backup versions to keep e How long to keep inactive backup versions and archive copies e Where to place the copies in storage If you have the Tivoli Space Manager client installed your administrator also defines rules that determine whether files are eligible for migration from your local file systems to storage This chapter explains e Policy criteria policy domains policy sets copy groups and management classes e How to display policies e How Tivoli Storage Manager associates your data with policies Using Policy Domains and Policy Sets A policy domain is a group of clients with similar requirements for backing up and archiving data Policy domains contain one or more policy sets An administrator uses policy domains to manage a group of
438. sy means of accurately determining the success or failure of the client operation The backup archive command line interface now exits with a return code that accurately reflects the success or failure of the client operation Users who already have scripts batch files or other scheduling or automation facilities that interpret the return code from the command line interface may need to make changes in order to accommodate these new return codes In general the return code is related to the highest severity message during the client operation Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 91 e If the highest severity message is informational ANSnnnnl then the return code will be 0 e If the highest severity message is a warning ANSnnnnW then the return code will be 8 e If the highest severity message is an error ANSnnnnB then the return code will be 12 The exception to the above rules are warning or error messages that individual files could not be processed For such a skipped file the return code will be 4 For cases where the return code is not 0 you can examine the dsmerror log file and for scheduled events the dsmsched log file For a description of the return codes and their meanings see able 14 Table 16 Return Codes and Meanings Code Explanation 0 All operations completed successfully 4 The operation completed successfully but some files were not processed There were no other errors or warnings This retu
439. t If your administrator is using collocation the number of sequential access media mounts required for restore operations is also reduced Performing Point in Time Restores Use a point in time restore to restore files to the state that existed at a specific date and time A point in time restore can eliminate the effect of data corruption or recover a basic configuration to a prior condition You can perform a point in time restore of a file space directory or file You can also perform a point in time restore of image backups For more information see Q Perform incremental backups to support a point in time restore During an incremental backup the client notifies the server when files are deleted from a client file space or directory Selective and incremental by date backups do not notify the server about deleted files Run incremental backups at a frequency consistent with possible restore requirements If you request a point in time restore with a date and time that is prior to the oldest version maintained by the Tivoli Storage Manager server the object is not restored to your system Files which were deleted from you workstation prior to the point in time specified will not be restored Notes 1 Your administrator must define copy group settings that maintain enough inactive versions of a file to guarantee that you can restore that file to a specific date and time If enough versions are not maintained Tivoli Storage
440. t The Linux86 client is enhanced to support a logical volume image backup of file systems and raw volumes The Tivoli Storage Manager server does not track individual files in the file system image File system images are tracked as individual objects and management class policy will be applied to the file system image as a whole See a age Ba for more information Support for Online Image Backup of File Systems and Raw Logical Volumes on Linux86 Client The traditional offline image backup prevents access to the volume by other system applications during the operation For Linux86 only Tivoli Storage Manager performs an online image backup of file systems residing on a logical volume created by the Linux Logical Volume Manager during which the volume is available to other system applications See on page 621 for more information LAN Free Data Movement Support on HP UX Client Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 Tivoli Storage Manager supports LAN Free data movement in a storage area network SAN environment for the HP UX client LAN Free data movement allows client data to move directly from the client to a SAN attached storage device Shifting the client data movement from the communications network to a SAN decreases the load on the server This allows the server to support a greater number of simultaneous client connections See on page 66l for more information xvii xviii Enhanced Web Client Interface The Web clie
441. t apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 129 Compressalways The compressalways option specifies whether to continue compressing an object if it grows during compression or resend the object uncompressed Use this option with the compression option Use the compressalways option with the archive incremental and selective commands Note The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax Yes gt gt COMPRESSAIways gt lt L No Parameters Yes File compression continues even if the file grows as a result of compression This is the default No Backup archive client objects are resent uncompressed if they grow during compression API behavior depends on the application Application backups may fail Examples Options file compressalways yes Command line compressa no This option is valid only on the initial command line 130 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Compression Authorized User The compression option compresses files before you send them to the server Compressing your files reduces data storage for backup versions and archive copies of your files It can however affect Tivoli Storage Manager throughput A fast processor on a slow network connection benefits from compression but a
442. t each of the Tivoli Storage Manager processing options Information for each option includes A description of the option A syntax diagram of the option The option name contains uppercase and lowercase characters The uppercase characters indicate the minimum abbreviation you can use for the option name See for an explanation of these diagrams Detailed descriptions of the option parameters If the parameter is a constant a value that does not change use the minimum abbreviation Examples of using the option in the client options file Examples of using the option on the command line if applicable Options with a command line example of Does not apply cannot be used with command line or scheduled commands Note For options with a yes parameter acceptable alternatives are 1 true and on For options with a no parameter acceptable alternatives are 0 false and off Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 121 Afsbackupmnipnt Root User The afsbackupmntpnt option specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to see an AFS mount point as a mount point or as a directory If Tivoli Storage Manager sees it as a mount point it backs up only the name of the mounted volume during a backup operation It does not back up the subtree by startin from the mount point directory For more information about this option see thd Alin the Appendix Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients The Tivol
443. t valid if HSM is installed See Tivoli Space Manager for Unix Using the Hierarchical Storage Management Clients GC32 0794 for more information To specify a communication and Storage Agent see protocol between the Tivoli Storage Manager client Note To restore backup sets in a SAN environment see for more information Supported Clients This option is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX and Solaris clients only Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax No ENABLELanfree gt lt _Yes Parameters Yes Specifies that you want to enable an available LAN Free path to a SAN attached storage device No Specifies that you do not want to enable a LAN Free path to a SAN attached storage device This is the default 146 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Examples Options file enablelanfree yes Command line enablelanfree yes This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 147 Encryptkey Authorized User The encryptkey option specifies whether to save the encryption key password locally when performing a backup archive operation or whether to prompt for the encryption key password The encryption key password is saved to the TSM PWD file in encrypted format If you set the encryptkey optio
444. t you want to perform an online image backup during which the volume is available to other system applications This is the default for file systems residing on a logical volume created by the Linux Logical Volume Manager Valid for Linux86 only dynamic Replaces the dependency on the Copy Serialization value in the management class to perform an image backup without unmounting and remounting the file system read only Use this option only if the volume cannot be unmounted and remounted read only Tivoli Storage Manager backs up the volume as is without remounting it read only Corruption of the backup may occur if applications write to the volume while the backup is in progress In this case run chkdsk after a restore static Replaces the dependency on the Copy Serialization value in the management class Specifies that you want to perform an offline image backup during which the volume is unmounted and remounted read only This is the default for AIX AIX5L Solaris and HP UX Valid for AIX AIX5L Solaris HP UX and Linux86 only Examples Options file include image home MYMC imagetype static Command line imagetype static Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 161 Inclexcl Authorized User UNIX requires access authority The inclexcl option specifies the path and file name of an include exclude options file Place the inclexcl option in the include exclude list in your client system options file dsm sys Multiple incl
445. taining a copy group that specifies shared dynamic or dynamic for serialization backup If you select a management class that permits a file to be backed up or archived while it is in use the backup version or archived copy stored on the server might be a fuzzy copy A fuzzy copy is a backup version or archived copy that does not accurately reflect what is currently in the file It might contain some but not all of the changes If that is not acceptable select a management class that creates a backup version or archive copy only if the file does not change during a backup or archive If you restore or retrieve a file that contains a fuzzy copy the file might not be usable Copy Mode The Copy Mode attribute determines whether a file or directory is considered for incremental backup regardless of whether it changed or not since the last backup Tivoli Storage Manager does not check the mode for selective backups The value for this parameter can be one of the following e Modified The file is considered for incremental backup only if it has changed since the last backup A file is considered changed if any of the following are true The date or time of the last modification is different The file size is different The file attributes with the exception of archive are different However if only the file meta data changes such as access permissions but the file data does not change Tivoli Storage Manager may back up only the meta dat
446. tal command e You can perform the backup only on volumes with mounted file systems not on raw logical volumes e Incremental by date image backup does not inactivate files on the server therefore when files are restored none can be deleted e If this is the first image backup for the file system a full image backup is performed e Using mode incremental backs up only files with a changed date not files with changed permissions Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L HP UX Linux86 and Solaris only Chapter 11 Using Commands 281 Syntax gt gt Backup Image Parameters options You can use the mode and imagetype command line options with the backup filespec v gt lt options filespec filespec Specifies the name of one or more logical volumes If you want to back up more than one file system separate their names with spaces Do not use pattern matching characters If you do not specify a file system the logical volumes specified with the domain image option will process If you do not use the domain image option to specify file systems to process an error message displays and no image backup occurs Specify the file space over which the logical volume is mounted or the logical volume name If there is a file system configured in the system for a given volume you cannot back up the volume with the device name For example if dev 1v01 is mount
447. tation with a Server Required 28 Using Closed Registration 28 Using Open Registration 28 Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 Creating an Include Exclude List Optional Using Include Exclude Options Processing Include and Exclude Options Setting Environment Variables Setting Language Environment Variables Setting Font Defaults Setting Processing Environient Variables Setting Bourne and Korn Shell Variables Setting C Shell Variables EN Setting API Environmental Variables Chapter 3 Getting Started Tivoli Storage Manager Client Authentication Starting a GUI Session Password and User ID Configuration Wizard Starting a Command Line Session Using Batch Mode Using Interactive Mode Starting Additional Considerations Starting a Web Client Session Setting User Privileges Installing and Using the Web Client Starting the Client Scheduler Automatically Changing Your Password Sorting File Lists Displaying Online Help Ending a Session Online Forum Other Sources of Online Help Contacting Customer Support Chapter 4 Backing a Files and Directories Planning Your Backups Do You Want to Back Up or Archive Files Using the AFS DFS Backup Clients Using an Include Exclude Options List to Control Processing Encryption 3 Backing Up Files and Directories Full Incremental Backup Incremental By Date Backup Full Incremental versus Partial imeremental Incremental by date Backups Selecti
448. te will back up these files again Both full incrementals and incrementals by date back up new and changed files An incremental by date takes less time to process than a full incremental and requires less memory However unlike a full incremental an incremental by date does not maintain current server storage of all your workstation files because e It does not expire backup versions of files that are deleted from the workstation e It does not rebind backup versions to a new management class if the management class has changed e It does not back up files with attributes that have changed unless the modification dates and times have also changed such as Access control list ACL data e It ignores the copy group frequency attribute of management classes Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt INCRbydate gt lt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Command line dsmc incremental incrbydate Chapter 10 Using Options with Commands 251 Incremental Use the incremental option with the restore image command to ensure that any changes that were made to the base image are also applied to the restored image If you also use the deletefiles option changes include the deletion of files and directories that were in the original image but later deleted from the workstation Note
449. te at http www tivoli com support storage_mgr tivolimain html e Submit a problem management record PMR electronically at IBMSERV IBMLINK You can access the IBMLINK from the IBM Web site at 50 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide http www ibmlink ibm com e Submit a problem management record PMR electronically from the Tivoli Web site at http www tivoli com support e Send e mail to support tivoli com Customers in the United States can also call 1 800 TIVOLI8 1 800 848 6548 For product numbers 5697 TS9 5697 DRS or 5697 DPM call 1 800 237 5511 International customers should consult the Tivoli Web site for customer support telephone numbers If you have a problem with any Tivoli product you can contact Tivoli Customer Support See the Tivoli Customer Support Handbook at the following Web site http www tivoli com support handbook When you contact Tivoli Customer Support be prepared to provide identification information for your company so that support personnel can readily assist you Company identification information may also be needed to access various online services available on the Web site The Tivoli Customer Support Web site http www tivoli com support offers a guide to support services the Customer Support Handbook frequently asked questions FAQs and technical information including release notes user s guides redbooks and white papers
450. tem may not see performance improvement if it attempts to handle many random concurrent read requests e Sufficient bandwidth in the network to support the increased traffic Potentially undesirable aspects of running multiple sessions include e The client could produce multiple accounting records e The server may not start enough concurrent sessions To avoid this the server maxsessions parameter must be reviewed and possibly changed e A query node command may not summarize client activity Notes 1 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option 2 The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza Syntax gt gt RESOURceutilization number gt lt Parameters number Specifies the level of resources the Tivoli Storage Manager server and client can use during processing The range of values that you can specify is 1 through 10 Examples Options file resourceutilization 7 Command line Does not apply 196 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Retryperiod Authorized User The retryperiod option specifies the number of minutes the client scheduler waits between attempts to process a scheduled command that fails or between unsuccessful attempts to report results to the server Use thi
451. teristics clusternode yes The nodename value must be related to the resource group If nodename is not specified the cluster name is used The tcpclientaddress option must refer to the service IP address of the HACMP node The passworddir option must point to a directory on the shared volumes that are part of the cluster resource group The errorlogname and schedlogname options must point to files on the shared volumes that are part of the cluster resource group All inclexcl statements must point to files on the shared volumes that are part of the cluster resource group Set the manageservices statement to indicate that the scheduler or web client should be managed by the client acceptor daemon Other options can be set as desired Step 3 Configure the Client User Options File The client user options file dsm opt for the Tivoli Storage Manager client that will manage your clustered file spaces must reside on the shared volumes in the cluster resource group Define the DSM_CONFIG environment variable to point to this dsm opt file Make sure the dsm opt file contains the following settings The value of the servername option must be the server stanza in the dsm sys file which defines parameters for backing up clustered volumes The dsm sys file may reside on shared space If the dsm sys file resides on a local disk each node on the cluster must have a matching stanza Define clustered filespaces to be backed up with the
452. the CLI editor and command retrieve capability Note The editor is not supported on OS 390 UNIX System Services so the editor option should be set to No Examples Options file editor yes Command line editor yes This option is valid only on the initial command line It is not valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 145 Enablelanfree Authorized User The enablelanfree option specifies whether to enable an available LAN Free path to a storage area network SAN attached storage device A LAN Free path allows backup restore archive and retrieve processing between the Tivoli Storage Manager client and the SAN attached storage device To support LAN Free data movement you must install and configure the Tivoli Storage Manager Managed System for SAN Storage Agent on the client workstation For more information refer to the following publications e Tivoli Storage Manager for AIX Managed System for SAN Storage Agent User s Guide GC32 0771 e Tivoli Storage Manager for Sun Solaris Managed System for SAN Storage Agent User s Guide GC32 0781 e Tivoli Storage Manager for HP UX Managed System for SAN Storage Agent User s Guide GC32 0727 Notes 1 If you place the enablelanfree option in the client option file dsm opt but zero 0 bytes were transferred through the SAN during an operation ensure that you bind the data to a lanfree enabled management class 2 The enablelanfree option is no
453. the forward slash separator as in this example vol vo10 e You cannot use wildcards with exclude fs nas and include fs nas statements For example to exclude the vol voll1 file system of a NAS node called netappsj specify the following exclude statement exclude fs nas netappsj vol voll To exclude vol vol1 from backup services on all NAS nodes specify the following exclude statement exclude fs nas vol voll Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place these options in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt options pattern gt lt exclude exclude backup exclude file exclude file backup These options are equivalent Use these options to exclude a file or group of files from backup services and space management services if the HSM client is installed The exclude backup option only excludes files from normal backup but not from HSM exclude archive Excludes a file or a group of files that match the pattern from archive services only exclude compression Excludes files from compression processing if the compression option is set to yes This option applies to backups and archives exclude dir Excludes a directory its files and all its subdirectories and their files from Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 153 backup processing For example exclude dir test dan datal excludes test dan datal its files and all its subdirectories and their
454. the nasnodename option in your client system options file dsm sys The value in the client system_options file is the default but can be overridden on the command line See Na bage 17d for more information Use the mode option to specify whether to perform a full or differential NAS image backup A full image backup backs up the entire file system The default is a differential NAS image backup on files that change after the last full image backup If an eligible full image backup does not exist a full image backup is performed See 5J for more information Use the monitor option to specify whether you want to monitor a NAS file system ie backup and display processing information on your screen See FMonitor Use the monitor process command to display a list of all processes for which an administrative user ID has authority The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web Use the cancel process command to stop NAS back up processing For more information see Regardless of client platform NAS file system specifications use the forward slash separator as in this example vol vol0 Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Syntax gt gt Backup NAS filespec gt lt ain Parameters options You can use the
455. them first This is the default Yes Send small transactions without buffering them first When you specify tcpnodelay yes data packets less than the maximum transmission unit MTU size are sent immediately Specifying tcpnodelay yes might improve performance in higher speed networks Examples Options file tcpnodelay yes Command line Does not apply 216 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tcpport Authorized User The tcpport option specifies a TCP IP port address for a server You can obtain this address from your administrator Tivoli Storage Manager Firewall Support To enable the backup archive client Command Line Admin client and the Scheduler running in polling mode to run outside a firewall the port specified by the option tcpport default 1500 must be opened in the firewall Note Tivoli Storage Manager does not support the scheduler running in prompted mode outside a firewall The webports option enables the use of the Web client outside a firewall by specifying the TCP IP port number used by the Tivoli Storage Manager Client Acceptor daemon and the Web Client Agent service for communications with the Web GUI The ports specified with the webports option and the client_option httpport must be opened in the firewall See for more information considerations KE Tivoli eee Manager firewall support Supported Clients This option is valid for all
456. tion The Tivoli Storage Manager files are installed in the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory If you move the Tivoli Storage Manager files to another directory you must perform the following steps 1 Make sure the permissions of the installed files have not changed 2 Update the symbolic links for the installed files in the usr bin directory and in the directory that contains symbolic links for each language package you install for example usr 1ib n1s msg en_US 3 Ensure that every user of Tivoli Storage Manager sets the DSM_DIR environment variable to the newly installed directory A for special gaaside alioa when installing and contioutine the TSM client fot AFS DFS on an AIX workstation After installation completes see Cha for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Storsee Manager Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 11 Installing the AIX 5L Client Attention For current installation and configuration information for the Tivoli Storage Manager product refer to the README file that is shipped on the product installation media For current information concerning Tivoli Storage Manager supported platforms and documentation refer to the Web site at http www tivoli com support storage_megr tivolimain html The following packages are available on the installation media in the usr sys inst images directory tivoli tsm client ba aix51 64bit base Installs the backu
457. tion and then to use the exclude option in your include exclude options list to exclude the files that you do not want to back up Use the virtualmountpoint option to define virtual mount points for multiple file systems for local and remote file systems and to define more than one virtual mount point within the same file system Virtual mount points cannot be used in a file system handled by automounter Use the AFS DFS backup clients to process virtual mount points for AFS DFS file systems Note If the directory that you want to specify as a virtual mount point is a symbolic link set the followsymbolic option to Yes If that option is set to No the default you are not permitted to use a symbolic link as a virtual mount point After you define a virtual mount point you can specify the path and directory name with the domain option in either the default client options file or on the incremental command to include it for incremental backup services Users can also specify the path and directory name of the virtual mount point with the domain option in their own client options files and on the incremental command Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys Syntax gt gt _VIRTUALMountpoint directory gt lt Parameters directory Specifies the path an
458. tion see KD When you use the archive client the directory that is pointed to by the mount point is archived Set the Virtualmountpoint and Domain Options Use the exclude fs option to exclude afs or as a file space Add Tivoli Storage Manager virtual mount point definitions in your client system options dsm sys file for the portions of AFS or DFS that you want to back up Specify a Tivoli Storage Manager virtual mount point for every AFS volume or DFS fileset that you want to back up Set afsbackupmntpnt to yes the default or dfsbackupmntpnt to yes the default For example to schedule incremental backups of all AFS volumes define a virtual mount point for each directory that begins a user volume See the example below virtualmountpoint afs sanjose ibm com u alice virtualmountpoint afs sanjose ibm com u bob virtualmountpoint afs sanjose ibm com u charlie To schedule incremental backups of all DFS volumes define a virtual mount point for each directory that begins a user volume See the example below Appendix A The AFS and DFS File Backup Clients 337 virtualmountpoint sanjose ibm com fs u alice virtualmountpoint sanjose ibm com fs u bob virtualmountpoint sanjose ibm com fs u charlie Set corresponding domain options in your client user options dsm opt file to include the virtual mount points in your default client domain See the example below domain afs sanjose ibm com u alice domain af
459. tion is for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only query node hed Displays all the nodes for which a particular administrative bid user ID has authority to perform operations The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web backup nas El Creates an image backup of one or more file systems that belong to a Network Attached Storage NAS file server monitor process Displays current back up and restore processes for all NAS nodes for which an administrative user has authority The administrative user can then select one process to monitor cancel process Displays current back up and restore processes for all NAS bs nodes for which an administrative user has authority From the display the administrative user can select one process to cancel query backup Use the query backup command with the class option to Bod display information about file system images backed up for a NAS file server query filespace Use the query filespace command with the class option to B06 display a list of file spaces belonging to a NAS node delete filespace Use the delete filespace with the class option to display a R89 list of file spaces belonging to a NAS node so that you may choose one to delete Regardless of client platform NAS file system specifications use the f
460. tions memory required for client processing 58 restoring symbolic links saving standard access permissions 87 UNIX clients considerations when upgrading from ADSM AIX 3 1 2 11 13 users option 223 using options with commands 231 using options client 274 client command 274 69 315 V v2archive option 268 verbose option 224 versions data deleted attribute 100 deleted parameter 100 exists attribute 100 exists parameter 100 virtual mount point setting 58 virtualmountpoint option 225 setting 337 virtualnodename option 227 restore retrieve to another workstation 82 volinformation option 269 W Web client enable to run in a Swing enabled browser 44 establishing communications through firewall 47 159 managed by client acceptor 93 managed by client acceptor daemon 174 restrictions for NAS file systems 347 secure socket layer 353 specifying TCP IP port address for 159 starting 44 summary of options 118 supported browsers 44 using through a firewall 229 webports option 229 wildcard characters include or exclude groups of files 33 to back up groups of files 60 to include or exclude groups of files 34 using 277 using with commands 71 using with file specifications 71 X Xdefaults file setting font defaults 38 378 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Tivoli Program Number 5698 ISE 5697 ISE 5697 ISM Printed in the United States of America amp on recycl
461. tive and inactive versions by clicking on the View menu Display active inactive files item To display only the active versions the default click on the View menu gt Display active files only item If you try to restore both an active and inactive version of a file at the same time only the active version is restored To display active backup versions only click Display active files only from the View menu Performing a GUI Restore To restore backup versions of individual files or subdirectories 1 Click Restore files and directories to your system from the main window The Restore window appears 2 Expand the directory tree Select the selection boxes next to the files or directories you want to restore To search or filter files click the Search icon on the tool bar To search a Enter your search criteria in the Find Files Restore window b Click the Search button The Matching Files Restore window appears c Click the selection boxes next to the files you want to restore and close the Matching Files Restore window To filter 1 Enter your filter criteria in the Find Files Restore window 2 Click the Filter button The Restore window displays the filtered files 3 Click the selection boxes next to the filtered files or directories you want to restore 3 To modify specific restore options click the Options button Any options you change are effective during the current session only 4 Click Restore
462. ts query session Displays information about the current session restart restore Displays a list of restartable restore sessions and permits you to select one to restart restore Restores backup versions from Tivoli Storage Manager storage restore backupset Restores a backup set from the server or a local file You can also restore a backup from a tape device restore image Restores a backed up image restore nas Restores the image of a file system belonging to an NAS file server retrieve Retrieves archived files from Tivoli Storage Manager storage schedule Starts the client scheduler on the workstation selective Backs up selected files set access Authorizes another user to access your backup versions or archive copies set password Changes the Tivoli Storage Manager password for your workstation 272 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide El BEE El EIEI El Gl ENEIE E Starting and Ending a Client Command Session You can start or end a client command session in either batch mode or interactive mode Use batch mode when you want to enter a single client command Tivoli Storage Manager processes the command and returns to the shell command prompt Use interactive mode when you want to enter a series of commands Since Tivoli Storage Manager establishes connection to the server only once for interactive mode a
463. u want to include for backup archive image and space management services if you have the HSM client installed e Files within a broad group of excluded files that you want to include for encryption processing e Files within a broad group of excluded files that you want to include for compression processing e Objects to which you want to assign a specific management class and a management class name e A management class to assign to all objects to which you do not explicitly assign a management class If you do not assign a specific management class to objects Tivoli Storage Manager uses the default management class in the active policy set of your policy domain Notes 1 The exclude fs and exclude dir statements override all include statements that match the pattern 2 The server can also define these options with the inclexcl option Compression Processing If you want to include specific files or groups of files for compression processing during a backup or archive operation consider the following e You must set the compression option to yes to enable compression processing If you do not specify the compression option or you set the compression option to no Tivoli Storage Manager does not perform compression processing See for more information e Tivoli Storage Manager processes exclude fs exclude dir and other include exclude statements first Tivoli Storage Manager then considers any include compression st
464. ued how managed 89 97 maximum file size 275 overriding managment class during 103 purpose 54 running 85 sorting file list 49 symbolic links 87 using commands 87 using the Web client 44 archive command 60 archive copy group 98 attributes 99 archived files display 302 summary of options 112 archme option 236 archsymlinkasfile option 123 authorization summary of options 117 authorization rule deleting 287 querying 301 authorized user definition xi 1 tasks 1 authorizing groups to use Tivoli Storage Manager 157 Tivoli Storage Manager users 223 user to restore or retrieve your files 81 automating backup archive services central scheduling 91 using client scheduler 91 automount option 124 automounted file systems backing up 140 back up using LAN Free Data Movement 66 backing up summary of options 112 backup access control lists 58 access permissions 58 advanced considerations 66 allocated memory required for processing UNIX restrictions 58 automounted file systems 140 beginning with a specific directory 58 binding management classes to files 104 copy mode 101 delete file spaces 83 directory tree filter 59 backup continued displaying active and inactive 74 displaying processing status 61 enabling communications for LAN Free Data Movement 167 169 170 estimating processing time 59 excluding files from backup services 55 excluding files from space manager services 55 extended permissions 58 files manag
465. ume being backed up The range of values is one through 100 percent the default is 100 percent Examples Options file snapshotcachesize 40 Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 209 Subdir The subdir option specifies whether you want to include subdirectories of named directories for processing on the following commands archive delete archive incremental query archive query backup query backupset restore restore backupset retrieve selective For example if you specify subdir yes when backing up a specific path and file Tivoli Storage Manager recursively backs up all subdirectories under that path and any instances of the specified file that exist under any of those subdirectories Notes 1 2 The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option The server can also define this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No SUbdir gt lt Yes Parameters No Subdirectories are not processed This is the default Yes 210 Tivoli Storage Manager Subdirectories are processed Because the client program searches all subdirectories of a directory that is being processed processing can take longer to complete Specify Yes only when necessary Note If you use the preservepath option in addition to subdir yes it can affect which subdir
466. uments to dsm and dsmc commands For example you can use options to modify the format that displays dates times and numbers or to include your password so that Tivoli Storage Manager does not prompt for it In addition if you have more than one server available to you and you want to contact a different server for backup archive services other than the one specified in your client user options file specify the server with the servername option For example dsm servername server amp us b Starting a Web Client Session You can use the Web client to perform backup archive restore and retrieve operations from workstations or platforms that support at least a JRE 1 3 1 Swing enabled browser The Web client facilitates the use of assistive devices for users with disabilities and contains improved keyboard navigation The native look and feel of the platform running the browser is preserved The Web client runs on the following browsers e Netscape Navigator 6 0 or later with the Java support option installed e Netscape Navigator 4 7 or later with Java Plug in 1 3 1 e Microsoft Internet Explorer 5 0 or later with Java Plug in 1 3 1 To run the Web Client from Netscape browsers Enable JavaScript must be checked This setting is enabled by default but to verify it 1 Open Netscape Navigator s Edit menu and select Preferences 2 In the Preferences dialog under Category select Advanced 3 Ensure there is a check mark next to
467. urce group is transferred back to the node re entering the cluster A sample start script StartClusterTsmClient sh smp is provided in the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory Stop Script Enter the full path name of the script that stops the server This script is called by the cluster event scripts and must reside on a local disk This script must be in the same location on each cluster node that might stop the server The stop script is used in the following cases a when HACMP is stopped b when a failover occurs due to a component failure in a resource group the other members are stopped so that the entire group can be restarted on the target node in the failover c when a fallback occurs and the resource group is stopped on the node currently hosting it to allow transfer back to the node re entering the cluster A sample stop script StopClusterIsmClient sh smp is provided in the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory 4 Press Enter to add your information to the HACMP for AIX 5 Press F10 after the command completes to exit smit and return to the command line Press F3 to perform other configuration tasks The Tivoli Storage Manager client must be in a resource group with a cascading or rotating takeover relationship The client does not support a concurrent access resource group See HACMP for AIX 4 4 1 Planning Guide SC23 4277 for additional information regarding HACMP topology and strategy Creating an HAC
468. urned to the Backup Restore Archive or Retrieve window after a successful operation completes a Bo El inclexcl Specifies the path and file name of an include exclude options file include These options are equivalent Use these options to include backup include files or assign management classes for include file backup processing include archive Includes files or assigns management classes for archive processing include compression Includes files for compression processing if you specify compression yes This option applies to backups and archives include encrypt Includes specified files for encryption processing include fs nas include image Assigns a management class when used with the backup nas command If you do not specify a NAS node name the file system identified applies to all NAS file servers The backup nas command ignores all other include statements This option is for AIX and Solaris clients only Includes a file space or logical volume or assigns a management class when used with the backup image command The backup image command ignores all other include options This option is valid for AIX HP UX Solaris and Linux86 only BIBI B El Bl memoryefficientbackup Specifies a memory saving backup algorithm for incremental backups when used with the incremental command snapshotcachesize Use the snapshotcachesize option with the backup image command the i
469. valid in interactive mode Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 179 Nodename Authorized User Use the nodename option in your client system options file dsm sys to identify your workstation to the server You can use different node names to identify multiple operating systems on your workstation When you use the nodename option Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for the password assigned to the node you specify if a password is required a different workstation use the virtualnodename option See for more information If you are working from a different workstation you can use the nodename option even if the passwordaccess option is set to generate however the password will be stored in the registry To prevent this use the virtualnodename option instead of nodename When connecting to a server the client must identity itself to the server This login identification is determined in the following manner e In the absence of a nodename entry in the client system options file dsm sys or a virtualnodename entry in the client user options file dsm opt or a virtual node name specified on a command line the default login ID is the name that the hostname command returns e If anodename entry exists in the client system options file dsm sys the nodename entry overrides the name that the hostname command returns e If a virtualnodename entry exists in the client user options file dsm opt or a virtual node name is sp
470. ve Backup Saving Access Permissions Setting a Virtual Mount Point Estimating Backup Processing Time Backing Up Data Using the GUI 3 Backing up Data Using the Command Line Displaying Backup Processing Status Performing an Image Backup LAN Free Data Movement Backing Up NAS File Systems lt 29 30 34 36 36 38 38 39 40 40 41 41 42 42 42 42 43 43 44 44 46 46 48 48 49 50 50 50 50 50 53 58 54 54 S00 DO DO 56 DF 57 58 58 58 09 09 60 61 62 66 66 iii Backup Additional Considerations 66 Chapter 5 Restoring Files and Directories 73 No Query Restore i 73 Standard Restore Proeese 74 No Query Restore Process 74 Do You Want to Restore an Active or lace Backup 74 Performing a GUI Restore 75 Performing a Command Line Restore 79 Performing Large Restore Operations 76 Performing Point in Time Restores VT Restoring an Image 78 Restoring Data from a Backup Set 79 Restoring an Entire or Partial Backup Set 80 Restoring Backup Sets Using the GUI 80 Restore Additional Considerations 81 Authorizing Another User to Restore Retrieve Your Files 81 Restoring or Retrieving Another User s Files 81 Restore or Retrieve Files to Another Workstation 82 Restoring a Disk In Case of Disk Loss 82 Deleting File Spaces Soe oa 83 Chapter 6 Archiving and Retr
471. ve Clients Installation and User s Guide Task Restore files specified in the filelist to a different location Command res filelist home avi restorelist txt home NewRestoreLocation Chapter 11 Using Commands 317 Restore Backupset The restore backupset command restores a backup set from the server a local file or a local tape device If you are restoring a file space from a backup set to a system that did not perform the original backup you may need to e Specify a destination e Use the syntax below to specify the source file e Do both of the above dsmc restore backupset backupsetname fsname destfs subdir yes You must be a root user to restore an entire backup set from the server otherwise only files you own are restored A backup set can also be restored from a tape device on the AIX AIX 5L Solaris and HP clients See more information If you are unable to restore a backup set from portable media check with your Tivoli Storage Manager administrator to ensure that the portable media was created on a device using a compatible format Note There is no support in the API for the backup set format Therefore backup set data that was backed up via the API cannot be restored or used Attention If the object you want to restore is part of a backup set generated on a node and the node name is changed on the server any backup set objects that were generated prior to the name change will not match the ne
472. ve device and mount the CD ROM drive From the AIX command line type smitty install and press Enter Select Install and Update Software and press Enter Select Install and Update From ALL Available Software and press Enter ar oN At the INPUT device directory for software prompt press the F4 key and select the CD ROM device containing the installation CD ROM or specify the directory containing the installation images and press Enter 6 At the SOFTWARE to install prompt press the F4 key Select the Tivoli Storage Manager filesets you want to install and press Enter 7 Select the options you want and press Enter to begin the installation The Tivoli Storage Manager files are installed in the usr tivoli tsm client ba bin directory If you move the Tivoli Storage Manager files to another directory you must perform the following steps 1 Make sure the permissions of the installed files have not changed 2 Update the symbolic links for the installed files in the usr bin directory and in the directory that contains symbolic links for each language package you install for example usr 1ib n1s msg en_US 3 Ensure that every user of Tivoli Storage Manager sets the DSM_DIR environment variable to the newly installed directory After installation completes see Chapte a for required and optional tasks to perform before using Tivoli Storage Manager Chapter 1 Installing Tivoli Storage Manager 13 Installing the HP UX Client
473. vel projl subdir yes e Separate options with a blank space when you enter more than one option in a command e The maximum number of characters for a file name is 256 The maximum combined length of the file name and path name is 1024 characters Table 31 Client Command Options Command Option Description Commands Page archmc Overrides the default management archive bad class for a file or a group of files Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 231 Table 31 Client Command Options continued Command Option Description Commands Page class Specifies whether to display a list of query backup b3d NAS objects or client objects when delete filespace using the following commands query filespace deletefiles Deletes the local copy of files from archive b3s your workstation after they are restore image archived on the server Can also be used with the restore image command and the incremental option to delete files from the restored image that are deleted from the file space after the image is created description Specifies a description for a file that archive bad you are archiving deleting or delete archive retrieving Also specifies the query archive description of a backupset that you query backupset want to query retrieve detail Displays management class attributes delete filespace bad for available management classes query mgmtclass query filespace dirsonly Backs up restores archives retrieves
474. vel source directory as source to be restored If a required target directory does not exist it is created If a target file has the same name as a source file it is overwritten Use the replace prompt option to have Tivoli Storage Manager prompt you before files are overwritten Note The Tivoli Storage Manager Client API does not support this option Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax subtree gt gt PRESERvepath gt lt I comp lete nobase none Parameters subtree Creates the lowest level source directory as a subdirectory of the target directory Files from the source directory are stored in the new subdirectory This is the default complete Restores the entire path starting from the root into the specified directory The entire path includes all the directories except the file space name nobase Restores the contents of the source directory without the lowest level or base directory into the specified destination directory none Restores all selected source files to the target directory No part of the source path at or above the source directory is reproduced at the target If you specify subdir yes Tivoli Storage Manager restores all files in the source directories to the single target directory Examples Command line For the examples below assume that the server file space contains the following backup copies fs h1 m1 file a fs h1 m1 file b fs h1 m1 11 fi
475. vents access to the volume by other system applications during the operation Use the imagetype dynamic option to back up the volume as is without remounting it read only Corruption of the backup may occur if applications write to the volume while the backup is in progress In this case run chdsk after a restore For Linux86 only Tivoli Storage Manager performs an online image backup of file systems residing on a logical volume created by the Linux Logical Volume Manager during which the volume is available to other system applications Online image backup requires a Version 5 1 Tivoli Storage Manager server You can use the imagetype option with the backup image command or the include image option to specify whether to perform an offline or online image backup See for more information The Linux Logical Volume Manager allows the creation of a snapshot of a logical volume while the logical volume itself is still online The snapshot is created inside the same volume group as the source logical volume You must ensure that the volume group provides enough free disk space to create the snapshot The snapshot contains the old data blocks while the modified data is stored in the source logical volume Use the snapshotcachesize option with the backup image command in the dsm opt file or with the include image option to specify an appropriate snapshot size so that all old data blocks can be stored while the image backup occurs A snapshot size of
476. ver When you delete an authorization rule you revoke user access to any files or images specified by that rule Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Delete ACcess gt lt y I Parameters options For information about common options that you can use with this command Examples Task Display a list of current authorization rules and select the rules you want to delete Command delete access See the following screen example Index Type Node Owner Path 1 Backup NODE1 USER1 home dev proja list 2 Archive NODE3 LUIE home fin budg depta 3 Backup NODE4 USER2 home plan exp deptc 4 Archive NODES USER2S_ home mfg invn parta Enter Index of rule s to delete or quit to cancel To delete the authorization rules that let luie and user2s access your files or images type 2 4 or 2 4 and press Enter Chapter 11 Using Commands 287 Delete Archive The delete archive command deletes archived files from server storage Your administrator must give you authority to delete archived files Attention When you delete archived files you cannot retrieve them Verify that the files are obsolete before you delete them Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt Delete ARchive filespec gt lt atiis Filespec lt Parameters options You can use these command line options with the delete archive command de
477. ves have different goals Backups protect against file damage The server maintains a sequence of backup versions for each file that you back up and older versions are deleted as newer versions are made The number of backup versions the server maintains is set by your administrator Note If you need to frequently create archives for the same data consider using instant archives backup sets instead Frequent archive operations can create a large amount of metadata in the server database increasing database growth and decreasing performance for operations such as expiration See Re 9 for more information on how backup sets can be penciated wd restored Archive copies are more permanent They maintain a file in a particular state indefinitely although your administrator can limit how long archives are kept The server can store an unlimited number of archive versions of a file Archives are useful if you need to go back to a particular version of your files or you want to delete a file from your workstation and retrieve it at a later time if necessary For example you might need to save spreadsheets for tax purposes but because you are not using them ou do not want to leave them on your workstation See j i j for more information about archiving and Temieving files Use backups to protect against unforeseen damage to your files and use archives for maintaining more permanent versions of your files Using the
478. vol vol0 Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 155 Followsymbolic The followsymbolic option specifies whether you want to restore files to symbolic links or use a symbolic link as a virtual mount point Use this option with the restore and retrieve commands Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX clients Options File Place this option in the client options file dsm opt Syntax No gt gt FOL owsymbolic gt lt Yes Parameters No Specifies that you do not want to restore to symbolic links or to use symbolic links as virtual mount points This is the default Yes Specifies that you want to restore to symbolic links or to use a symbolic link as a virtual mount point Examples Options file followsymbolic Yes Command line fol Yes 156 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Groups Authorized User The groups option specifies groups on your workstation that you want to authorize to request Tivoli Storage Manager services from the server You can use the groups option more than once to specify several group names If you do not specify group names with the groups option or user IDs with the users option all users can request Tivoli Storage Manager services If you use both the groups option and the users option only users specified with these options can request Tivoli Storage Manager serv
479. w file To manually stop the client scheduler enter the kill command if it is running in the background or press q or Ctrl C if it is running in the foreground To restart the client scheduler enter the schedule command again Tape prompting does not occur during a scheduled event regardless of the tapeprompt option setting in your options file information Displaying Information about Scheduled Work To view schedules that are defined for your client node enter dsmc query schedule Tivoli Storage Manager displays detailed information about all scheduled work for your client node The figure below displays sample query schedule output 94 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Schedule Name Description Action Options Objects Priority Next Execution Duration Period Day of Week Expire Schedule Name Description Action Options Objects Priority Next Execution Duration Period Day of Week Expire DAILY_INC Daily System wide backup Incremental QUIET 1 30 minutes 4 Hours 1 Day Any Never WEEKLY_INC Weekly backup for project files Incremental QUIET proj 1 60 minutes 8 Hours 7 Days Friday Never Figure 2 Sample Query Schedule Output The schedule name DAILY_INC starts a daily incremental backup The next incremental backup will start in 30 minutes Because no objects are listed Tivoli Storage Manager runs th
480. w node name Ensure that the node name is the same as the node for which the backup set was generated Restoring Backup Sets in a SAN Environment You can restore backup sets in a storage area network SAN in the following ways e If the backup set is on a SAN attached storage device specify the device using the filename parameter and use the location tape option Tivoli Storage Manager restores the backup set directly from the SAN attached storage device gaining high speed restore performance Note You must ensure that the correct tape is mounted in the SAN attached tape drive prior to issuing the restore command The backup archive client will not initiate a SCSI autochanger to mount the tape automatically e If the backup set is not on local media or a SAN attached storage device you can specify the backup set using the backupsetname parameter Use the location server option to restore the backup set directly from the server via the LAN Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt REStore BACKUPSET backupsetname PoS sa ee L Hieron E sourcefilespec 318 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide gt lt destinationfi Heep Parameters options You can use these command line options with the restore backupset options You can use these common_options with the restore backupset command quiet replace subdir See Cha
481. with a non administrative ID Tivoli Storage Manager prompts for an administrator ID Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Syntax gt gt Cancel Process gt Parameters There are no parameters for this option Examples Task Cancel a current NAS restore process Command cancel process Chapter 11 Using Commands 285 Cancel Restore The cancel restore command displays a list of your restartable restore sessions in the server database You can only cancel one restartable restore session at a time Run the cancel restore command again to cancel additional restores To restart restartable restore sessions use the restart restore command Use the cancel restore command when e You cannot back up files affected by the restartable restore e Restartable restore sessions lock the file space so that files cannot be moved off sequential volumes Supported Clients This command is valid for all UNIX clients Syntax gt gt CANcel Restore gt lt aem Parameters options See Chapte ng Pro a 07 for information about common options that you can use with the cancel restore command Examples Task Cancel a restore operation Command cancel restore 286 Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup Archive Clients Installation and User s Guide Delete Access The delete access command deletes authorization rules for files or images that are stored on the ser
482. xample the user tivoli is an Authorized User while running dsmc since the dsmc owner execution permission bit is set to s Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 xi rwsr xr x 1 tivoli dsmdev 2880479 Nov 5 13 42 dsmc This book provides information to help you set up and use the backup archive client on your workstation You should be familiar with your workstation your operating system and your basic system administration Tivoli Storage Manager books are translated into other languages Contact your Tivoli Storage Manager representative for a list of available translations Conventions Used in This Book This book uses the following typographical conventions Table 1 Typographical Conventions Example Description dsmc niIm A series of lowercase letters with an extension indicates Tivoli Storage Manager program file names archive Boldface type indicates a command that you type at a workstation such as a command you type on a command line dateformat Boldface italic type indicates a Tivoli Storage Manager option The bold type is used to introduce the option or used in an example All other times in the text it appears as regular type Occasionally file names are entered in boldface italic for emphasis filespec Italicized type indicates either the name of a parameter a new term or a placeholder for information that you provide Italics are also used for emphasis in the text maxcmdretries Monospa
483. xies tab 3 Uncheck Use browser settings e Change your browser settings to enable a direct connection to the Internet For Netscape Navigator Open the Edit menu and select Preferences Under Category expand the Advanced section select Proxies and click Direct connection to the Internet For Internet Explorer Open the Tools menu and select Internet Options Select the Connections tab and click the LAN Settings button Uncheck the Use a proxy server check box Additional information about running Swing applets can be found in Sun s Java Tutorial http java sun com docs books tutorial uiswing start swingApplet html You can back up and restore your own data or an administrator can centralize the backup or restore operations of many clients To use the Web client specify the URL of the client workstation running the Web client in your Web browser You also need to specify the local host port number the default is 1581 The Web client is supported when used in conjunction with a Tivoli Storage Manager server that is Version 3 or higher Chapter 3 Getting Started 45 Note Entering a different URL or pressing the browser Back button during an operation disconnects the Web client and causes the current operation to end However network attached storage NAS operations will continue after disconnect Setting User Privileges If you plan to use the Web client ensure that you were assigned an administrative user
484. xpand a node in the tree click the plus sign next to an object in the tree Notes a The root node called Nodes is not selectable This node only appears if Tivoli Data Protection for NDMP is enabled on the server b NAS nodes display on the same level as the client workstation s node Only nodes to which the administrator has authority appear c NAS nodes will expand to reveal file systems Under each file system are images which you can select to restore 3 Click the selection boxes next to the nodes file systems or images you want to restore 4 Click Restore The Restore Destination window appears Enter the information in the Restore Destination window Note You can restore NAS file system images to any volume on the NAS file server from which they were backed up You cannot restore images to another NAS file server 5 Click Restore The NAS Restore Task List window displays the restore processing status and progress bar The number next to the progress bar indicates the estimated size of the restore After the restore completes the NAS Restore Report window displays processing details including the actual size of the restore Note If it is necessary to close the Web browser session current NAS operations will continue after disconnect You can use the Dismiss button on the NAS Restore Task List window to quit monitoring processes without ending the current operation 6 Optional To monitor processing of an operation
485. y Steps for Backing Up Files Volume Device Type Support for an Image Backup Symbolic ie Management Table f r Backup and Restore gt eo Se os e Symbolic Link Management Table for Archive and Retrieve lt i Ge ye S Return Codes and Meanings Default Values in the Standard Management Class Copyright IBM Corp 1993 2002 xii XV 23 30 sal 32 33 34 53 63 69 3 87 92 99 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 TCP IP Options Shared Memory Conmmunieation Options Server and Node Options Backup and Archive Processing Options Restore and Retrieve Processing Options Scheduling Options Format Options Command Processing Options Authorization Options Error Processing Options Transaction Processing Options Web Client Options Encrypting or Decrypting Data Client Command Options Entering Commands Commands F Maximum File Size for Backup Restor Archive and Retrieve Command Recall and Edit Functions Wildcard Characters Supported File Systems and ACL Support Differences Between AIX File Backup Clients Processing Options fe ake ed Sis os NAS Options and Commands NAS Options and Commands 110 110 111 112 115 115 116 116 s 117 117 118 118 148 231 271 271 275 276 2277 294 335 339 349 350 Vii
486. y in interactive mode than in batch mode To start a client command session in interactive mode enter the dsmc or dsmc loop command When you press Enter this prompt displays on your screen tsm gt When you are in interactive mode do not precede commands with dsme For example instead of typing dsmc archive to archive a file type only archive Depending upon the current setting of your passwordaccess option Tivoli Storage Manager may prompt you for your password the first time you enter a command in an interactive session When you type your password and press Enter the password does not display on your screen If Tivoli Storage Manager is unable to authenticate your ID and password you cannot use Tivoli Storage Manager services After you start an interactive session some options are valid in interactive mode and remain in effect throughout the session unless you reenter them with a different setting However most options are valid only on the initial command line To identify which options must be entered in this way see a If Tivoli Storage Manager does not find the ce sys file it displays an error message and stops processing In this case see your administrator to determine the location of the option file Tivoli Storage Manager should use Chapter 3 Getting Started 43 for information on how to start and use s ihe command line dienik Starting Additional Considerations You can include options as arg
487. y through the native Graphical User Interface GUI e Locally through the native client command line interface e Remotely or locally through the Web client interface Root and Authorized User Tasks The phrases root user and Authorized User identify tasks that only root users and Authorized Users can perform An Authorized User is any user running with a real user ID of 0 root or who owns the Tivoli Storage Manager executable with the owner execution permission bit set to s As a root user you can perform the following tasks e Install the backup archive client e Back up or archive any file on a user s system e Restore or retrieve any file in storage e Back up restore or query an image e Restore or query a backup set File access permissions do not restrict a root user As a root user or an Authorized User you can perform the following tasks e Set or change the password for your workstation if a password is required e Register your workstation with a server e Use the scheduler to perform scheduled tasks for your client node e Back up archive restore or retrieve all eligible files in all locally mounted file systems on your workstation as permitted by your operating system file access permissions e Grant users access to specific files in storage e Delete backup and archive file systems from storage The node must have been granted backup or archive delete authority by a server administrator Migrating
488. y to back up the destination file space the attempt will fail because the original restore was not completed You can restart the restore at the point of interruption by entering the restart restore command or you can delete the restartable restore using the cancel restore command If you restart the interrupted restore it will restart with the first transaction which may consist of one or more files not completely restored when the interruption occurred Because of this you may receive some replace prompts for files from the interrupted transaction which were already restored The differences between the standard restore process and the no query restore process are outlined below Standard Restore Process 1 The client queries the server for a list of files backed up for the client file space being restored 2 The server sends a list of backed up files that match the restore criteria If both active and inactive files are to be restored information about all backed up files is sent to the client 3 The list of files returned from the server is sorted in client memory to determine the file restore order and to minimize tape mounts required to perform the restore 4 The client tells the server to restore file data and directory objects 5 The directories and files to be restored are sent from the server to the client No Query Restore Process 1 The client tells the server that a no query restore is going to be performed and provi
489. you backed up the files Virtualnodename cannot be set to the hostname of the machine You can use the virtualnodename option when you start Tivoli Storage Manager or you can add the virtualnodename option to your client user options file dsm opt Use the virtualnodename option on the dsm command if you are borrowing another user s machine and you do not want to update their client user options file Tivoli Storage Manager prompts you for the password for your original node After you enter the correct password all file systems from your original workstation appear in the Restore or Retrieve window You can restore or retrieve files as if you were working on your own workstation Attention When you use this method to access files you have access to all files backed up and archived from your workstation You are considered a virtual root user You can use the virtualnodename option in a command For example to restore your projx files enter dsmc restore virtualnodename nodeone home monnett projx If you do not want to restore or retrieve the files to the same directory name on the alternate workstation enter a different destination The considerations for retrieving files are the same as restoring files Restoring a Disk In Case of Disk Loss Tivoli Storage Manager can recover your files only if you can run the client If the file system that contains the client is lost you must reinstall the client before you can recover your
490. you select multiple images to restore using the pick option do not use the monitor option or you will serialize the restores To start multiple restore processes simultaneously when restoring multiple images do not specify monitor yes Use the monitor option to specify whether you want to monitor a NAS file system image restore and display processing information on your screen See Use the monitor process command to display a list of current restore processes for all NAS nodes for which your administrative user ID has authority The authorized administrative user ID should have at least client owner authority over both the NAS node and the client workstation node they are using either from command line or from the web Use the cancel process command to stop NAS restore processing For more information see Regardless of client platform NAS file system specifications use the forward slash separator as in this example vol vol0 Supported Clients This command is valid for AIX AIX 5L and Solaris clients only Syntax gt gt REStore ae eer sourcefilespec gt lt options destinationtitespec Parameters options You can use these common options with the restore nas command nasnodename quiet verbose For more information see Chapter 11 Using Commands 323 You can use these command line options with the restore nas command inactive monitor pick pitdate pittime For more information se
491. your local file systems can also be specified with this option You can use this option if you do not specify a migration server with the migrateserver option Examples Options file defaults server_a Command line Does not apply Chapter 9 Setting Processing Options 135 Dfsbackupmntpnt Root User The dfsbackupmntpnt option specifies whether you want Tivoli Storage Manager to see a DFS mount point as a mount point or as a directory If Tivoli Storage Manager sees it as a mount point it backs up only the name of the mounted fileset during a backup operation It does not back up the subtree by starting from the mount point directory For more information on using the dfsbackupmntpnt option see Tha Zin the Appendix Supported Clients This option is valid for all UNIX cients Options File Place this option in the client system options file dsm sys within a server stanza or in the client options file dsm opt Use this option with the dsmdfs and dsmcdfs client programs Syntax Yes gt gt DFSBackupmntpnt gt lt LNo Parameters Yes Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager views all DFS mount points as mount points and backs up only the name of the mounted fileset for any mount point it encounters during a backup operation This is the default No Specifies that Tivoli Storage Manager views all DFS mount points as directories and backs up the contents of files and subdirectories of any mount p
492. ys processing details Click the Help button in the Backup Report window for context help The command line displays similar information On the backup archive command line the name of each file displays after it is sent to the server The progress indicator shows overall progress Informational messages may display as follows e Directory gt Indicates the directory that you back up e Normal File gt Any file that is not a directory symbolic link or special file e Special File gt Special files define devices for the system or temporary files created by processes There are three basic types of special files FIFO first in first out block and character FIFO files are also called pipes Pipes are created by one process to temporarily allow communication with another process These files cease to exist when the first process finishes Block and character files define devices Tivoli Storage Manager processes only device and named pipe special files Socket special files are not processed e Symbolic Link gt Indicates that Tivoli Storage Manager backs up a symbolic link e Updating gt Indicates that only the file meta data is sent if file attributes change and not the data itself e Expiring gt Indicates an object file or directory on the server that no longer exists on the client is expired and made inactive on the server e Total number of objects inspected e Total number of objects backed up e Total number o

Tivoli Storage Manager for UNIX Backup

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents